advertisement
Basic Operation Guide
Before Using the Machine
Originals and Print Media
Registering Destinations in the Address Book
Copying
Fax
Printing
Scanning
Network
Setting from a PC
Maintenance
Troubleshooting
Machine Settings
Appendix
Please read this guide before operating this product.
After you finish reading this guide, store it in a safe place for future reference.
Manuals for the Machine
Manuals for the Machine
The manuals for this machine are divided as follows. Please refer to them for detailed information.
Read this manual first.
Starter Guide
Read this manual to learn the required settings and connections before using the machine.
●
●
●
●
●
What you can do with the machine
Machine setup
Connection and settings before using the machine
Connecting the machine to a network
Software installation
Read this manual next.
Basic Operation Guide
Read this manual to learn information about basic operations and machine functions.
This Document
●
●
●
●
●
●
Safety instructions
Registering destinations in the Address Book
Copy
Fax
Specifications
Read the sections of these manuals that correspond to your intended use.
e-Manual
Read this manual to learn detailed information about advanced machine operations and functions, and how to customize machine settings.
(Located on User Manual CD-ROM)
●
●
●
●
●
●
Advanced features
Scan
Network
Remote user interface
Security
Troubleshooting
● Considerable effort has been made to make sure that the manuals for the machine are free of inaccuracies and omissions. However, as we are constantly improving our products, if you need an exact specification,
● please contact Canon.
The machine illustration on the cover may differ slightly from your machine.
Overview of Machine Functions
Depending on the system configuration and product purchased, some functions may not be available.
Copying
In addition to the Color and B/W copying, you can use various copy functions.
Basic Operation Guide
e-Manual
Copying
Faxing
In addition to the normal faxing, you can send faxes from a computer and send I-faxes. Received fax documents can be also forwarded to specified destinations such as a shared folder in a computer.
Basic Operation Guide
e-Manual
Fax
Printing
In addition to the printing from a computer, you can print a document directly from memory media.
Basic Operation Guide
e-Manual
Printing
Scanning
You can store scanned documents in a networked computer, send to a file server, or save directly to a USB memory.
Basic Operation Guide
e-Manual
Scanning
Network
This machine can be connected to a network. Connecting to a network enables you to use various functions.
Basic Operation Guide
e-Manual
Network Settings
E-mail function
Scanned documents can be sent as email file attachments.
Basic Operation Guide
e-Manual
Remote User
Interface
You can set and manage this machine easily and quickly from a computer.
Basic Operation Guide
Settings from a PC (see on p. 10-1)
e-Manual
Setting from a PC
Security function
You can limit the use of the machine by setting the IDs. You can also limit the use of some functions.
e-Manual
Security
v
Contents
Contents
Manuals for the Machne ......................................
Overvew of Machne Functons .........................
Contents .................................................................v
How to Use Ths Gude ........................................x
Symbols Used in This Manual ...............................ix
Keys and Buttons Used in This Manual .............ix
Abbreviations Used in This Manual ....................ix
Illustrations Used in This Manual.........................ix
Important Safety Instructons ............................ x
Installation ....................................................................x
Power Supply .............................................................xi
Handling ......................................................................xi
Maintenance and Inspections .............................xii
Consumables ........................................................... xiv
Others ........................................................................ xiv
Telephone Equipment ......................................... xiv
Installaton Requrements and Handlng .......xv
Temperature and Humidity Conditions .......... xv
Power Supply Requirements .............................. xv
Installation Requirements ................................... xv
Installation Space ................................................... xvi
Maintenance and Inspections ........................... xvi
Customer Support ................................................. xvi
Legal Notces ......................................................xv
IPv6 Ready Logo .................................................... xvii
Trademarks .............................................................. xvii
Copyright ................................................................. xvii
Third Party Software ............................................ xvii
Disclaimers .............................................................xviii
About the Part Containing Mercury
(Applicable Only to the USA) ...........................xviii
For CA, USA only...................................................xviii
Legal Limitations on the Usage of Your
Product and the Use of Images ......................xviii
Commission) ............................................................ xix
Users in the U.S.A. .................................................. xix
Users in Canada ...................................................... xxi
Utilisation au Canada .......................................... xxii
Laser Safety .......................................................xx
CDRH Regulations ............................................... xxiii
1 Before Using the Machine ...........1-1
Machne Components ...................................... 1-2
External View (Front) .............................................1-2
External View (Back) ..............................................1-4
Internal View ............................................................1-5
Control Panel ...................................................... 1-6
Main Control Panel ................................................1-6
Registering the Custom Keys .............................1-8
Left Side of Control Panel.................................1-10
Right Side of Control Panel .............................1-10
Dsplay Parts and Functons ..........................1-11
Main Menu Screen ..............................................1-11
Copy Top Screen ..................................................1-12
Send Type Selection Screen ............................1-13
Store Type Selection Screen ............................1-14
(Color imageCLASS MF9280Cdn Only) .......1-14
Log In Mode ..........................................................1-14
Toner Cartrdges ..............................................1-15
Maintaining the Toner Cartridges .................1-16
Checking the Toner Level .................................1-17
Checkng the Devce Informaton ................1-18
Enterng Characters ........................................1-19
Telephone Lne Settng ..................................1-20
Tmer Settngs ..................................................1-22
Setting the Sleep Mode ....................................1-22
Setting Auto Clear Time ....................................1-23
Setting the Daylight Saving Time .................1-24
2 Originals and Print Media ...........2-1
Orgnals Requrements ................................... 2-2
Scannng Area .................................................... 2-3
Placng Orgnals ............................................... 2-4
On the Platen Glass ...............................................2-4
In the Feeder ............................................................2-5
Paper Requrements ......................................... 2-7
Prntable Area .................................................... 2-9
Loadng Paper ..................................................2-10
In the Paper Drawer ...........................................2-10
In the Stack Bypass Tray ....................................2-16
Settng Paper Sze and Type ..........................2-22
For the Stack Bypass Tray .................................2-22
Registering Irregular Paper Sizes for the
Stack Bypass Tray ................................................2-26
For the Paper Drawer .........................................2-28
3 Registering Destinations in the
Address Book ..................................3-1
Storng/Edtng Address Book ........................ 3-2
Registering Fax Numbers in the
Address Book ...........................................................3-2
Registering Fax Numbers Obtained via an
LDAP Server in the Address Book ....................3-7
Registering E-Mail Addresses in the
Address Book ........................................................3-10
Registering E-Mail Addresses Obtained via an LDAP Server in the Address Book ....3-13
Registering I-Fax Addresses in the
Address Book ........................................................3-16
Registering File Server Addresses in the
Address Book ........................................................3-18
Registering Group Addresses in the
Address Book ........................................................3-24
Address Book ........................................................3-30
Storng/Edtng One-Touch ...........................3-32
Registering Fax Numbers in One-Touch .....3-32
Registering Fax Numbers Obtained via an
LDAP Server in One-Touch ..............................3-37
Registering E-Mail Addresses in
One-Touch .............................................................3-40
Contents
Registering E-Mail Addresses Obtained via an LDAP Server in One-Touch..................3-43
Registering I-Fax Addresses in
One-Touch .............................................................3-46
Registering File Server Addresses in
One-Touch .............................................................3-49
Registering Group Addresses in
One-Touch .............................................................3-55
Checking/Editing Addresses Registered in
One-Touch .............................................................3-59
Erasing Addresses Registered in
One-Touch .............................................................3-62
4 Copying ........................................4-1
Overvew of Copy Functons ........................... 4-2
Basc Copyng Method ..................................... 4-4
Cancelng Copy Jobs ......................................... 4-6
Selectng Color Mode ....................................... 4-7
Selectng Paper Source .................................... 4-9
Copying on Paper in Drawers ............................4-9
Using Stack Bypass Tray with Standard
Paper Sizes .............................................................4-11
Using Stack Bypass Tray with Irregular
Sizes of Paper........................................................4-13
Using Stack Bypass Tray with Envelopes ....4-15
Adjustng Densty............................................4-19
Adjusting Base Color .........................................4-21
2-Sded Copyng ..............................................4-23
1 to 2-Sided Copying .........................................4-24
2 to 2-Sided Copying .........................................4-26
2 to 1-Sided Copying .........................................4-28
Enlarge/Reduce Images .................................4-31
Preset Zoom ..........................................................4-31
Custom Copy Ratio .............................................4-33
Selectng Image Qualty.................................4-35
Multple Orgnals onto One Sheet
(N on 1) ..............................................................4-37
Makng ID Card Copes ...................................4-40
Adjustng Sharpness .......................................4-42
v
v
Contents
Erasng Shadows/Lnes ..................................4-44
Original Frame Erase ..........................................4-45
Book Frame Erase ................................................4-48
Binding Erase ........................................................4-51
Adjustng Color Balance ................................4-54
Registering Color Balance ................................4-56
Recalling Registered Color Balance ..............4-58
Deleting Color Balance .....................................4-59
Collatng Copes ..............................................4-60
Makng Multple Copes .................................4-62
Checkng Current Settngs ............................4-63
(Mode Memory) ...............................................4-64
Registering Mode Memory .............................4-64
Recalling Mode Memory ..................................4-66
Checking Mode Memory .................................4-67
Deleting Mode Memory ...................................4-68
Changng Standard Mode .............................4-69
Intalzng Standard Mode ............................4-71
Checkng and Cancelng Copy Jobs/
Checkng Copy Logs .......................................4-72
Checking Copy Jobs...........................................4-72
Canceling Copy Jobs .........................................4-73
Checking Copy Logs ..........................................4-74
5 Fax .................................................5-1
Overvew of Fax Functons .............................. 5-2
Introducton to Usng Fax Functons ............. 5-4
Methods for Receiving Faxes .............................5-4
Selecting the Receive Mode ..............................5-9
Setting the Current Date and Time ..............5-12
Setting the Type of Telephone Line ..............5-13
Registering the Machine’s Name ...................5-14
Registering Your Machine’s Fax Number ....5-16
Sendng Fax Documents ................................5-17
Basic Methods for Sending Faxes ..................5-17
Calling the Recipient before Sending Fax
Documents (Manual Sending) .......................5-19
Switching Temporarily to Tone Dialing .......5-21
(With Pauses) ........................................................5-22
Basic Methods for Sending I-Faxes ...............5-25
Basic Methods for Sending PC Faxes ...........5-27
Cancelng Sendng Fax Documents .............5-29
Specfyng Destnatons .................................5-30
Specifying a New Fax Number .......................5-30
Using the Address Book ...................................5-34
Using the One-Touch .........................................5-36
Using the Group Addresses.............................5-38
Sending Originals to More Than One
Location (Broadcasting) ...................................5-41
Specifying Fax Numbers via an LDAP
Server ......................................................................5-43
Selectng Resoluton .......................................5-50
Adjustng Densty............................................5-51
Manual Exposure Adjustment .......................5-51
Adjusting Base Color ........................................5-52
Selectng Image Qualty.................................5-54
2-Sded Orgnal ...............................................5-56
Sendng Orgnals at a Preset Tme
(Delayed Sendng) ...........................................5-58
Drect Sendng .................................................5-61
Favortes ............................................................5-63
Registering Favorites .........................................5-63
Erasing Favorites .................................................5-67
Using the Favorites .............................................5-70
Checking Settings for Recalled Favorites ...5-71
Job Recall ..........................................................5-73
ECM Transmsson ...........................................5-76
Adjustng the Pause Tme ..............................5-78
Redalng Automatcally When the Lne
Is Busy (Auto Redal) .......................................5-80
Checkng the Dal Tone before Sendng .....5-83
Standard Send Settngs .................................5-85
Storing the Standard Send Settings.............5-85
Prntng the TX Termnal ID ...........................5-89
Adjustng Sharpness .......................................5-92
Specfyng What to Dsplay on the
Screen for a Send Operaton .........................5-94
Restorng the Send Functon Settngs to
Ther Default ....................................................5-96
Send Start Speed .............................................5-98
Prntng Receved Documents on Both
Sdes of Paper ................................................5-100
Reducng a Receved Document ................5-102
Receved Document ......................................5-105
Specfyng the Way of Prntng When
Toner Is Low ....................................................5-107
ECM Recepton ...............................................5-109
Settng the Incomng Rng Tone .................5-111
Recevng Documents Manually wth an
External Telephone (Remote Recepton) ...5-113
Activating the Remote Reception...............5-113
Receiving Documents with the Remote
Reception .............................................................5-114
Adjustng the Auto Swtch Tme for the
Manual RX Mode ...........................................5-115
Rejectng Incomng Faxes from the
Undentfed Senders ....................................5-117
Receve Start Speed ......................................5-119
Recevng Documents n Memory wthout
Prntng Out (Memory Lock Recepton) ....5-121
Prntng All Documents Stored n the
Memory Lock Recepton Mode ...................5-124
Forwardng Receved Fax Documents to a Computer or Fax Machne ....................5-126
Before Specifying the Forwarding
Settings .................................................................5-127
Specifying Forwarding Settings ..................5-128
Sending Documents in Memory to a
Different Destination .......................................5-140
Handling Forwarding Documents .............5-141
Resending Documents with Forwarding
Errors .....................................................................5-143
Checking/Changing the Status of
Documents with Forwarding Errors ...........5-144
Checkng/Changng the Status of Fax
Documents n Memory.................................5-147
Contents
Checking/Deleting Fax Transmission
Documents ..........................................................5-147
Checking/Deleting Fax Reception
Documents ..........................................................5-148
Checking/Printing the Fax Log ....................5-150
6 E-mail ............................................6-1
Overvew of E-Mal Functons ......................... 6-2
Introducton to Usng E-Mal Functons ........ 6-4
Basc E-Mal Operatons ................................... 6-5
Sending E-Mail Documents................................6-5
Canceling Sending E-Mail Documents ..........6-7
7 Printing .........................................7-1
Overvew of Prnt Functons ............................ 7-2
Introducton to Usng Prnt Functons .......... 7-4
Prntng Documents from Computer ............. 7-6
Scalng Documents ........................................... 7-8
Prntng Multple Pages on One Sheet ........7-10
2-Sded Prntng ...............................................7-11
(Drect Prnt) .....................................................7-12
Memory Media Supported by This
Machine ..................................................................7-12
Data Supported by This Machine ..................7-13
Inserting Memory Media .................................7-14
Removing Memory Media ...............................7-15
Printing from Memory Media .........................7-15
Checkng and Cancelng Prnt Jobs/
Checkng Prnt Logs ........................................7-27
Checking Print Jobs ...........................................7-27
Canceling Print Jobs ..........................................7-28
Checking Print Logs ...........................................7-29
8 Scanning .......................................8-1
Overvew of Scanner Functons...................... 8-2
Introducton to Usng Scanner Functons .... 8-4
For Scanning Documents to a Shared
Folder (File Server) .................................................8-4
Networked Computer ..........................................8-4
v
v
Contents
Basc Scannng Operatons .............................. 8-6
Scanning Documents to a File Server.............8-6
Scanning Documents to a USB Memory .......8-8
Scanning Documents from a Networked
Computer ...............................................................8-10
9 Network ........................................9-1
Flowchart for Settng Up Network ................. 9-2
What s the Network? ....................................... 9-3
Overvew of Network Functons ..................... 9-4
10 Settings from a PC ...................10-1
Overvew of Remote UI ..................................10-2
Startng the Remote UI ..................................10-4
11 Maintenance ............................11-1
Cleanng the Machne ....................................11-2
Exterior ...................................................................11-2
Interior ....................................................................11-3
Scanning Area ......................................................11-4
Replacng the Toner Cartrdges ....................11-7
When a Message Appears ...............................11-7
Replacing the Toner Cartridge with a
New One ................................................................11-8
Recyclng Used Cartrdges ...........................11-13
The Clean Earth Campaign - The Canon
Cartridge Return Program .............................11-13
U.S.A. PROGRAM ................................................11-14
Canadian Program – Programme au
Canada ..................................................................11-17
Transportng the Machne ...........................11-19
12 Troubleshooting ......................12-1
Clearng Jams ...................................................12-2
Original Jams ........................................................12-3
Paper Delivery Tray .............................................12-5
Duplex Unit ...........................................................12-6
Stack Bypass Tray ................................................12-8
Paper Drawer 1 ..................................................12-10
(Paper Drawer 2) ................................................12-11
Inside of the Machine ......................................12-13
Fixing Unit ...........................................................12-16
Back Cover ...........................................................12-18
When the Message Does Not Dsappear ...12-19
If the Delvery Feeder Unt Is Not
Installed Correctly .........................................12-22
Error Messages...............................................12-24
Error Codes .....................................................12-34
If a Message Such as <Paper dff. from set sze/type.> s dsplayed .........................12-41
Reloading the Paper ........................................12-42
Changing the Paper Size Setting.................12-42
If a Power Falure Occurs ..............................12-45
If You Cannot Solve a Problem ....................12-46
Customer Support (U.S.A.) .............................12-46
Customer Support (Canada) .........................12-46
13 Machine Settings .....................13-1
Machne Settngs .............................................13-2
Printing USER’S DATA LIST ...............................13-2
Accessing the Setting Menu ...........................13-3
Settng Menu ...................................................13-5
Paper Settings ......................................................13-5
Volume Settings ..................................................13-6
Common Settings ...............................................13-6
Communications Settings ...............................13-8
Address Book Settings ....................................13-10
Printer Settings ..................................................13-13
Timer Settings ....................................................13-18
Adjustment/Cleaning ......................................13-19
Report Settings ..................................................13-20
System Management Settings .....................13-21
14 Appendix ..................................14-1
Specfcatons ...................................................14-2
Index ..................................................................14-7
How to Use This Guide
How to Use This Guide
Symbols Used in This Manual
The following symbols are used in this manual to explain procedures, restrictions, handling precautions, and instructions that should be observed for safety.
Indicates a warning concerning operations that may lead to death or injury to persons if not performed correctly. To use the machine safely, always pay attention to these warnings.
Indicates a caution concerning operations that may lead to injury to persons if not performed correctly. To use the machine safely, always pay attention to these cautions.
Indicates a clarification of an operation, or contains additional explanations for a procedure. Reading these notes is highly recommended.
Indicates an operation that must not be performed. Read these items carefully, and make sure not to perform the described operations.
Abbreviations Used in This Manual
In this Manual, operating systems are abbreviated as follows.
Microsoft Windows 2000 operating system: Windows 2000
Microsoft Windows XP operating system: Windows XP
Microsoft Windows Vista operating system: Windows Vista
Microsoft Windows 7 operating system: Windows 7
Microsoft Windows Server 2003 operating system:
Windows Server 2003
Microsoft Windows Server 2008 operating system:
Windows Server 2008
Microsoft Windows operating system: Windows
Illustrations Used in This Manual
Keys and Buttons Used in This
Manual
The following symbols and key names are a few examples of how keys to be pressed are expressed in this manual.
– Operation Panel Keys: <Key icon> + (Key name)
–
Example: (Stop).
Buttons on the computer operation screen: [Button
– name]
Example: [OK]
Information in the display appears in angle brackets:
<LOAD PAPER>.
Unless otherwise mentioned, illustrations used in this manual are those taken when no optional equipment is attached to the Color imageCLASS MF9280Cdn.
When there is any difference between Color imageCLASS
MF9280Cdn and Color imageCLASS MF9220Cdn, it is clearly indicated in the text, for instance “Color imageCLASS MF9280Cdn Only.” x
x
Important Safety Instructions
Important Safety Instructions
Please read these “Important Safety Instructions” thoroughly before operating the machine.
As these instructions are intended to prevent injury to the user and other persons or destruction of property, always pay attention to these instructions and operational requirements.
Also, as it may result in unexpected accidents or injuries, do not perform any operation unless otherwise specified in the manual.
Installation
– When installing and removing the optional accessories, be sure to turn the machine off , unplug the power plug, and then disconnect all the interface cables and power cord from the machine. Otherwise, the power cord or interface cables may be damaged, resulting in a fire or electrical shock.
–
–
Do not install the machine in a location near alcohol, paint thinner, or other flammable substances. If flammable substances come into contact with electrical parts inside the machine, this may result in a fire or electrical shock.
Do not place the following items on the machine.
If these items come into contact with a high-voltage
•
• area inside the machine, this may result in a fire or electrical shock.
If these items are dropped or spilled inside the machine, immediately turn off the power switches of the machine and computer (1) and disconnect the interface cable if it is connected (2). Then, unplug the power plug from the AC power outlet (3) and contact your local authorized Canon dealer.
Necklaces and other metal objects
Cups, vases, flowerpots, and other containers filled with water or liquids
–
–
–
–
Do not install the machine in unstable locations, such as on unsteady platforms or inclined floors, or in locations subject to excessive vibrations, as this may cause the machine to fall or tip over, resulting in personal injury.
The ventilation slots are provided for proper ventilation of working parts inside the machine. Never place the machine on a soft surface, such as a bed, sofa, or rug.
•
•
•
Blocking the slots can cause the machine to overheat, resulting in a fire.
Do not install the machine in the following locations, as this may result in a fire or electrical shock.
A damp or dusty location
A location exposed to smoke and steam, such as near a cookery or humidifier
A location exposed to rain or snow
•
•
•
• A location near a water faucet or water
A location exposed to direct sunlight
A location subject to high temperatures
A location near open flames
When installing the machine, gently lower the machine to the installation site so as not to catch your hands between the machine and the floor or between the machine and other equipment, as this may result in personal injury.
–
–
–
When connecting the interface cable, connect it properly by following the instructions in this manual. If not connected properly, this may result in malfunction or electrical shock.
When installing the machine with casters, always lock the casters. Otherwise, the machine may move or tip over, resulting in personal injury.
When moving the machine, follow the instructions in this manual to hold it correctly. Failure to do so may cause you to drop the machine, resulting in personal
injury. (See “Transporting the Machine,” on p. 11-19.)
Power Supply
Important Safety Instructions
–
–
–
Do not use power cords other than the one provided, as this can result in a fire or electrical shock.
As a general rule, do not use extension cords. Using an extension cord may result in a fire or electrical shock.
Remove the power plug from the AC power outlet and refrain from using the machine while it thunders.
Lightening can result in a fire, electrical shock or malfunction.
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Do not damage or modify the power cord. Also, do not place heavy objects on the power cord or pull on or excessively bend it. This can cause electrical damage, resulting in fire or electrical shock.
Keep the power cord away from all heat sources. Failure to do so can cause the power cord insulation to melt, resulting in a fire or electrical shock.
The power cord should not be taut, as this may lead to a loose connection and cause overheating, which could result in a fire.
The power cord may become damaged if it is stepped on, fixed with staples, or if heavy objects are placed on it. Continued use of a damaged power cord can lead to
• an accident, such as a fire or electrical shock.
Do not plug or unplug the power plug with wet hands, as this can result in electrical shock.
Do not plug the power cord into a multiplug power strip, as this can result in a fire or electrical shock.
Do not bundle up or tie up the power cord in a knot, as this can result in a fire or electrical shock.
Insert the power plug completely into the AC power
•
• outlet. Failure to do so can result in a fire or electrical shock.
If excessive stress is applied to the connection part of the power cord, it may damage the power cord or the
• wires inside the machine may disconnect. This could result in a fire. Avoid the following situations:
Connecting and disconnecting the power cord frequently.
Tripping over the power cord.
The power cord is bent near the connection part, and continuous stress is being applied to the power outlet or the connection part.
Applying a shock to the power connector.
–
–
–
Do not use a power supply voltage other than that listed herein, as this may result in a fire or electrical shock.
Always grasp the power plug when unplugging the power plug. Do not pull on the power cord, as this may expose the core wire of the power cord or damage the cord insulation, causing electricity to leak, resulting in a fire or electrical shock.
Leave sufficient space around the power plug so that it can be unplugged easily. If objects are placed around the power plug, you may be unable to unplug it in an emergency.
Handling
–
–
–
–
–
Do not disassemble or modify the machine. There are high-temperature and high-voltage components inside the machine which may result in a fire or electrical shock.
Electrical equipment can be hazardous if not used properly. Do not allow children to touch the power cord, cables, internal gears, or electrical parts.
If the machine makes an unusual noise or emits smoke, heat, or an unusual smell, immediately turn off the power switches of the machine and computer and disconnect the interface cable if it is connected. Then, unplug the power plug from the AC power outlet and contact your local authorized Canon dealer. Continued use can result in a fire or electrical shock.
Do not use flammable sprays near the machine. If flammable substances come into contact with electrical parts inside the machine, this may result in a fire or electrical shock.
Always turn off the power switches of the machine and computer, and then unplug the power plug and interface cables before moving the machine. Failure to do so can damage the cables or cords, resulting in a fire or electrical shock.
x
x
Important Safety Instructions
–
–
–
Confirm that the power plug or power connecter is inserted completely after moving the machine. Failure to do so can result in an overheating and fire.
Do not drop paper clips, staples, or other metal objects inside the machine. Also, do not spill water, liquids, or other flammable substances (alcohol, benzene, paint thinner, etc.) inside the machine. If these items come into contact with a high-voltage area inside the machine, this may result in a fire or electrical shock. If these items are dropped or spilled inside the machine, immediately turn off the power switches of the machine and computer and disconnect the interface cable if it is connected. Then, unplug the power plug from the AC power outlet and contact your local authorized Canon dealer.
When plugging or unplugging a USB cable when the power plug is plugged into an AC power outlet, do not touch the metal part of the connector, as this can result in electrical shock.
–
–
Close the feeder gently so as not to catch your hand.
This may result in personal injury.
The laser beam can be harmful to human bodies. The laser beam is confined in the laser scanner unit by a cover, so there is no danger of the laser beam escaping during normal machine operation. Read the following
•
• remarks and instructions for safety.
Never open covers other than those indicated in this manual.
Do not remove the caution label attached to the cover of the laser scanner unit.
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Do not place heavy objects on the machine. The object or the machine may fall, resulting in personal injury.
Turn off the power switch when the machine will not be used for a long period of time, such as overnight.
Turn off the machine and unplug the power plug if the machine will not be used for an extended period of time, such as for several days.
Open or close covers and install or remove cassettes gently and carefully. Be careful not to hurt your fingers.
Keep your hands and clothing away from the roller in the output area. Even if the machine is not printing, the roller may suddenly rotate and catch your hands or clothing, resulting in personal injury.
The output slot is hot during and immediately after printing. Do not touch the area surrounding the output slot, as this may result in burns.
Printed paper may be hot immediately after being output. Be careful when removing the paper and aligning the removed paper, especially after continuous printing. Failure to do so may result in burns.
When performing copy with a thick book placed on the platen glass, do not press the feeder forcefully.
This may damage the platen glass and cause personal injury.
Be careful not to drop a heavy object, such as a dictionary, on the platen glass. This may damage the platen glass and cause personal injury.
–
• If the laser beam should escape and enter your eyes, exposure may cause damage to your eyes.
If you operate this machine in manners other than the control, adjustment, and operating procedures prescribed in this manual, this may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
Maintenance and Inspections
–
–
When cleaning the machine, turn off the machine and computer, and unplug the interface cables and power plug. Failure to do so can result in a fire or electrical shock.
Unplug the power plug from the AC power outlet periodically and clean the area around the base of the power plug’s metal pins and the AC power outlet with a dry cloth to remove all dust and grime. In damp, dusty, or smoky locations, dust can build up around the power plug and become damp, which can cause a short circuit, resulting in a fire.
Important Safety Instructions
–
–
–
–
–
–
Clean the machine with a well wrung out cloth dampened with water or mild detergent diluted with water. Do not use alcohol, benzene, paint thinner, or other flammable substances. If flammable substances come into contact with electrical parts inside the machine, this may result in a fire or electrical shock.
Some areas inside the machine are subject to high voltage. When removing jammed paper or when inspecting inside of the machine, be careful not to allow necklaces, bracelets, or other metal objects to touch the inside of the machine, as this can result in burns or electrical shock.
Do not dispose of used toner cartridges in open flames. This may cause the toner remaining inside the
•
•
•
•
•
•
• cartridges to ignite, resulting in burns or fire.
Confirm that the power plug or power connecter is inserted completely after cleaning the machine. Failure to do so can result in an overheating and fire.
Check the power cord and plug regularly. The following conditions may result in fire, so please contact your
• local authorized Canon dealer or the Canon help line.
There are burn marks on the power plug.
The blade on the power plug is deformed or broken.
The power is turned OFF or ON when bending the power cord.
The coating of the power cord is damaged, cracked,
• or dented.
A part of the power cord becomes hot.
Check regularly that the power cord and plug are not handled in the following manner. Failure to do so can
•
• result in a fire or electrical shock.
The power connector is loosened.
Stress is being applied to the power cord by a heavy object or by fixing it with staples.
The power plug is loosened.
The power cord is tied in a bundle.
A part of the power cord is put in an aisle.
The power cord is put in front of the heating appliance.
– The fixing unit and its surroundings inside the machine become hot during use. When removing jammed paper or when inspecting the inside of the machine, do not touch the fixing unit and its surroundings, as this may result in burns.
–
–
–
When removing jammed paper or when inspecting the inside of the machine, do not expose yourself to the heat emitted from the fixing unit and its surroundings for a prolonged period of time. Doing so may result in low temperature burns, even though you did not touch the fixing unit and its surroundings directly.
If paper is jammed, remove the jammed paper so that any pieces of paper do not remain inside the machine according to the displayed message. Also, do not put your hand in an area other than indicated areas, as this may result in personal injuries or burns.
When removing jammed paper or replacing a toner cartridge, be careful not to get any toner on your hands or clothing, as this will dirty your hands or clothing.
If toner gets on your hands or clothing, wash them immediately with cold water. Washing with warm water sets the toner, making it impossible to remove the toner stains.
x
xv
Important Safety Instructions
–
–
–
–
–
When removing jammed paper, be careful not to allow the toner on the paper to scatter. The toner may get into your eyes or mouth. If toner gets into your eyes or mouth, wash them immediately with cold water and consult a physician.
When loading paper or removing jammed documents or paper, be careful not to cut your hands with the edges of the paper.
When removing a toner cartridge, remove the toner cartridge carefully so as to prevent the toner from scattering and getting into your eyes or mouth. If toner gets into your eyes or mouth, wash them immediately with cold water and consult a physician.
Do not attempt to disassemble the toner cartridge.
The toner may scatter and get into your eyes or mouth.
If toner gets into your eyes or mouth, wash them immediately with cold water and consult a physician.
If toner leaks from the toner cartridge, be careful not to inhale the toner or allow it to come into direct contact with your skin. If the toner comes into contact with your skin, wash with soap. If the skin becomes irritated or you inhale the toner, consult a physician immediately.
Consumables
–
–
–
Do not dispose of used toner cartridges in open flames.
This may cause the toner to ignite, resulting in burns or fire.
Do not store toner cartridges or paper in a location exposed to open flames. This may cause the toner or paper to ignite, resulting in burns or fire.
When disposing of a toner cartridge, place the toner cartridge into a bag to prevent the toner from scattering, and then dispose of the toner cartridge according to local regulations.
–
–
If toner leaks from the toner cartridge, be careful not to inhale the toner or allow it to come into direct contact with your skin. If the toner comes into contact with your skin, wash with soap. If the skin becomes irritated or you inhale the toner, consult a physician immediately.
Do not pull out the sealing tape forcefully or stop at midpoint, as this may cause toner to spill out. If toner gets into your eyes or mouth, wash them immediately with cold water and consult a physician.
Others
If you are using a cardiac pacemaker
This machine generates a low level magnetic field. If you use a cardiac pacemaker and feel abnormalities, please move away from this machine and consult your physician immediately.
Telephone Equipment
When using telephone equipment, basic safety precautions should always be followed to reduce the risk of fire, electric shock, and injury to persons, including the following:
1. Do not use this machine near water (i.e., near a bathtub, kitchen sink, or laundry tub), or in a wet basement or near a swimming pool.
2. Avoid using the telephone during an electrical storm, as there may be a remote risk of electric shock from lightning.
3. Do not use the telephone to report a gas leak in the vicinity of the leak.
–
–
Keep the toner cartridges and other consumables out of the reach of small children. If the toner or other parts are ingested, consult a physician immediately.
Do not attempt to disassemble the toner cartridge.
The toner may scatter and get into your eyes or mouth.
If toner gets into your eyes or mouth, wash them immediately with cold water and consult a physician.
Installation Requirements and Handling
Installation Requirements and Handling
In order to use this machine in a safe and trouble-free manner, install the machine in a place that fulfills the following conditions. Also, read the remarks carefully.
Temperature and Humidity
Conditions
–
–
Temperature range: 50 °F to 86 °F (10 °C to 30 °C)
Humidity range: 20 % to 80 % RH (no condensation)
Protecting the machine from condensation
– To prevent condensation from forming inside the machine in the following cases, let the machine adjust
• to the ambient temperature and humidity for at least two hours before use.
When the room where the machine is installed is heated rapidly
–
• When the machine is moved from a cool or dry location to a hot or humid location
If water droplets (condensation) form inside the machine, this can result in paper jams or poor print quality.
When using an ultrasonic humidifier
When you are using an ultrasonic humidifier, it is therefore recommended that you use purified water or other water that is free of impurities. If you use tap water or well water, impurities in the water will be dispersed through the air. This can be trapped inside the machine, causing degradation in print quality.
Power Supply Requirements
120 V to 127 V 60 Hz
–
•
•
•
Do not plug the power plug into the auxiliary outlet on a computer.
•
•
Do not use the same AC power outlet for both the machine and any of the following equipment.
Copy machine
Air conditioner
Shredder
Equipment that consumes a large amount of electricity
Equipment that generates electrical noise
– When unplugging the power cord, keep interval of 10 seconds or more before plugging it again.
Miscellaneous precautions
– The maximum power consumption of the machine is
– as follows.
Color imageCLASS MF9280Cdn/MF9220Cdn: Less than
1300 W, 1350 W (with optional equipment)
Electrical noise or a dramatic drop in mains voltage may cause the machine or computer to operate incorrectly or lose data.
Installation Requirements
–
–
–
–
A location with sufficient space
A location with good ventilation
A location with a flat, even surface
A location able to fully support the weight of the machine
Precautions when connecting the power cord
– Do not connect this machine to an uninterruptible
– power source.
Use an AC power outlet exclusively for the machine. Do not use the other sockets of the AC power outlet.
Do not install the machine in the following locations, as this may result in damage to the machine.
– A location subject to dramatic changes in temperature or humidity
– A location subject to condensation xv
Installation Requirements and Handling
–
–
–
–
–
A poorly ventilated location
(If you use the machine for a long time or to perform a large amount of printing in a poorly ventilated room, the ozone or other odors generated by the machine may create an uncomfortable working environment.
In addition, chemical particles are dispersed during printing; therefore, it is important to provide adequate ventilation.)
A location near equipment that generates magnetic or electromagnetic waves
A laboratory or location where chemical reactions occur
A location exposed to salt air, corrosive gases, or toxic gases
A location, such as on a carpet or mat, that may warp from the weight of the machine or where the machine is liable to sink
Installation Space
Required installation space
Maintenance and Inspections
–
–
The communication may become unavailable depending on the condition of local environment. In this case, contact your local authorized Canon dealer or the Canon help line.
The repairing parts and toner cartridges for the machine will be available for at least seven (7) years after production of this machine model has been discontinued.
Customer Support
Customer Support (U.S.A.)
Your machine is designed with the latest technology to provide trouble-free operation. If you encounter a problem with the machine’s operation, try to solve it by using the information in Chapter 12. If you cannot solve the problem or if you think your machine needs servicing, contact Canon Customer Care Center at 1-800-OK-CANON between the hours of 8:00 A.M. to 8:00 P.M. ET Monday through Friday. On-line support for 24 hours is also available at the website.
http://www.canontechsupport.com/
Customer Support (Canada)
Canon Canada Inc., offers a full range of customer technical support options*:
– For e-mail support, the latest driver or document downloads, and answers to frequently asked questions, visit http://www.canon.ca/
–
–
Free live technical support 9 A.M. to 8 P.M. ET Monday through Friday (excluding holidays) for products still under warranty 1-800-652-2666
If the problem cannot be corrected by using one of the above technical support options, repair options are available at the time of your call to the live technical support number above or via the website at http://www.canon.ca/
* Support program specifics are subject to change without notice.
xv
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Follow the instructions in the caution label attached to this machine.
Avoid shaking or applying a shock to this machine.
To prevent the paper jam, do not turn the power ON/
OFF, open/close the operation panel or rear cover, and load/unload paper in the middle of printing operation.
Be sure to remove the toner cartridge from the machine when transporting the machine.
To avoid exposing the toner cartridge to light, place it in the protective bag included with this machine or wrap it in a thick cloth.
Clean this machine regularly. If this machine becomes dusty, it may operate improperly.
Use a modular cable of 118 1/8" (3 m) or shorter in length.
Legal Notices
Legal Notices
The International ENERGY STAR Office Equipment
Program is an international program that promotes energy saving through the use of computers and other office equipment.
The program backs the development and dissemination of products with functions that effectively reduce energy consumption. It is an open system in which business proprietors can participate voluntarily.
The targeted products are office equipment, such as computers, displays, printers, facsimiles, and copiers. The standards and logos are uniform among participating nations.
IPv6 Ready Logo
The protocol stack included in this machine has obtained the IPv6
Ready Logo Phase-1 established by the IPv6 Forum.
Trademarks
As an ENERGY STAR® Partner, Canon
U.S.A., Inc. has determined that this product meets the ENERGY STAR
Program for energy efficiency.
Canon, the Canon logo, and Color imageCLASS are registered trademarks of Canon Inc. in the United States and may also be trademarks or registered trademarks in other countries.
Microsoft, Windows, Windows Server and Windows Vista are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation in the U.S. and/or other countries.
All other product and brand names are registered trademarks, trademarks or service marks of their respective owners.
Copyright
Copyright © 2010 by Canon Inc. All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language or computer language in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, magnetic, optical, chemical, manual, or otherwise, without the prior written permission of Canon Inc.
UFST: Copyright © 1989-2003 Monotype Imaging, Inc.
Third Party Software
A. This Canon product (the “PRODUCT”) includes thirdparty software modules. Use and distribution of these software modules (the “SOFTWARE”) are subject to the conditions below.
(1) You agree that you will comply with any applicable export control laws, restrictions or regulations of the countries involved in the event that this product including the SOFTWARE is shipped, transferred or exported into any country.
(2) Rights holders of the SOFTWARE retain in all respects the title, ownership and intellectual property rights in and to the SOFTWARE. Except as expressly provided herein, no license or right, expressed or implied, is hereby conveyed or granted by rights holders of the
SOFTWARE to you for any intellectual property of rights holders of the SOFTWARE.
(3) You may use the SOFTWARE solely for use with the
PRODUCT.
(4) You may not assign, sublicense, market, distribute, or transfer the SOFTWARE to any third party without prior written consent of rights holders of the
SOFTWARE.
(5) Notwithstanding the foregoing, you may transfer the
SOFTWARE only when (a) you assign to a transferee all of your rights to the PRODUCT and all rights and obligations under the conditions governing the
SOFTWARE and PRODUCT and (b) such transferee agrees in writing to be bound by all these conditions.
xv
xv
Legal Notices
(6) You may not decrypt, decompile, reverse engineer, disassemble or otherwise reduce the code of the
SOFTWARE to human readable form.
(7) You may not modify, adapt, translate, rent, lease or loan the SOFTWARE or create derivative works based on the SOFTWARE.
(8) You are not entitled to remove or make separate copies of the SOFTWARE from the PRODUCT.
(9) The human-readable portion (the source code) of the
SOFTWARE is not licensed to you.
ACCEPTANCE
THE TERMS OF THIS THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE STATED
HERE OR IN RELATED WARRANTY PROVISIONS SHALL BE
DEEMED ACCEPTED UPON YOUR USE OF THE PRODUCT
FOR ONE OR MORE OF ITS NORMAL PURPOSES, IF THERE
HAS BEEN NO OTHER PRIOR EXPRESS ACCEPTANCE.
THE TERMS OF THIS THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE GOVERN
THE THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE AS DELIVERED WITH THE
PRODUCT AND ALL UPDATED VERSIONS OF THE THIRD
PARTY SOFTWARE PROVIDED UNDER MAINTENANCE
AGREEMENTS OR OTHER SERVICE ARRANGEMENTS
FOR THE PRODUCT WITH CANON USA OR CANON
CANADA OR THEIR RESPECTIVE AUTHORIZED SERVICE
ORGANIZATIONS.
Disclaimers
The information in this document is subject to change without notice.
CANON INC. MAKES NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND
WITH REGARD TO THIS MATERIAL, EITHER EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED, EXCEPT AS PROVIDED HEREIN, INCLUDING
WITHOUT LIMITATION, THEREOF, WARRANTIES AS TO
MARKETABILITY, MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE OF USE OR NON-INFRINGEMENT.
CANON INC. SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,
INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY
NATURE, OR LOSSES OR EXPENSES RESULTING FROM THE
USE OF THIS MATERIAL.
About the Part Containing Mercury
(Applicable Only to the USA)
LAMP(S) INSIDE THIS PRODUCT CONTAIN
MERCURY AND MUST BE RECYCLED OR DISPOSED
OF ACCORDING TO LOCAL, STATE OR FEDERAL
LAWS.
For CA, USA only
Included battery contains Perchlorate Material - special handling may apply.
See http://www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate/ for details.
Legal Limitations on the Usage of
Your Product and the Use of Images
Using your product to scan, print or otherwise reproduce certain documents, and the use of such images as scanned, printed or otherwise reproduced by your product, may be prohibited by law and may result in criminal and/or civil liability.
A non-exhaustive list of these documents is set forth below. This list is intended to be a guide only. If you are uncertain about the legality of using your product to scan, print or otherwise reproduce any particular document, and/or of the use of the images scanned, printed or otherwise reproduced, you should consult in advance with your legal advisor for guidance.
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Paper Money
Money Orders
Certificates of Deposit
Postage Stamps
(canceled or uncanceled)
Identifying Badges or
Insignias
Selective Service or
Draft Papers
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Travelers Checks
Food Stamps
Passports
Immigration Papers
Internal Revenue Stamps
(canceled or uncanceled)
Bonds or Other
Certificates of
Indebtedness
Stock Certificates Checks or Drafts Issued by Governmental
Agencies
Motor Vehicle Licenses and Certificates of Title
– Copyrighted Works/
Works of Art without
Permission of Copyright
Owner
FCC (Federal Communications
Commission)
Color imageCLASS MF9280Cdn/MF9220Cdn: F151100
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept an interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a class B digital device, pursuant to Part
15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions,
•
•
• may cause harmful interference to radio communications.
However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
Connect the equipment to an outlet on a circuit
• different from that to which the receiver is connected.
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
Use of shielded cable is required to comply with class B limits in Subpart B of Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Do not make any changes or modifications to the equipment unless otherwise specified in this manual. If you make such changes or modifications, you could be required to stop operation of the equipment.
Canon U.S.A., Inc.
One Canon Plaza, Lake Success, NY 11042, U.S.A.
TEL No. 1-800-OK-CANON
Legal Notices
Users in the U.S.A.
Pre-Installation Requirements for Canon Facsimile
Equipment
A. Location
Supply a suitable table, cabinet, or desk for the machine. See Chapter 14, “Appendix,” for specific dimensions and weight.
B. Order Information
1. A single telephone line (touch-tone or rotary) should be used.
2. Order an RJ11-C telephone wall jack (USOC), which should be installed by the telephone company. If the RJ11-C wall jack is not present, telephone/facsimile operation is not possible.
3. Order a normal business line from your telephone company’s business representative.
The line should be a regular voice grade line or an equivalent one. Use one line per unit.
DDD (Direct Distance Dial) line
-or-
IDDD (International Direct Distance Dial) line if you communicate overseas
Canon recommends an individual line following industry standards, i.e., 2,500 (touch-tone) or 500 (rotary/pulse dial) telephones. A dedicated extension off a PBX (Private Branch eXchange) unit without “Call Waiting” can be used with your facsimile unit. Key telephone systems are not recommended because they send nonstandard signals to individual telephones for ringing and special codes, which may cause a facsimile error.
C. Power Requirements
The machine should be connected to a standard 120 volt AC, three-wire grounded outlet only.
Do not connect this machine to an outlet or power line shared with other appliances that cause “electrical noise.” Air conditioners, electric typewriters, copiers, and machines of this sort generate electrical noise that often interferes with communications equipment and the sending and receiving of documents.
xx
xx
Legal Notices
Connection of the Equipment
This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules and the requirements adopted by the ACTA. On the rear panel of this equipment is a label that contains, among other information, a product identifier in the format of
US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. If requested, this number must be provided to the telephone company.
The REN (Ringer Equivalence Number) is used to determine the number of devices that may be connected to a telephone line. Excessive RENs on a telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call. In most, but not all areas, the sum of the
RENs should not exceed five (5.0). To be certain of the number of devices that may be connected to a line, as determined by the total RENs, contact the local telephone company. The REN for this product is part of the product identifier that has the format US:
AAAEQ##TXXXX. The digits represented by ## are the REN without a decimal point (e.g., 10 is a REN of 1.0).
An FCC compliant telephone line cable and modular plug is provided with this equipment. This equipment is designed to be connected to the telephone network or premise wiring using a compatible modular jack that is
Part 68 compliant.
This equipment may not be used on coin service provided by the telephone company. Connection to party lines is subjected to state tariffs.
In Case of Equipment Malfunction
Should any malfunction occur which cannot be corrected by the procedures described in this guide or the e-Manual, disconnect the equipment from the telephone line cable and disconnect the power cord.
The telephone line cable should not be reconnected or the main power switch turned ON until the problem is completely resolved. Users should contact Canon
Authorized Service Facilities for servicing of equipment,
Information regarding Authorized Service Facility locations can be obtained by calling Canon Customer
Care Center (1-800-OK-CANON).
Rights of the Telephone Company
If this equipment (Color imageCLASS M9280Cdn/
MF9220Cdn) causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company may temporarily disconnect service. The telephone company also retains the right to make changes in facilities and services that may affect the operation of this equipment. When such changes are necessary, the telephone company is required to give adequate prior notice to the user.
However, if advance notice is not possible, the telephone company will notify the customer as soon as possible.
Also, the customer will be advised of his/her right to file a complaint with the FCC if he/she believes it is necessary.
The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other electronic device, including FAX machines, to send any message unless such message clearly contains in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page or on the first page of the transmission, the date and time it is sent and an identification of the business or other entity, or other individual sending the message and the telephone number of the sending machine or such business, other entity, or individual. (The telephone number provided may not be a 900 number or any other number for which charges exceed local or long-distance transmission charges.)
In order to program this information into your machine, you should complete the procedure for registering your name, unit’s telephone number, time, and date in the Starter Guide.
Users in Canada
Pre-Installation Requirements for Canon Facsimile
Equipment
A. Location
Supply a suitable table, cabinet, or desk for the
machine. See Chapter 14, “Appendix,” for specific
dimensions and weight.
B. Order Information
1. A single telephone line (touch-tone or rotary) should be used.
2. Order a CA11A modular jack, which should be installed by the telephone company. If the
CA11A jack is not present, installation cannot occur.
3. Order a normal business line from your telephone company’s business representative.
The line should be a regular voice grade line or an equivalent one. Use one line per unit.
DDD (Direct Distance Dial) line
-or-
IDDD (International Direct Distance Dial) line if you communicate overseas
Legal Notices
Notice
– This product meets the applicable Industry Canada technical specifications.
– The Ringer Equivalence Number is an indication of the maximum number of devices allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. The termination of an interface may consist of any combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the sum of the
RENs of all the devices does not exceed five.
– The REN of this product is 1.0.
– Before installing this equipment, users should ensure that it is permissible to be connected to the facilities of the local telecommunications company. The equipment must also be installed using an acceptable method of connection. In some cases, the company’s inside wiring associated with a single line individual service may be extended by means of a certified connector assembly (telephone extension cord). The customer should be aware that compliance with the above conditions may not prevent deterioration of service in some situations.
– Repairs to certified equipment should be made by an authorized Canadian maintenance facility designated by the supplier. Any repairs or alterations made by the user to this equipment, or equipment malfunctions, may give the telecommunications company cause to request the user to disconnect the equipment.
– Users should ensure for their own protection that the electrical ground connections of the power utility, telephone lines, and internal metallic water pipe system, if present, are connected together. This precaution may be particularly important in rural areas.
Canon recommends an individual line following industry standards, i.e., 2,500 (touch-tone) or 500 (rotary/pulse dial) telephones. A dedicated extension off a PBX (Private Branch eXchange) unit without “Call Waiting” can be used with your facsimile unit. Key telephone systems are not recommended because they send nonstandard signals to individual telephones for ringing and special codes, which may cause a facsimile error.
C. Power Requirements
The power outlet should be a three-prong grounded receptacle (Single or Duplex). It should be independent from copiers, heaters, air conditioners, or any electric equipment that is thermostatically controlled. The rated value is 115 volts and 15 amperes. The CA11A modular jack should be relatively close to the power outlet to facilitate installation.
Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves, but should contact the appropriate electric inspection authority, or electrician, as appropriate.
This equipment complies with the Canadian ICES-003 Class B limits.
xx
xx
Legal Notices
Utilisation au Canada
Conditions à Remplir Préalablement à L’installation d’un
Télécopieur Canon
A. Emplacement
Prévoir une table, un meuble, ou un bureau suffisamment solide et de taille appropriée (voir le chapitre 14, Annexe (Appendix), pour les indications de poids et dimensions).
B. Installation téléphonique
1. Une seule ligne téléphonique (tonalités ou impulsions) doit être utilisée.
2. Il faut commander un jack modulaire CA11A qui sera installé par la compagnie téléphonique.
Sans ce jack, la mise en place serait impossible.
3. Si vous vous abonnez à une nouvelle ligne, demandez une ligne d’affaires normale de qualité téléphonique courante ou équivalente.
Prenez un abonnement d’une ligne par appareil.
Ligne automatique interurbaine ou
Ligne automatique internationale (si vous communiquez avec les pays étrangers)
Canon vous conseille d’utiliser une ligne individuelle conforme aux normes industrielles, à savoir: ligne téléphonique 2,500 (pour appareil à clavier) ou 500 (pour appareil à cadran/impulsions). Il est également possible de raccorder ce télécopieur à un système téléphonique à poussoirs car la plupart de ces systèmes émettent des signaux d’appel non normalisés ou des codes spéciaux qui risquent de perturber le fonctionnement du télécopieur.
C. Condition d’alimentation
Raccordez le télécopieur à une prise de courant plus terre à trois branches, du type simple ou double, et qui ne sert pas à alimenter un copieur, un appareil de chauffage, un climatiseur ou tout autre appareil
électrique à thermostat.
L’alimentation doit être de 115 volts et 15 ampères.
Pour faciliter l’installation, le jack CA11A doit être assez proche de la prise de courant.
Remarques
– Le présent matériel est conforme aux spécifications techniques applicables d’Industrie Canada.
– Avant d’installer cet appareil, l’utilisateur doit s’assurer qu’il est permis de le connecter à l’équipement de la compagnie de télécommunication locale et doit installer cet appareil en utilisant une méthode de connexion autorisée. Il se peut qu’il faille étendre la circuiterie intérieure de la ligne individuelle d’abonné, qui a été installée par la compagnie, au moyen d’un jeu de connecteurs homologués (rallonge téléphonique).
– L’attention de l’utilisateur est attirée sur le fait que le respect des conditions mentionnées ci-dessus ne constitue pas une garantie contre les dégradations de qualité du service dans certaines circonstances.
– L’indice d’équivalence de la sonnerie (IES) sert à indiquer le nombre maximal de terminaux qui peuvent être raccordés à une interface téléphonique.
La terminaison d’une interface peut consister en une combinaison quelconque de dispositifs, à la seule condition que la somme d’indices d’équivalence de la sonnerie de tous les dispositifs n’excède pas 5.
– Le nombre d’équivalents sonnerie (REN) de ce produit est 1,0.
– Les réparations sur un appareil certifié doivent être faites par une société d’entretien canadienne autorisée par le Gouvernement canadien et désignée par le fournisseur. Toute réparation ou modification que pourrait faire I’utilisateur de cet appareil, ou tout mauvais fonctionnement, donne à la compagnie de télécommunication le droit de débrancher I’appareil.
– Pour sa propre protection, I’utilisateur doit s’assurer que les prises de terre de I’appareil d’alimentation, les lignes téléphoniques et les tuyaux métalliques internes, s’il y en a, sont bien connectés entre eux. Cette précaution est particulièrement importante dans les zones rurales.
Au lieu d’essayer de faire ces branchements eux-mêmes, les utilisateurs sont invités à faire appel à un service d’inspection faisant autorité en matière d’électricité ou à un électricien, selon le cas.
Respecte les limites de la classe B de la NMB-003 du Canada.
Legal Notices
Laser Safety
This machine complies with 21 CFR Chapter 1 Subchapter J as a Class 1 laser product under the U.S. Department of Health and Human Services (DHHS) Radiation Performance
Standard according to the Radiation Control for Health and Safety Act of 1968. This means that the machine does not produce hazardous radiation.
Since radiation emitted inside the machine is completely confined within protective housings and external covers, the laser beam cannot escape from the machine during any phase of user operation.
CDRH Regulations
The Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) of the U.S. Food and Drug Administration implemented regulations for laser products on August 2, 1976. These regulations apply to laser products manufactured from August 1, 1976. Compliance is mandatory for products marketed in the United States.
Use of controls, adjustments, or performance of procedures other than those specified in this manual may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
The label is attached to the laser scanner machine inside the machine and is not in a user access area.
xx
xxv
Legal Notices
Before Using the
Machine
Chapter
1
This chapter describes what you should know before using this machine, such as the names of the parts and their functions, and how to set up the machine to send/receive faxes.
Machine Components .................................................1-2
External View (Front) ..........................................................1-2
External View (Back) ............................................................1-4
Internal View ..........................................................................1-5
Control Panel ...............................................................1-6
Main Control Panel ..............................................................1-6
Registering the Custom Keys ..........................................1-8
Left Side of Control Panel .............................................. 1-10
Right Side of Control Panel ........................................... 1-10
Display Parts and Functions .....................................1-11
Main Menu Screen ........................................................... 1-11
Copy Top Screen ................................................................ 1-12
Send Type Selection Screen .......................................... 1-13
Store Type Selection Screen.......................................... 1-14
(Color imageCLASS MF9280Cdn Only) ..................... 1-14
Log In Mode ........................................................................ 1-14
Toner Cartridges ........................................................1-15
Maintaining the Toner Cartridges ............................... 1-16
Checking the Toner Level............................................... 1-17
Checking the Device Information ............................1-18
Entering Characters ...................................................1-19
Telephone Line Setting .............................................1-20
Timer Settings ............................................................1-22
Setting the Sleep Mode .................................................. 1-22
Setting Auto Clear Time ................................................. 1-23
Setting the Daylight Saving Time ............................... 1-24
1-1
1-2
Machine Components
Machine Components
This section describes the names and functions of all the parts on the outside and inside of the machine.
External View (Front)
①Feeder
Originals placed in the Feeder are automatically fed sheet by sheet to the scanning area. The feeder also automatically turns over two-sided originals to make one- or two-sided copies.
②Slide Guides
Adjust the slide guides to match the width of the originals.
③Original Supply Tray
Originals placed here are automatically fed sheet by sheet to the scanning area of the platen glass.
Place originals into this tray with the surface that you want to scan face up.
④Original Output Tray
Originals that have been scanned from the original supply tray are output to the original output tray in the order that they are fed into the feeder.
⑤Original Stopper
Prevents the originals from falling off the paper delivery tray.
Open the stopper from its original position for
LTR/A4 size paper. For LGL size paper, pull out the extension first, and then open the stopper.
⑥Control Panel
Machine controls.
⑦Stack Bypass Tray
Feeds non-standard size or thick/thin type paper stacks.
⑧Stack Bypass Tray Extension
Pull out to load paper stack.
⑨Slide Guides for Stack Bypass Tray
Adjusts to the width of the paper.
Machine Components
⑩Paper Stopper
Prevents the paper from falling off the paper delivery tray.
Open the stopper from its original position for
LTR/A4 size paper. For LGL size paper, pull out the extension first, and then open the stopper.
⑪Paper Delivery Tray
Copies, prints and faxes are output to the paper delivery tray.
⑫Main Power Switch
Press to the “I” side to turn the power ON.
⑬USB Port
Connect the USB (Universal Serial Bus) cable.
⑭Ethernet Port
Connect the network cable.
⑮External Device Jack
Connect an external device.
⑯Telephone Line Jack
Connect the external telephone cable.
⑰Paper Drawer
Holds up to 250 sheets of paper (20 lb (75 g/m 2 )).
⑱Optional Cassette Feeding Unit-AC1
Holds the additional paper supply. Up to 500 sheets of paper (20 lb (75 g/m 2 )) can be held.
1-3
1-4
Machine Components
External View (Back)
⑲Back Cover
Open this cover to clear paper jams.
⑳Power Socket
Connect the power cord.
Internal View
Machine Components
㉑Scanning Area
Originals placed in the feeder are scanned here.
㉒Platen Glass
Place originals here when scanning books, thick originals, thin originals, transparencies, etc.
㉓Toner Cartridges
When toner runs out, pull out the empty toner cartridges, and replace them with new ones.
㉔Delivery Feeder Unit (Electrostatic Transfer Belt)
Transfers toner to paper. Do not place any objects on or touch the transfer belt. Doing so deteriorates print quality.
㉕Front Cover
Open this cover to replace the toner cartridges or to clear paper jams.
㉖Duplex Unit
The duplex unit enables you to use the 2-Sided mode for copying or printing.
㉗Fixing Unit
The fixing unit fixes the toner to the paper. The parts inside the fixing unit are subject to high temperatures. When removing jammed paper, take care not to touch anything in this area.
1-5
Control Panel
Control Panel
This section describes the names and functions of the keys on the control panel.
Main Control Panel
1-6
① [Power] switch (Sub Power Supply)
Press to turn the control panel ON or OFF. When the control panel is turned OFF, the machine is in the Sleep mode.
② Numeric keys
Use to enter alphanumeric characters.
③ [Clear] key
Press to clear entered values or characters.
④ [Log In/Out] key
Press to enter the Security mode.
⑤ Volume Control Dial
Move to adjust the line volume.
⑥ [Stop] key
Press to stop a job in progress, such as a scan or copy job.
* The Color imageCLASS MF9280Cdn is used for illustration purposes in this section.
⑦ Main Power Indicator
Lights when the main power is turned ON.
⑧ Error Indicator
Blinks or lights up if there is an error with the machine. When the Error indicator flashes, follow the instructions that appear on the display. When the Error indicator maintains a steady red light, contact your local authorized Canon dealer or
Canon Customer Care Center.
⑨ [Start] key
Press to start an operation.
⑩ Processing/Data Indicator
Blinks or lights up green when the machine is performing operations. When the Processing/
Data indicator maintains a steady green light, a job is waiting or a document has been received in memory.
⑪ [Reset] key
Press to restore the current settings to the
Standard mode.
⑫ [OK] key
Press to confirm the settings and proceed to the next screen.
⑬ Scroll Wheel
Turn left and right to select menu items or setting items.
⑭ [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ], [ ◀ ], [ ▶ ] keys
Press to move the cursor position.
⑮ [Back] key
Press to return to the previous screen.
⑯ Any key
Press to select the setting item displayed on the bottom of the display.
⑰ [Status Monitor/Cancel] key
Press to display the System Monitor screen. The
System Monitor screen enables you to check the status and log of Copy, Send, Fax, and Print jobs and cancel the ongoing jobs. The status of device or consumable can also be checked.
●
Adjustng the Angle of the Control Panel
The angle of the control panel is adjustable in the range shown below.
Control Panel
⑱ Display
The settings screen for each function is shown on this display. Some settings screens may have
several pages. (See ”Display Parts and Functions,” on p. 1-11.)
⑲ Custom Key 2
You can assign the desired function for this key.
For details, see “Registering the Custom Keys” on p. 1-8.
⑳ Custom Key 1
You can assign the desired function for this key.
For details, see “Registering the Custom Keys” on p. 1-8.
㉑ [Main Menu] key
Press to display the setting menu. Press to return to the Main Menu screen when you are on the mode screen.
Do not apply excess force to the control panel when adjusting its angle.
1-7
1-8
Control Panel
Registering the Custom Keys
–
–
You can assign frequently used functions to two custom keys located on the left of the display.
The default settings are as follows:
<Key 1>: Copy
<Key 2>: Send/Fax
–
–
–
After registering the custom keys, attach the supplied customize labels onto the control panel.
If there is no label applicable to the function you register for the custom key, fill in the blank label and attach it.
Size and form of the customize labels may vary depending on the countries or regions you purchased.
1 Press (Main Menu).
2 Press the right Any key to select
<Additional Func.>.
3 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Common Settings>, then press [OK].
4 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Register Custom Key>, then press [OK].
5 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Key 1> or <Key 2>, then press [OK].
6 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the function you want to assign, then press [OK].
You can select from <Copy>, <Send/Fax>,
<Fax>, <E-mail>, <I-Fax>, <File Server>, <Send
Log>, <Address Book>, <Search LDAP Server>,
<Favorites>, <One-touch>, <Scan to Store>,
<Store on Memory>, <Remote Scan>, and
<Direct Print>* 1 .
* 1 Only for the Color imageCLASS MF9280Cdn.
7 Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
Control Panel
1-9
1-10
Control Panel
Left Side of Control Panel Right Side of Control Panel
Color imageCLASS
MF9280Cdn
Color imageCLASS
MF9220Cdn
㉒SD/MS Card Slot
Insert an SD/MS Card when using the Direct Print function.
㉓CF Card Slot
Insert a CF Card when using the Direct Print function.
㉔[Power] switch (Sub Power Supply)
㉕USB Slot
Insert a USB memory media device when scanning documents to it or printing image files stored in it (Direct Print)*.
* The Direct Print function is available only for the
Color imageCLASS MF9280Cdn.
㉖Volume Control Dial
When two different types of cards are inserted, the machine only recognizes the one that was inserted first.
Display Parts and Functions
Display Parts and Functions
The settings screen for each function is shown on the display on the control panel. For details about each setting, refer to the pages on corresponding function. For instructions
on how to display each screen, refer to “Main Control Panel,” on p. 1-6.
–
–
–
–
–
–
Depending on the number of destinations registered, after the main power switch is turned ON, you may not be able to perform operations using the control panel when the main menu screen appears. If this happens, wait until the machine responses to the key operations.
Depending on your needs, you can change the main menu screen which appears when the main power switch is turned
ON. For details, “Setting the Initial Function,” in the e-Manual.
If the Auto Clear function is activated, the display returns to the main menu screen.
Log in mode is displayed only when Department/User ID Management is set to <On > in <System Management Set.>.
For instructions, see “Introduction of the Machine,” in the e-Manual.
A scroll bar displayed on the right side on the screen indicates that there are more items. Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to display the next screen.
Depending on the system configuration and product purchased, some functions may not be available.
Main Menu Screen
● Color imageCLASS MF9280Cdn
● Color imageCLASS MF9220Cdn
②Send/Fax
Displays the Send Type Selection screen. (See
”Send Type Selection Screen,” on p. 1-13.)
③Scan to Store
Displays the Store Type Selection screen. (See
”Store Type Selection Screen,” on p. 1-14.)
④ Direct Print (Color imageCLASS MF9280Cdn only)
Displays the Select Memory Media screen. (See
“Select Memory Media Screen (Color imageCLASS
MF9280Cdn Only),” on p. 1-14.)
⑤Additional Func. (Select with the right Any key)
On the Additional Functions screen, you can adjust the machine settings to customize the way
the machine works. (See “Machine Settings,” on p. 13-2.)
⑥Device Info. (Select with the left Any key)
On the Device Information screen, you can check
the current machine status. (See “Checking the
Device Information,” on p. 1-18.)
①Copy
Displays the Copy Top screen. (See ”Copy Top
1-11
1-12
Display Parts and Functions
Copy Top Screen
①Selected item and its description
Shows the highlighted item and its description.
②Current Setting
Lists the current settings.
③Scroll Bar
Indicates that more items can be viewed using
[ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel).
④Quantity
Displays the copy quantity.
⑤Paper Supply
Displays the selected paper.
⑥Copy Ratio
Displays the copy ratio.
①Color Mode Settings
Sets the color mode (color or black and white).
②Paper Source Settings
Selects the paper source.
③Density/Background Removal Settings
Sets the density.
④2-Sided Settings
Sets 2-sided copying.
⑤Preview Img.
You can confirm the current standard settings.
(See “Checking Current Settings,” on p. 4-63.)
⑥Mode Memory (Select with the left Any key)
You can store and recall frequently used copy
settings and recall them. (See “Frequently Used
Settings (Mode Memory),” on p. 4-64.)
⑦Copy Ratio Settings
Enlarges or reduces the copy size.
⑧Original Image Quality Settings
Sets the image quality of the original.
⑨N on 1 Settings
Reduces the size of multiple originals to fit on one sheet of paper.
⑩Sharpness Settings
Sets the sharpness of the image.
Display Parts and Functions
Send Type Selection Screen
⑪Frame Erase Settings
Erases shadows and lines that appear when using various types of originals.
⑫Color Balance
Adjusts color balance depending on the color of the originals.
⑬Collate Settings
Sorts copies into sets arranged in page order.
⑭ID Card Copy
Copies the both sides of an ID card on one side of paper.
①Address Book
Displays the Address Book screen. (See Chapter 3,
“Registering Destinations in the Address Book”.)
②Search LDAP Server
Specify a fax number and an e-mail address via
an LDAP server. (See “Specifying Fax Numbers via an LDAP Server,” on p. 5-43 and “E-mail,” in the
e-Manual.)
③New Fax Entry
Enter a fax number using the numeric keys. (See
“Basic Methods for Sending Faxes,” on p. 5-17.)
④New E-mail Entry
Displays the E-mail address entry screen. (See
“Sending E-Mail Documents,” on p. 6-5.)
⑤New I-Fax Entry
Displays the I-Fax address entry screen. (See
“Basic Methods for Sending I-Faxes,” on p. 5-25.)
⑮Copies
Sets the number of copies.
⑯Standard Settings
Changes the Standard mode.
⑰Back
Select this item to return to the previous screen.
⑥New File Server Entry
Displays the file server address entry screen. (See
“Scanning Documents to a File Server,” on p. 8-6.)
⑦ Specify from Log
Select a destination from the last three
destinations. (See “Job Recall,” on p. 5-73, “E-mail,”
in the e-Manual, and “Scan,” in the e-Manual.)
1-13
Display Parts and Functions
⑧ Back
Select this item to return to the previous screen.
Store Type Selection Screen
Log In Mode
If the Department ID Management or User ID
Management is set, the Log In screen is displayed.
For information on the Department ID Management or User ID Management, see “Security,” in the e-Manual.
● For Department ID Management
① Store on File Server
Stores the scanned originals on the specified file
server. (See “Scanning Documents to a File
② Store on Memory Media
Stores the scanned originals in the memory
media. (See “Scanning Documents to a USB
③ Remote Scan
Enables to use the Network Scan function. (See
”Network Settings,” in the e-Manual.)
④Back
Select this item to return to the previous screen.
Select Memory Media Screen (Color imageCLASS MF9280Cdn Only)
For details about the Select Memory Media Screen,
see “Printing from Memory Media (Direct Print),” on p. 7-12.
Enter the Department ID and password, then press
(Log In/Out).
● For User ID Management
Enter the User ID and password, then press
(Log In/Out).
Make sure to press (Log In/Out) after using the machine when the Department ID/User ID Management is set.
1-14
Insert a memory media, select a media, then press
[OK].
Toner Cartridge
Toner Cartridges
The lifetime of the Canon genuine toner cartridges used in this machine (Color imageCLASS
MF9280Cdn/MF9220Cdn) is approximately 6000 pages for K (Black) and is approximately
6000 pages for each C (Cyan), M (Magenta) and Y (Yellow). The page counts are based on 5% coverage* when printing A4 size paper with the default print density setting. The level of toner consumption varies depending on the type of originals printed. If your average original contains a lot of graphics, tables, or charts, the life of the toner cartridge will be shorter as they consume more toner. When you are replacing a toner cartridge, be sure to use a toner cartridge designed for this product. To purchase the Canon genuine replacement toner cartridge, contact your local Canon dealer or Canon Customer Care
Center (1-800-OK-CANON).
* The term “5% coverage” denotes a document on which the area covered with toner is 5% of the total area of a sheet.
Model Name
Color imageCLASS MF9280Cdn
Color imageCLASS MF9220Cdn
Supported Canon
Genuine Toner Cartridge
Canon CRG111 Black
Canon CRG111 Magenta
Canon CRG111 Yellow
Canon CRG111 Cyan
Print Yield
Approx. 6,000 pages
1-15
1-16
Toner Cartridge
Maintaining the Toner Cartridges
Note the following when handling toner cartridges.
Do not place the toner cartridges in fire. Toner powder is flammable.
–
–
–
–
If there is a toner powder leakage, make sure not to inhale or touch the toner powder. If it comes in contact with your skin, rinse with cold water using soap. If you feel an irritation on your skin or inhale the powder, consult a doctor immediately.
When removing the toner cartridges from the machine, make sure to remove them carefully. If not removed with care, the toner powder may scatter and come in contact with your eyes and mouth. If this happens, rinse with water and consult a doctor immediately.
Keep the toner cartridges away from small children. If they ingest the toner powder, consult a doctor immediately.
Do not disassemble the toner cartridges. The toner powder may scatter and come in contact with your eyes and mouth.
If this happens, rinse with water and consult a doctor immediately.
–
–
–
Do not place the toner cartridges in an upright or an upside down position. If toner becomes caked in the toner cartridges, it may become impossible to free it even by shaking the toner cartridges.
For optimum print quality, when you replace toner cartridges, using Canon genuine ones is recommended.
[Be careful of counterfeit toner cartridges]
Please be aware that there are counterfeit Canon toner cartridges in the marketplace. Use of counterfeit toner may result in poor print quality or machine performance. Canon is not responsible for any malfunction, accident or damage caused by the use of counterfeit toner cartridge.
For more information, see http://www.canon.com/ counterfeit.
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Keep the toner cartridges away from computer screens, disk drives, and floppy disks. The magnets inside the toner cartridges may harm these items.
Avoid locations subject to high temperature, high humidity,
• or rapid changes in temperature.
Storage temperature range: 32 to 95 °F (0 to 35 °C)
• Storage humidity range: 35 to 85 % RH (no condensation)
Do not expose the toner cartridges to direct sunlight or bright light for more than five minutes.
Store the toner cartridges in their protective bags. Do not open the bags until you are ready to install the toner cartridges in the machine.
Save the protective toner cartridge bags in case you need to repack and transport the toner cartridges at a later date.
If the toner cartridge has to be removed from the machine for maintenance, place it in the protective bag that it came in or wrap it with a thick cloth immediately.
Do not store the toner cartridges in a salty atmosphere or where there are corrosive gases such as from aerosol sprays.
Do not remove the toner cartridges from the machine unnecessarily.
Do not open the drum protective shutter on the toner cartridges. Print quality may deteriorate if the drum surface is exposed to light or is damaged.
Always hold the toner cartridges by their handles to avoid touching the drum protective shutter.
Toner Cartridge
Checking the Toner Level
The Device Info. screen indicates one of three levels for the amount of toner remaining in the toner cartridges.
1 Press (Main Menu).
2 Press the left Any key to select <Device
Info.>.
It is recommended that you purchase a new toner cartridge to have it available when needed.
– The screen below indicates the toner cartridge is running out of toner.
– The screen below indicates there is sufficient toner in the toner cartridge.
3 Press the right Any key to select
<Recovery Steps> and follow the instructions on the display to replace the toner cartridge.
– The screen below indicates that only a small amount of toner remaining inside the machine, You can continue printing. Proceed to step 4.
4 Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
1-17
Checking the Device Information
Checking the Device Information
1
2
On the Device Information screen you can check the current machine status.
Press (Main Menu).
Press the left Any key to select <Device
Info.>.
3 Press (Main Menu) return to the
Main Menu screen.
You can also return to the Main Menu screen by pressing [OK].
1-18
① Toner
The status of toner is displayed.
② Available Memory
The remaining amount of available system memory is displayed in percentage.
③ Paper Information
The paper supply, and the paper type, paper size loaded in the paper drawer(s)* are displayed.
* The paper drawer 2 is displayed only when the optional Paper Drawer (Paper
Drawer 2) is attached.
Entering Characters
Entering Characters
●
For screens that require alphanumeric entries, follow the procedure below to enter characters.
Use [ ◀ ], [ ▶ ], or (Scroll Wheel) to move the cursor position left or right.
● Select <Backspace> by pressing the left Any key to clear the entered characters one by one.
● Use [ ▼ ] and [ ▲ ] to move the cursor position up and down.
● Select <Set> by pressing the right Any key to complete the entry and return to the previous screen.
● Press [OK] to enter the highlighted character or
● space and to determine the entry mode.
Press [ ◀ ], [ ▶ ], [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ], or (Scroll Wheel) to change the entry mode, then press [OK].
You can also use – (numeric keys) to enter numbers.
–
–
<A/1>: Alphanumeric character entry mode
<Sym>: Symbol entry mode
1-19
1-20
Telephone Line Setting
Telephone Line Setting
Set the type of telephone line that is connected to the machine.
If this setting is incorrect, you will be unable to send faxes. Be sure to check the type of telephone line that you are using, and make the correct setting.
The default setting is <Tone>.
1
Connect the telephone line cable before turning ON the machine, if you use the automatic detection mode.
Press (Main Menu).
2 Press the right Any key to select
<Additional Func.>.
4 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Fax Settings>, then press [OK].
3 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Communications Settings>, then press
[OK].
5 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<User Settings>, then press [OK].
6 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Tel. Line Type Selection>, then press
[OK].
Telephone Line Setting
9 Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
7 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Manual>, then press [OK].
8 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the type of telephone line that is connected to the machine, then press
[OK].
<Pulse>: Pulse dialing
<Tone>: Tone dialing
Be sure to check the type of telephone line you are using and make the correct setting. If this setting is incorrect, you will not be able to communicate with other machines.
1-21
1-22
Timer Settings
Timer Settings
Setting the Sleep Mode
When the machine remains idle for a certain period of time, it automatically enters the Sleep mode.
The default settings are <On> and <15 Minutes.>.
We recommend that you use this option in the default setting.
1 Press (Main Menu).
2 Press the right Any key to select
<Additional Func.>.
4 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Auto Sleep Time>, then press [OK].
3 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Timer Settings>, then press [OK].
5 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<On>, then press [OK].
6 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to set the desired interval, then press [OK].
You can set the interval using – (numeric keys).
Timer Settings
7 Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
–
–
•
•
•
•
•
To enter the Sleep mode manually, press
[Power] on the operation panel.
The machine will not enter the Sleep mode when: the machine is in operation the Processing/Data indicator is lit or flashing a message is on the display and the Error indicator is flashing there is a paper jam in the machine the handset of the external telephone is off the hook
–
•
•
•
•
•
The machine will leave the Sleep mode when: you press [Power] on the operation panel a fax is received the handset of the external telephone is off the hook a print job is sent from a computer, and the print is started (printing starts but the display remains off ) a computer performs a scan through the machine
Setting Auto Clear Time
If the machine remains idle for a certain period of time, the display returns to the standby mode (Auto Clear function).
The default setting is <2 Minutes>.
–
–
If <0> is selected, the Auto Clear mode is not set.
After the Auto Clear mode initiates, the display returns to the screen specified in <Auto Clear Settings> in <Common Settings>. For details, see “Setting the Function after Auto Clear Mode Initiates,” in the e-Manual.
1 Press (Main Menu).
2 Press the right Any key to select
<Additional Func.>.
3 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Timer Settings>, then press [OK].
1-23
1-24
Timer Settings
4 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Auto Clear Time>, then press [OK].
5 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ], (Scroll Wheel), or numeric keys to set the desired interval , then press [OK].
–
–
You can set the interval from 0 (off ) to 9 minutes (in one-minute increments).
You can also set the interval using –
(numeric keys).
6 Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
Setting the Daylight Saving Time
In some countries or areas, time is advanced throughout the summer season. This is called “Daylight Saving
Time.”
The default setting is <Off>.
1 Press (Main Menu).
2 Press the right Any key to select
<Additional Func.>.
3 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Timer Settings>, then press [OK].
4 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Date & Time Settings>, then press [OK].
Timer Settings
8 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the month when the daylight saving time starts, then press [OK].
5 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Daylight Saving Time Set.>, then press
[OK].
9 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Week>, then press [OK].
6 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<On>, then press [OK].
10 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the week, then press [OK].
7 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Month>, then press [OK].
11 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Day of the Week>, then press [OK].
1-25
1-26
Timer Settings
12 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the day of the Week, then press [OK].
16 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Week>, then press [OK].
13 Press the right Any key to select <Set>.
17 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the week, then press [OK].
The End Date Month to End DST screen appears.
14 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Month>, then press [OK].
18 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Day of the Week>, then press [OK].
15 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the month when the daylight saving time ends, then press [OK].
19 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the day of the Week, then press [OK].
20 Press the right Any key to select <Set>.
21 Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
Timer Settings
1-27
1-28
Timer Settings
Originals and
Print Media
Chapter
2
This chapter describes the types of paper and originals that can be used with the machine and how to load paper into the stack bypass tray.
Originals Requirements ..............................................2-2
Scanning Area ..............................................................2-3
Placing Originals ..........................................................2-4
On the Platen Glass .............................................................2-4
In the Feeder .........................................................................2-5
Paper Requirements ....................................................2-7
Printable Area ..............................................................2-9
Loading Paper ............................................................2-10
In the Paper Drawer ......................................................... 2-10
In the Stack Bypass Tray .................................................. 2-16
Setting Paper Size and Type .....................................2-22
For the Stack Bypass Tray ............................................... 2-22
Registering Irregular Paper Sizes for the
Stack Bypass Tray .............................................................. 2-26
For the Paper Drawer ....................................................... 2-28
2-1
2-2
Originals Requirements
Originals Requirements
Available original type, size, weight and quantity are shown in the table below.
Type
Size (W × L)
Weight
Quantity
Platen Glass
Sheet* 1 , book, three-dimensional objects
Max. 8 1/2" × 14"
(Max. 215.9 mm × 355.6 mm)
Max. 4.4 lb (2 kg)
1 sheet
Feeder
Sheet
Max. 14" × 8.5" (355.6 mm × 215.9 mm)* 2
Min. 5" × 5.5" (128 mm × 139.7 mm)* 2
One-sided scanning (1 page): 13 to 34 lb (50 to
128 g/m 2 )* 3
One-sided scanning (more than 2 pages): 13 to 28 lb
(50 to 105 g/m 2 )* 4
Two-sided scanning: 17 to 28 lb (64 to 105 g/m 2 )
Max. 50 sheets* 5
(Max. 30 sheets for LGL originals)
* 1 When copying transparent originals such as tracing paper or transparencies, use a piece of plain white paper to cover the original after placing it face-down on the platen glass.
* 2 When copying two-sided originals, only LTR, LGL, FLSC, A4 can be used.
* 3 17 to 34 lb (64 to 128 g/m 2 ) when copying originals smaller than LTR/A4.
* 4 17 to 28 lb (64 to 105 g/m 2 ) when copying originals smaller than LTR/A4.
–
–
–
–
–
–
* 5 20 lb (75 g/m 2 ) paper
● Do not place the originals on the platen glass or in the feeder until the glue, ink or correction fluid on the originals are completely dry.
●
●
Remove all fasteners (staples, paper clips, etc.) before loading the originals in the feeder.
To prevent originals from jamming in the feeder, do not use any of the following:
–
–
Wrinkled or creased paper
Carbon paper or carbon-backed paper
Curled or rolled paper
Coated paper
Torn paper
Onion skin or thin paper
Paper printed with a thermal transfer printer
Transparencies
Scanning Area
Scanning Area
Make sure your originals' text and graphics fall within the shaded area in the following diagram. Note that the margin widths listed are approximate and there may be slight variations in actual use.
● Copy Scanning Area
● Fax Scanning Area
2-3
2-4
Placing Originals
Placing Originals
Place your originals on the platen glass or into the feeder, depending on the size and type of the original, and the copy modes that you want to use.
On the Platen Glass
Place the originals on the platen glass when copying bound originals (such as books and magazines), heavy or lightweight originals, and transparencies.
1 Lift up the feeder.
3 Align the original with the appropriate paper size marks.
2 Place your original face down.
If your original does not match any of the paper size marks, align the center of your original with the arrow mark.
Placing Originals
4 Gently close the feeder.
The original is ready for scanning.
Remove the original from the platen glass when scanning is complete.
In the Feeder
Place the originals into the feeder when you want to copy several originals at the same time, and press
(Start). The machine automatically feeds the originals to the scanning area and scans them.
1 Fan the originals stack and even the edges.
2 Adjust the slide guides to the width of the originals.
2-5
2-6
Placing Originals
3 Neatly place the originals face up in the original supply tray.
The originals are ready for scanning.
–
–
–
–
Do not add or remove originals while they are being scanned.
When scanning is complete, remove the originals from the originals delivery tray to avoid paper jams.
Avoid using feeder to scan the same originals more than 30 times. When scanned repeatedly, originals can become folded or torn, which may cause paper jams.
If the feeder rollers are soiled from scanning originals written in pencil, clean them. (See
“Cleaning the Machine,” on p. 11-2.)
Paper Requirements
Paper Requirements
The paper size and types that can be used with this machine are shown in the following table.
Size (W × L)
Weight
Quantity
Type Plain 1 * 2 * 9
Plain 2 * 3 * 9
Color * 3 * 9
Recycled * 3 * 9
Heavy 1 * 4 * 9 * 10
Heavy 2 * 5 * 11 * 12
Bond * 6 * 9
Paper drawer(s)
Legal* 9 , Letter* 9 , Oficio, M-Oficio,
B-Oficio, Executive, Foolscap* 9 ,
A4* 9 , B5, A5
16 to 32 lb (60 to 120 g/m 2 )
Max. 250 sheets * 1 * 8
○
○
○
○
○
—
○
Stack bypass tray
3" × 5" to Legal (8 1/2" × 14")
(76.2 × 127 to 215.9 mm ×
355.6 mm) (Always set vertically.)
16 to 47 lb (60 to 176 g/m 2 )
Max. 100 sheets * 1
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Transparency *
Labels
Envelopes
7 —
—
—
○
○
○
( ○ : available —: not available)
* 1 20 lb (75 g/m 2 ) paper
* 2 From 16 to 19 lb (60 to 70 g/m 2 )
* 3 From 17 to 28 lb (64 to 105 g/m 2 )
* 4 From 28 to 32 lb (106 to 120 g/m 2 )
* 5 From 32 to 47 lb (121 to 176 g/m 2 )
* 6 From 20 to 28 lb (75 to 105 g/m 2 )
* 7 Use only LTR or A4 size transparencies.
* 8 Max. 500 sheets of paper can be set in the optional Paper Drawer (Paper Drawer 2).
* 9 Can be used for two-sided copying.
* 10 Select <Heavy 1> for the paper type when using the coated paper with the weight of 27 to 29 lb (100 to 110 g/m 2 ). Load the paper into the stack bypass tray sheet by sheet.
* 11 Select <Heavy 2> for the paper type when using the coated paper with the weight of 32 to 35 lb (120 to 130 g/m 2 ). Load the paper into the stack bypass tray sheet by sheet.
* 12 Select <Heavy 2> for the paper type when using the index cards with the weight of 32 to 47 lb (120 to 176 g/m 2 ). Load the cards into the stack bypass tray.
2-7
2-8
Paper Requirements
–
–
–
–
● To prevent paper jams, do not use any of the following:
– Wrinkled or creased paper
Curled or rolled paper
Torn paper
Damp paper
Very thin paper
●
– Paper which has been printed on using a thermal transfer printer (Do not copy on the reverse side.)
The following types of paper do not print well:
●
●
●
–
–
Highly textured paper
Very smooth paper
– Shiny paper
Make sure the paper is free from dust, lint, and oil stains.
Be sure to test paper before purchasing large quantities.
Store all paper wrapped and on a flat surface until ready for use. Keep opened packs in their original
●
● packaging in a cool, dry location.
Store paper at 64.4°F–75.2°F (18°C–24°C), 40%–60% relative humidity.
Use only the transparencies designed for laser printers.
Printable Area
The shaded area indicates the approximate printable area of LTR paper. Note that the margin widths listed are approximate and there may be slight variations in actual use.
Printable Area
2-9
2-10
Loading Paper
Loading Paper
This section describes how to load paper in the paper drawers and stack bypass tray.
–
–
Handle paper carefully not to cut your hands with the edges of the paper.
When installing or removing cassettes, be careful not to get your fingers caught.
In the Paper Drawer
This section describes how to load paper in the paper drawer or in the optional paper drawer.
1 Pull out the paper drawer until it stops.
3 Hold the lock release lever of the side paper guides (A) and slide the guides to the mark for the size of the paper to be loaded. The side paper guides move together.
2 Hold the paper drawer with both hands and remove it from the machine.
Make sure to set the guides to the mark for the size of the paper to be loaded correctly. If the guides are positioned incorrectly, it may cause paper jams, dirty prints, etc.
4 Hold the lock release lever of the rear paper guides (A) and slide the guides to the mark for the size of the paper to be loaded.
Loading Paper
6 Load the paper stack of the appropriate size with the print side facing up. Align the rear edge of the paper stack with the rear paper guide.
Make sure to set the guides to the mark for the size of the paper to be loaded correctly. If the guides are positioned incorrectly, it may cause paper jams, dirty prints, etc.
5 Fan the paper stack and even the edges.
– Make sure the paper stack does not exceed the load limit mark (A).
– The paper drawer holds approximately 250 sheets of paper (20 lb (75 g/m 2 )).
2-11
Loading Paper
7 Hold the paper drawer with both hands and set it back into the machine.
8 Push the paper drawer as far as it will go.
2-12
For details on loading paper in the stack bypass
tray, see “In the Stack Bypass Tray,” on p. 2-16.
●
In the Optonal Paper Drawer (Paper Drawer 2)
When the optional drawer is installed in the machine, follow the procedure described below.
1 Pull out the optional paper drawer until it stops.
3 Hold the lock release lever of the side paper guides (A) and slide the guides to the mark for the size of the paper to be loaded. The side paper guides move together.
2 Hold the optional paper drawer with both hands and remove it from the machine.
Make sure to set the guides to the mark for the size of the paper to be loaded correctly. If the guides are positioned incorrectly, it may cause paper jams, dirty prints, etc.
4 Hold the lock release lever of the rear paper guides (A) and slide the guides to the mark for the size of the paper to be loaded.
Loading Paper
6 Load the paper stack of the appropriate size with the print side facing up. Align the rear edge of paper stack with the rear paper guide.
– Make sure the paper stack does not exceed the load limit mark (A).
Make sure to set the guides to the mark for the size of the paper to be loaded correctly. If the guides are positioned incorrectly, it may cause paper jams, dirty prints, etc.
5 Fan the paper stack and even the edges.
– The optional paper drawer holds approximately
500 sheets of paper (20 lb (75 g/m 2 )).
7 Hold the optional paper drawer with both hands and set it back into the machine.
2-13
2-14
Loading Paper
8 Push the paper drawer as far as it will go.
For details on loading paper in the stack bypass
tray, see “In the Stack Bypass Tray,” on p. 2-16.
Loading Paper
●
When prntng paper wth a letterhead or logo (preprnted paper) usng the paper drawer:
Load the paper in the proper orientation as follows.
Portrait orientation Landscape orientation
1-sided printing
(When <Paper Feed Method
Switch> in <Common Settings> is set to <Speed Priority> (the default setting))
For details, see “Introduction of the Machine,” in the e-Manual.
(with the printing side facing up) (with the printing side facing up)
1-sided printing
(When <Paper Feed Method
Switch> in <Common Settings> is set to <Print Side Priority>)
For details, see “Introduction of the Machine,” in the e-Manual.
(with the printing side facing down) (with the printing side facing down)
2-sided printing
(with the front side facing down) (with the front side facing down)
2-15
2-16
Loading Paper
In the Stack Bypass Tray
If you are making prints on transparencies, labels, nonstandard-sized paper, or envelopes, load them into the stack bypass tray.
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
•
•
•
•
•
Note the following points when using the stack bypass tray:
Paper Quantity: one to approximately 100 sheets (20 lb (75 g/m 2 ),)
Paper Size: 3" × 5" to 8 1/2" × 14" (76.2 × 127 mm to 216 × 356 mm )
Paper Weight: 16 to 47 lb (60 to 176 g/m 2 )
Paper which has been rolled or curled must be straightened out prior to use, to allow the paper to feed smoothly through the stack bypass tray (allowable curl amount: less than 3/8" (10 mm) for normal paper, less than 1/4" (5 mm) for heavyweight paper).
Depending on the paper storage conditions, it may not be possible to feed some paper into the stack bypass tray. In this case, set the amount of paper to less than 50 sheets 20 lb (75 g/m 2 ).
Do not load different size/type paper at the same time.
If you load multiple sheets of heavyweight paper into the stack bypass tray, a paper jam may occur depending on the type of heavyweight paper. If this happens, load only one sheet of heavyweight paper at a time.
When printing on special types of paper, such as heavyweight paper or transparencies, make sure to correctly set the paper type, especially if you are using heavyweight paper. If the type of paper is not set correctly, it could adversely affect the quality of the image. Moreover, the fixing unit may become dirty and require a service repair, or the paper could jam.
If you are printing on envelopes, do not allow more than 10 envelopes to accumulate in the output tray. Always empty the output tray once 10 envelopes have accumulated.
If you select <Custom Size> for copying, you cannot use the 1-Sided to 2-Sided, 2-Sided to 2-Sided, N on 1, or ID Card Copy mode.
(See “Copy,” in the e-Manual.)
If you select <COM10>, <Monarch>, <DL>, <ISO-C5>, <ISO-B5> for copying, you cannot use the 1-Sided to 2-Sided, 2-Sided to 2-
Sided, N on 1, or ID Card Copy mode. (See “Copy,” in the e-Manual.)
You cannot use <Custom Size> when you print from a USB memory (Direct Print). (Only for the Color imageCLASS FM9280Cdn)
Envelopes may be creased in the printing process.
For high quality printouts, use paper recommended by Canon.
1 Open the stack bypass tray.
Loading Paper
3 Load the paper into the stack bypass tray.
Insert the paper stack as far as it will go.
If the paper size you are going to load into the stack bypass tray is different from the paper size stored in stack bypass tray Standard Settings, set stack bypass tray Standard Settings to ‘Off’ in
Common Settings (from the Additional Functions
screen). (See “Setting Paper Size and Type,” on p. 2-22.)
2 Adjust the slide guides to match the size of the paper.
■ Before inserting paper
① When you use the stack bypass tray to make copies, straighten out curled paper prior to use, as shown below. Curled paper may cause a paper jam.
② If there is difficulty in straightening out curled paper, curl the front edges of the paper upward, as shown below.
If you are feeding large size paper, pull out the auxiliary tray, and extend the tray extension.
2-17
2-18
Loading Paper
■ To print on the back side of preprinted paper
① Load the preprinted paper face up into the stack bypass tray, as shown in the illustration below.
The screen for selecting the paper size appears.
–
–
When loading paper into the stack bypass tray, align the paper stack neatly between the slide guides. If the paper is not loaded correctly, a paper jam may occur.
If you are printing on heavyweight paper or envelopes using the stack bypass tray, and find that the paper or envelopes are not being fed smoothly or evenly through the stack bypass tray, remove the paper or envelopes, curl the feeding edges upward approximately 1/8"
(3 mm), and then reload the paper or envelopes. Curling the feeding edges enables the rollers to grip the paper or envelopes as they are fed into the machine from the stack bypass tray.
–
–
–
If there are instructions on the paper package about which side of the paper to load, follow those instructions.
When the paper is loaded into the stack bypass tray, the side facing down is the one printed on.
If problems, such as poor print quality or paper jams occur, try turning the paper stack over and reload it.
■ If you are loading envelopes into the stack bypass tray:
① Take five envelopes, loosen them as shown, and then stack them together.
Repeat this step five times for each set of five envelopes.
Loading Paper
③ Hold down the four corners of the envelopes firmly, so that they and the sealed or glued portion stay flat.
② Place the envelopes on a clean, level surface, and press all the way around the envelopes by hand, in the direction of the arrows, to remove any curls. Repeat this step five times for each set of five envelopes.
–
–
Do not print on the back side of the envelopes
(the side with the flap).
If the envelopes become filled with air, flatten them by hand before loading them into the stack bypass tray.
Take particular care to spread the envelopes out in the direction that they will be fed.
2-19
Loading Paper
Load the envelopes face down (flap side up) in the stack bypass so shown below.
For top opening envelopes, load them as their sealing side (flap side) is located on the left when viewed from the front.
For side opening envelopes, load them so their sealing side (flap side) is located in the back of the stack bypass tray when viewed from the front.
2-20
The screen for selecting the paper size appears.
–
–
The stack bypass tray can hold 10 envelopes at a time.
Envelopes may be creased in the printing process.
Loading Paper
●
When prntng paper wth a letterhead or logo (preprnted paper) usng the stack bypass tray:
Load the paper in the proper orientation as follows.
Portrait orientation Landscape orientation
1-sided printing
(When <Paper Feed Method
Switch> in <Common Settings> is set to <Speed Priority> (the default setting))
For details, see “Introduction of the Machine,” in the e-Manual.
(with the printing side facing down) (with the printing side facing down)
1-sided printing
(When <Paper Feed Method
Switch> in <Common Settings> is set to <Print Side Priority>)
For details, see “Introduction of the Machine,” in the e-Manual.
(with the printing side facing up) (with the printing side facing up)
2-sided printing
(with the front side facing up) (with the front side facing up)
2-21
Setting Paper Size and Type
Setting Paper Size and Type
This section describes how to set paper size and type loaded into the paper drawer(s) and stack bypass tray.
For the Stack Bypass Tray
You can register a frequently used paper size and type for the stack bypass tray.
The default setting is <Off>.
2-22
1 Press (Main Menu).
2 Press the right Any key to select
<Additional Func.>.
3 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Paper Settings>, then press [OK].
4 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Stack Bypass Paper (Std.)>, then press
[OK].
Setting Paper Size and Type
– If you use A/B size paper, press the left Any key to select <A/B Sizes> and select the paper size you want to use.
■ If you register an irregular paper size:
① Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Custom Size>, then press [OK].
5 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<On>, then press the right Any key to select <Option>.
② Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<X:> (length for the short edge), then press
[OK].
If you do not want to set the stack bypass standard settings, select <Off>, then press [OK], and press
(Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
■ If you register a standard paper size:
① Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select paper size, then press [OK].
If the irregular paper sizes have previously been set, you can recall the size setting. For details, see
“If you register an irregular paper size by recalling the previously set size:,” on p. 2-24.
③ Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to enter the length for X (short edge), then press
[OK].
– You can select from the following paper sizes:
<LTR>, <LGL>, <STMT>, <EXEC>, <FLSC>,
<OFI>, <B-OFI>, <M-OFI>, <G-LTR>, <G-LGL>,
<Custom Size>, <COM10>, <Monarch>,
<DL>, <ISO-C5>, <ISO-B5>
2-23
2-24
Setting Paper Size and Type
④ Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Y:> (length for the long edge), then press
<OK>.
■ If you register an irregular paper size by recalling the previously set size:
You can recall the previously set paper size.
For instructions on how to register the
irregular paper size, see “Registering
Irregular Paper Sizes for the Stack Bypass
① Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Custom Size>, then press [OK].
⑤ Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to enter the length for Y (long edge), then press
[OK].
② Press the right Any key to select <Recall/
Register>.
⑥ Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Set Size>, then press [OK].
③ Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Size 1> or <Size 2>, then press [OK].
The recalled paper size is displayed.
You can also edit the previously set size or register a new irregular size from this display. Press the right Any key to select <Register/Edit> → select
<Size 1> or <Size 2> → press [OK] → specify the lengths for <X:> and <Y:> → select <Set Size> → press the right Any key to select <Done> → select
<Back> → press [OK].
Setting Paper Size and Type
7 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
[On], then press [OK].
8 Press right Any key to select Done.
④ Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Set Size>, then press [OK].
9 Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
6 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select paper type, then press [OK].
The selectable paper types vary depending on the paper size you have specified. The unavailable paper types are grayed out on the display.
2-25
2-26
Setting Paper Size and Type
Registering Irregular Paper Sizes for the Stack Bypass Tray
1
You can register two irregular paper sizes for the stack bypass tray. You can recall the registered size when you use irregular paper size on the stack bypass tray. For details, see
“Recalling Irregular Paper Size Registered for the Stack Bypass Tray,” on p. 4-17.
Press (Main Menu).
2 Press the right Any key to select
<Additional Func.>.
5 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Size 1> or <Size 2>, then press [OK].
3 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Paper Settings>, then press [OK].
6 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<X:> (length for the short edge), then press [OK].
4 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Custom Size>, then press [OK].
7 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to enter the length for X (short edge), then press
[OK].
8 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Y:> (length for the long edge), then press [OK].
Setting Paper Size and Type
11 Press the right Any key to select <Done>.
9 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to enter the length for Y (long edge), then press
[OK].
If you want to register the other custom paper size, select <Size 1> or <Size 2>, then repeat steps 6 to 10.
12 Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
You can use the irregular paper size registered with the procedure above for the <Stack Bypass
Paper (Std.)> setting, which is useful if you frequently use the same irregular size paper. For
details, see “Setting Paper Size and Type,” on p. 2-22.
10 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Set Size>, then press [OK].
2-27
Setting Paper Size and Type
For the Paper Drawer
2-28
When you place other sizes and/or types of paper, follow this procedure to change the settings.
The default settings are <LTR> and <Plain 2>.
1 Press (Main Menu).
2 Press the right Any key to select
<Additional Func.>.
3 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Paper Settings>, then press [OK].
4 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Drawer 1> or <Drawer 2>*, then press
[OK].
* Only when the optional Paper Drawer (Paper
Drawer 2) is attached.
5 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select paper size, then press [OK].
–
–
You can select from the following paper sizes:
<LTR>, <LGL>, <EXEC>, <FLSC>, <OFI>, <B-
OFI>, <M-OFI>
If you use A/B size paper, press the left Any key to select <A/B Sizes> and perform the step above.
6 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select paper type, then press [OK].
–
–
You can select from the following paper types:
<Plain 1>, <Plain 2>, <Recycled Paper>,
<Color>, <Bond>, <Heavy 1>
– If you use the paper drawer 2*, repeat the steps 4 to 6 for the paper drawer 2*.
* Only when the optional Paper Drawer (Paper
Drawer 2) is attached.
7 Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
Setting Paper Size and Type
2-29
2-30
Setting Paper Size and Type
Registering
Destinations in the Address Book
Chapter
3
This chapter describes how to register destinations in the Address Book, and how to edit and erase registered information.
Storing/Editing Address Book ....................................3-2
Registering Fax Numbers in the Address Book .........3-2
Registering Fax Numbers Obtained via an LDAP
Server in the Address Book ..............................................3-7
Registering E-Mail Addresses in the
Address Book...................................................................... 3-10
Registering E-Mail Addresses Obtained via an
LDAP Server in the Address Book ............................... 3-13
Registering I-Fax Addresses in the
Address Book...................................................................... 3-16
Registering File Server Addresses in the
Address Book...................................................................... 3-18
Registering Group Addresses in the
Address Book...................................................................... 3-24
Checking/Editing Addresses Registered in the
Address Book...................................................................... 3-27
Erasing Addresses from the Address Book .............. 3-30
Storing/Editing One-Touch .......................................3-32
Registering Fax Numbers in One-Touch ................... 3-32
Registering Fax Numbers Obtained via an
LDAP Server in One-Touch ............................................ 3-37
Registering E-Mail Addresses in One-Touch ........... 3-40
Registering E-Mail Addresses Obtained via an
LDAP Server in One-Touch ............................................ 3-43
Registering I-Fax Addresses in One-Touch .............. 3-46
Registering File Server Addresses in One-Touch ... 3-49
Registering Group Addresses in One-Touch ........... 3-55
Checking/Editing Addresses Registered in
One-Touch ........................................................................... 3-59
Erasing Addresses Registered in One-Touch .......... 3-62
3-2
Storing/Editing Address Book
Storing/Editing Address Book
The Address Book is a feature used for storing fax numbers, e-mail addresses, I-fax addresses, and file server addresses. You can also register multiple destinations for a group address. Registering a destination in the Address Book saves you the effort of entering that destination’s address each time you send a job.
–
–
–
–
–
–
Storing addresses in the Address Book is available only for the Color imageCLASS MF9280Cdn.
You can register a total of 300 destinations in the Address Book, including 200 destinations registered in one-touch.
Each address entry is treated as a single entry, so if a destination is registered in a group address, that destination and the group address are counted as two entries.
Destinations stored in the Address Book can be exported to your computer as a file, which can be imported into the machine. For information on how to export and import the Address Book, see “Setting from a PC,” in the e-Manual.
For easy reference, it is recommended to print the list of recipients registered in the Address Book and one-touch. For information on how to print the lists, see “Introduction of the Machine,” in the e-Manual.
New destinations cannot be registered in the Address Book if <Restrict New Addresses> in <Restrict the Send Function> in <System Management Set.> is set to <On>.
Registering Fax Numbers in the Address Book
This section describes the procedure for registering fax numbers in the Address Book.
This section describes how to register destinations from the Additional Functions screen. You can also register destinations from the
Select Send Type screen, as follows:
– In the Select Send Type screen, use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Address Book>, then press [OK].
–
–
–
Press the left Any key to select <Reg/Edit/Erase>.
Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Register New Dest. to Add. Book>, then press [OK].
Follow the procedure described in this section from step 6.
1 Press (Main Menu).
2 Press the right Any key to select
<Additional Func.>.
3 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Address Book Settings>, then press [OK].
Storing/Editing Address Book
6 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Fax>, then press [OK].
If a password has been set for the Address Book, enter the password to enter Address Book
Settings menu. Enter the password using –
(numeric keys), then press [OK]. (For details about the Address Book password, see “Security,” in the e-Manual.)
4 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Register Address>, then press [OK].
7 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Register Name>, then press [OK].
8 Use the software keyboard to enter the recipient’s name.
5 Press the right Any key to select <Register
New>.
–
–
You can enter up to 16 characters for the recipient’s name.
For information on how to use the software
keyboard, see “Entering Characters,” on p. 1-19.
Registered destinations are sorted in the Address
Book by its recipient’s name, in alphabetical order.
3-3
3-4
Storing/Editing Address Book
9 If you are finished, press the right Any key to select <Set>.
10 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Destination Registration>, then press
[OK].
11 Use – (numeric keys) to enter the fax number.
–
–
–
–
If you want to insert a pause of several seconds, use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Pause>, then press [OK]. If you insert a pause within the fax number, the letter <p> is displayed between the numbers. If you insert a pause at the end of the fax number, the letter <P> appears. When dialing an overseas number, insert a pause after the country code, and at the end of the fax number.
If you want to directly call an extension line that is connected to a PBX (Private Branch
Exchange), which accepts only tone signals, use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Tone>, then press [OK].
If you want to insert a space between numbers, use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Space>, then press [OK].
If you want to delete the entire number you entered, press (Clear).
–
–
–
–
For information on how to set the length of a
pause, see “Communications Settings,” on p. 13-8.
For information on how to insert a pause for an
overseas number, see “Dialing an Overseas
Number (With Pauses),” on p. 5-22.
You cannot insert a pause or a space at the beginning of a number.
If you enter a pause at the end of the number, the pause is always 10 seconds long.
–
–
–
You can enter up to 40 characters for fax number.
If you want to move the position of the cursor, use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel).
If you want to delete the number or character immediately to the left of the cursor, use [ ▼ ],
[ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Backspace>, then press [OK].
12 If you want to set the ECM TX, sending speed, and long distance settings, press the right Any key to select <Option>.
Storing/Editing Address Book
15 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Sending Speed>, then press [OK].
These settings are optional. If you do not want to set the optional settings, skip to step 20.
13 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<ECM TX>, then press [OK].
16 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the sending speed, then press [OK].
14 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<On> or <Off>, then press [OK].
If your document transmissions are slow to start, it may mean that the telephone lines in your area are in poor condition. Select a slower speed. You can select <33600 bps>, <14400 bps>, <9600 bps>, or <4800 bps>.
17 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Long Distance>, then press [OK].
3-5
3-6
Storing/Editing Address Book
18 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the long distance setting, then press [OK].
21 Press the right Any key to select
<Register>.
Select <Domestic> for dialing domestic (local) telephone numbers. Select <Long Distance (1)> if communication errors frequently occur when you make overseas calls (when the overseas telephone number is registered in the Address
Book). If errors persist, try selecting <Long
Distance (2)> or <Long Distance (3)>.
19 Press the right Any key to select <Done>.
If you want to register another fax number, repeat from step 6.
22 Press the right Any key to select <Done>.
20 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Set Destination>, then press [OK].
23 Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
Storing/Editing Address Book
Registering Fax Numbers Obtained via an LDAP Server in the Address Book
This section describes how to register the fax numbers that are obtained by searching the directory listings on the network using LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access Protocol) servers.
This section describes how to register destinations from the Additional Functions screen. You can also register destinations from the
Select Send Type screen, as follows:
– In the Select Send Type screen, use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Address Book>, then press [OK].
–
–
–
Press the left Any key to select <Reg/Edit/Erase>.
Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Register New Dest. to Add. Book>, then press [OK].
Follow the procedure described in this section from step 6.
1 Press (Main Menu).
2 Press the right Any key to select
<Additional Func.>.
4 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Register Address>, then press [OK].
3 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Address Book Settings>, then press [OK].
5 Press the right Any key to select <Register
New>.
If a password has been set for the Address Book, enter the password to enter Address Book
Settings menu. Enter the password using –
(numeric keys), then press [OK]. (For details about the Address Book password, see “Security,” in the e-Manual.)
6 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Search LDAP Server>, then press [OK].
3-7
3-8
Storing/Editing Address Book
7
Follow steps 4 to 7 in “Specifying Fax
Numbers via an LDAP Server,” on p. 5-43
to search destinations.
8 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired destination from the search results, then press [OK].
■ If only one destination is selected:
① Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Display Name>, then press [OK].
② Confirm the recipient’s name, then press the right Any key to select <Set>.
–
–
You can select up to 32 destinations.
If you want to select the first 32 destinations, press the left Any key to select <Menu> and use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Select All>. (If a destination is selected,
<Select All> changes to <Clear Selection>.)
–
–
To cancel a selected destination, select the destination again, then press [OK] to clear the check mark.
You can use [ ◀ ] or [ ▶ ] to restrict the displayed range of destinations.
9 Press the right Any key to select
<Register>.
If you edit the recipient’s name obtained
from the search results, see “Registering Fax
Numbers in the Address Book,” on p. 3-2.
Registered destinations are sorted in the Address
Book by its recipient’s name, in alphabetical order.
③ Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Display Destination>, then press [OK].
④ Confirm the destination.
Storing/Editing Address Book
■ If multiple destinations are selected:
① Confirm the message shown on the display, then press the right Any key to select
<Done>.
If you edit the destination obtained from the search results and specify the optional
settings, see “Registering Fax Numbers in the Address Book,” on p. 3-2.
⑤ Use[ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Set Destination>, then press [OK].
10 Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
⑥ Press the right Any key to select <Register>.
3-9
Storing/Editing Address Book
Registering E-Mail Addresses in the Address Book
This section describes the procedure for registering e-mail addresses in the Address Book.
–
–
By storing your own e-mail address, you can specify a reply e-mail address.
This section describes how to register destinations from the Additional Functions screen. You can also register destinations from the
•
•
•
•
Select Send Type screen, as follows:
In the Select Send Type screen, use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Address Book>, then press [OK].
Press the left Any key to select <Reg/Edit/Erase>.
Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Register New Dest. to Add. Book>, then press [OK].
Follow the procedure described in this section from step 6.
1 Press (Main Menu).
2 Press the right Any key to select
<Additional Func.>.
4 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Register Address>, then press [OK].
3 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Address Book Settings>, then press [OK].
5 Press the right Any key to select <Register
New>.
3-10
If a password has been set for the Address Book, enter the password to enter Address Book
Settings menu. Enter the password using –
(numeric keys), then press [OK]. (For details about the Address Book password, see “Security,” in the e-Manual.)
6 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<E-mail>, then press [OK].
Storing/Editing Address Book
9 If you are finished, press the right Any key to select <Set>.
7 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Register Name>, then press [OK].
10 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Destination Registration>, then press
[OK].
8 Use the software keyboard to enter the recipient’s name.
11 Use the software keyboard to enter the recipient’s e-mail address.
–
–
You can enter up to 16 characters for the recipient’s name.
For information on how to use the software
keyboard, see “Entering Characters,” on p. 1-19.
Registered destinations are sorted in the Address
Book by its recipient’s name, in alphabetical order.
–
–
You can enter up to 120 characters for the email address.
For information on how to use the software
keyboard, see “Entering Characters,” on p. 1-19.
3-11
Storing/Editing Address Book
12 If you are finished, press the right Any key to select <Set>.
13 Press the right Any key to select
<Register>.
If you want to register another e-mail address, repeat from step 6.
14 Press the right Any key to select <Done>.
3-12
15 Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
Storing/Editing Address Book
Registering E-Mail Addresses Obtained via an LDAP Server in the Address Book
This section describes how to register the e-mail addresses that are obtained by searching the directory listings on the network using LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access Protocol) servers.
–
–
By storing your own e-mail address, you can specify a reply e-mail address.
This section describes how to register destinations from the Additional Functions screen. You can also register destinations from the
•
•
•
•
Select Send Type screen, as follows:
In the Select Send Type screen, use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Address Book>, then press [OK].
Press the left Any key to select <Reg/Edit/Erase>.
Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Register New Dest. to Add. Book>, then press [OK].
Follow the procedure described in this section from step 6.
1 Press (Main Menu).
2 Press the right Any key to select
<Additional Func.>.
4 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Register Address>, then press [OK].
3 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Address Book Settings>, then press [OK].
5 Press the right Any key to select <Register
New>.
If a password has been set for the Address Book, enter the password to enter Address Book
Settings menu. Enter the password using –
(numeric keys), then press [OK]. (For details about the Address Book password, see “Security,” in the e-Manual.)
3-13
Storing/Editing Address Book
6 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Search LDAP Server>, then press [OK].
9 Press the right Any key to select <Set>.
3-14
7 Follow steps 4 to 7 in “E-mail,” in the e-Manual to search destinations.
8 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired destination from the search results, then press [OK].
■ If only one destination is selected:
① Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Display Name>, then press [OK].
② Confirm the recipient’s name, then press the right Any key to select <Set>.
–
–
–
You can select up to 32 destinations.
If you want to select the first 32 destinations, press the left Any key to select <Menu> and use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Select All>. (If a destination is selected,
<Select All> changes to <Clear Selection>.)
If you press the left Any key to select <Menu> and use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Register E-mail for I-Fax>, the selected e-mail address can be specified as an I-fax destination. To register e-mail addresses as
I-fax addresses, register one e-mail address at a time.
–
–
To cancel a selected destination, select the destination again, then press [OK] to clear the check mark.
You can use [ ◀ ] or [ ▶ ] to restrict the displayed range of destinations.
If you edit the recipient’s name obtained
from the search results, see “Registering
E-Mail Addresses in the Address Book,” on p. 3-10.
Registered destinations are sorted in the Address
Book by its recipient’s name, in alphabetical order.
③ Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Display Destination>, then press [OK].
Storing/Editing Address Book
■ If multiple destinations are selected:
① Confirm the message shown on the display, then press the right Any key to select
<Done>.
④ Confirm the destination, then press the right Any key to select <Set>.
10 Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
If you edit the destination obtained from
the search results, see “Registering E-Mail
Addresses in the Address Book,” on p. 3-10.
⑤ Press the right Any key to select <Register>.
3-15
3-16
Storing/Editing Address Book
Registering I-Fax Addresses in the Address Book
This section describes the procedure for registering I-fax addresses in the Address Book.
This section describes how to register destinations from the Additional Functions screen. You can also register destinations from the
Select Send Type screen, as follows:
– In the Select Send Type screen, use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Address Book>, then press [OK].
–
–
–
Press the left Any key to select <Reg/Edit/Erase>.
Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Register New Dest. to Add. Book>, then press [OK].
Follow the procedure described in this section from step 6.
1 Press (Main Menu).
2 Press the right Any key to select
<Additional Func.>.
4 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Register Address>, then press [OK].
3 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Address Book Settings>, then press [OK].
5 Press the right Any key to select <Register
New>.
If a password has been set for the Address Book, enter the password to enter Address Book
Settings menu. Enter the password using –
(numeric keys), then press [OK]. (For details about the Address Book password, see “Security,” in the e-Manual.)
6 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<I-Fax>, then press [OK].
7 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Register Name>, then press [OK].
Storing/Editing Address Book
10 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Destination Registration>, then press
[OK].
8 Use the software keyboard to enter the recipient’s name.
11 Use the software keyboard to enter the recipient’s I-fax address.
–
–
You can enter up to 16 characters for the recipient’s name.
For information on how to use the software
keyboard, see “Entering Characters,” on p. 1-19.
Registered destinations are sorted in the Address
Book by its recipient’s name, in alphabetical order.
9 If you are finished, press the right Any key to select <Set>.
–
–
You can enter up to 120 characters for the Ifax address.
For information on how to use the software
keyboard, see “Entering Characters,” on p. 1-19.
12 If you are finished, press the right Any key to select <Set>.
3-17
Storing/Editing Address Book
13 Press the right Any key to select
<Register>.
14 Press the right Any key to select <Done>.
3-18
If you want to register another I-fax address, repeat from step 6.
15 Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
Registering File Server Addresses in the Address Book
This section describes the procedure for registering file server addresses in the Address Book.
–
–
If <Language Switch> in Common Settings is set to <On>, the Host Name and File Path of the file server destination may not be displayed correctly, so you may not be able to refer to them.
This section describes how to register destinations from the Additional Functions screen. You can also register destinations from the
•
•
•
•
Select Send Type screen, as follows:
In the Select Send Type screen, use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Address Book>, then press [OK].
Press the left Any key to select <Reg/Edit/Erase>.
Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Register New Dest. to Add. Book>, then press [OK].
Follow the procedure described in this section from step 6.
1 Press (Main Menu).
2 Press the right Any key to select
<Additional Func.>.
3 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Address Book Settings>, then press [OK].
If a password has been set for the Address Book, enter the password to enter Address Book
Settings menu. Enter the password using –
(numeric keys), then press [OK]. (For details about the Address Book password, see “Security,” in the e-Manual.)
4 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Register Address>, then press [OK].
Storing/Editing Address Book
8 Use the software keyboard to enter the file server name.
5 Press the right Any key to select <Register
New>.
–
–
You can enter up to 16 characters for the file server name.
For information on how to use the software
keyboard, see “Entering Characters,” on p. 1-19.
6 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<File>, then press [OK].
Registered destinations are sorted in the Address
Book by its recipient’s name, in alphabetical order.
9 If you are finished, press the right Any key to select <Set>.
7 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Register Name>, then press [OK].
10 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Destination Registration>, then press
[OK].
3-19
3-20
Storing/Editing Address Book
11 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select a server protocol, then press [OK].
■ If you select <FTP> or <Windows (SMB)>:
① Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Host Name>, then press [OK].
–
–
–
<FTP>: Select this protocol if you are sending documents to a computer running Sun Solaris
2.6 or later, Mac OS X, Internet Information
Services 5.0 on Windows 2000 Server, Internet
Information Services 5.1 on Windows XP
Professional, Internet Information Services 6.0 on Windows Server 2003, Internet Information
Services 7.0 on Windows Vista/Server 2008,
Internet Information Services 7.5 under
Windows 7/Server 2008 R2, or Red Hat
Linux 7.2.
<Windows (SMB)>: Select this protocol if you are sending documents to a computer running UNIX/Linux (Samba 2.2.8a or later) or
Windows 98/Me/2000/XP/Vista/7/Server
2003/Server 2008.
<Windows (SMB): Browse>: Select this protocol if you want to specify a file server connected to a specific network.
After turning the main power on, you must wait for the time set in the Startup Time Settings to elapse before selecting <Windows (SMB):
Browse>. Network transmission is not possible until this startup time has elapsed. (See “Network
Settings,” in the e-Manual.)
② Use the software keyboard to enter the host name.
–
–
You can enter up to 47 characters (120 characters if <Windows (SMB)> is selected) for the host name.
For information on how to use the software
keyboard, see “Entering Characters,” on p. 1-19.
A host name is a unique name assigned to identify each host computer that provides services on the Internet. In this entry box, enter the name of the file server on the network as the destination of the send job.
③ If you are finished, press the right Any key to select <Set>.
④ Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Folder Path>, then press [OK].
Storing/Editing Address Book
⑥ If you are finished, press the right Any key to select <Set>.
⑤ Use the software keyboard to enter the path to the folder.
⑦ Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<User Name>, then press [OK].
–
–
You can enter up to 120 characters for the folder path.
For information on how to use the software
keyboard, see “Entering Characters,” on p. 1-19.
–
–
A file path is a series of characters that signify the location of the folder. Specify a folder in the file server as the destination of the send job.
If you are sending to an imageWARE Document
Manager folder, enter the folder name set in imageWARE Gateway (Color imageCLASS
MF9280Cdn only).
⑧ Use the software keyboard to enter the user name.
–
–
You can enter up to 24 characters for the user name.
For information on how to use the software
keyboard, see “Entering Characters,” on p. 1-19.
If you are sending to an imageWARE Document
Manager folder, enter the user name set in imageWARE Gateway (Color imageCLASS
MF9280Cdn only).
3-21
Storing/Editing Address Book
⑨ If you are finished, press the right Any key to select <Set>.
⑫ If you are finished, press the right Any key to select <Set>.
⑩ Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Password>, then press [OK].
⑬ Press the right Any key to select <Set>.
3-22
⑪ Use the software keyboard to enter the password.
⑭ Press the right Any key to select <Register>.
–
–
You can enter up to 24 characters when
<FTP> is selected as the server protocol, or up to 14 when <Windows (SMB)> is selected.
For information on how to use the software
keyboard, see “Entering Characters,” on p. 1-19.
If you are sending to an imageWARE Document
Manager folder, enter the password set in imageWARE Gateway (Color imageCLASS
MF9280Cdn only).
■ If you select <Windows (SMB): Browse>:
① Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired workgroup, then press [OK].
Storing/Editing Address Book
③ Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired file server, then press the right
Any key to select <Set>.
If the desired workgroup is not displayed, use [ ▼ ],
[ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to scroll to the desired workgroup.
② Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired file server, then press [OK].
To enter the user name and the network password, select a file server from the list and press [OK]. Enter the user name (up to 24 character) and network password (up to 14 characters), then press the right Any key to select
<Set>.
④ Specify the folder path, user name, and password as described from steps 5 to 11 in
“If you select <FTP> or <Windows (SMB)> on p. 3-20.”
⑤ Press the right Any key to select <Set>.
If the desired file server is not displayed, use [ ▼ ],
[ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to scroll to the desired file server.
3-23
Storing/Editing Address Book
⑥ Press the right Any key to select <Register>.
12 Press the right Any key to select <Done>.
3-24
If you want to register another file server address, repeat from step 6.
13 Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
Registering Group Addresses in the Address Book
The Group Address feature enables you to create a group of up to 299 stored destinations as a single destination.
–
–
–
You cannot register new destinations in a group address. New destinations need to be registered in the Address Book before you can register them as part of a group address.
The types of destinations you can register in a group address are fax numbers, e-mail addresses, I-fax addresses, and file server addresses. You cannot register a group address in a group address.
This section describes how to register destinations from the Additional Functions screen. You can also register destinations from the
•
•
•
•
Select Send Type screen, as follows:
In the Select Send Type screen, use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Address Book>, then press [OK].
Press the left Any key to select <Reg/Edit/Erase>.
Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Register New Dest. to Add. Book>, then press [OK].
Follow the procedure described in this section from step 6.
1 Press (Main Menu).
2 Press the right Any key to select
<Additional Func.>.
3 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Address Book Settings>, then press [OK].
If a password has been set for the Address Book, enter the password to enter Address Book
Settings menu. Enter the password using –
(numeric keys), then press [OK]. (For details about the Address Book password, see “Security,” in the e-Manual.)
4 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Register Address>, then press [OK].
Storing/Editing Address Book
8 Use the software keyboard to enter the group name.
5 Press the right Any key to select <Register
New>.
–
–
You can enter up to 16 characters for the group name.
For information on how to use the software
keyboard, see “Entering Characters,” on p. 1-19.
6 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Group>, then press [OK].
Registered destinations are sorted in the Address
Book by its name, in alphabetical order.
9 If you are finished, press the right Any key to select <Set>.
7 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Register Name>, then press [OK].
10 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Destination Registration>, then press
[OK].
3-25
3-26
Storing/Editing Address Book
11 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the destination to store in the group address, then press [OK].
13 Press the right Any key to select
<Register>.
–
–
–
–
To cancel a selected destination, select the destination again and press [OK] to clear the check mark.
Use [ ◀ ] or [ ▶ ] to select the index key (e.g.,
[ABC]) to restrict the display range of entries.
Select [All] to return to the full address list.
If the desired destination is not displayed, use
[ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to scroll to the desired destination.
You can select a destination and press the left
Any key to select <Details> to confirm the detailed information related to the selected destination. Press the right Any key to select
<Done> to return to the previous screen.
12 Repeat step 11 to select all destinations you want to register in the group address, then press the right Any key to select
<Set>.
If you want to register another group address, repeat from step 6.
14 Press the right Any key to select <Done>.
15 Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
Storing/Editing Address Book
Checking/Editing Addresses Registered in the Address Book
This section describes the procedure for checking and editing the details of the destinations registered in the
Address Book.
This section describes how to check and edit the details of the destinations from the Additional Functions screen. You can also check and edit the details from the Select Send Type screen, as follows:
– In the Select Send Type screen, use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Address Book>, then press [OK].
–
–
–
–
Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the destination you want to check or edit.
Press the left Any key to select <Reg/Edit/Erase>.
Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Confirm/Edit Address Book Dest.>, then press [OK].
Follow the procedure described in this section from step 7.
1 Press (Main Menu).
2 Press the right Any key to select
<Additional Func.>.
3 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Address Book Settings>, then press [OK].
If a password has been set for the Address Book, enter the password to enter Address Book
Settings menu. Enter the password using –
(numeric keys), then press [OK]. (For details about the Address Book password, see “Security,” in the e-Manual.)
4 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Register Address>, then press [OK].
3-27
3-28
Storing/Editing Address Book
5 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the destination you want to check or edit, then press the left Any key to select
<Edit/Erase>.
7 Check or edit the address details.
■ If you want to check the address details:
① Check the details, then press the right Any key to select <Done>.
–
–
–
–
You cannot check or edit multiple destinations at the same time.
Use [ ◀ ] or [ ▶ ] to select the index key (e.g.,
[ABC]) to restrict the display range of entries.
Select [All] to return to the full address list.
If the desired destination is not displayed, use
[ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to scroll to the desired destination.
If you select [All], destinations registered in one-touch are also displayed. However, you cannot edit those destinations. For information on how to edit the destinations registered in
one-touch, see “Checking/Editing Addresses
Registered in One-Touch,” on p. 3-59.
6 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Confirm/Edit Address Book Dest.>, then press [OK].
■ If you want to edit the address details:
① Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the item you want to edit, then press [OK].
② Confirm that <Edit> is selected, then press
[OK].
③ Edit the address details.
Follow the same procedure as you used when registering destinations.
–
–
–
–
–
For information on how to register fax
numbers, see “Registering Fax Numbers in the
For information on how to register e-mail
addresses, see “Registering E-Mail Addresses in the Address Book,” on p. 3-10.
For information on how to register I-fax
addresses, see “Registering I-Fax Addresses in the Address Book,” on p. 3-16.
For information on how to register file server
addresses, see “Registering File Server
Addresses in the Address Book” on p. 3-18.
For information on how to register group
addresses, see “Registering Group Addresses in the Address Book,” on p. 3-24.
④ Press the right Any key to select <Done>.
8 Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
Storing/Editing Address Book
3-29
Storing/Editing Address Book
Erasing Addresses from the Address Book
This section describes the procedure for erasing addresses from the Address Book.
This section describes how to erase the destinations registered in the Address Book from the Additional Functions screen. You can also erase them from the Select Send Type screen, as follows:
– In the Select Send Type screen, use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Address Book>, then press [OK].
–
–
–
–
Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the destination you want to erase.
Press the left Any key to select <Reg/Edit/Erase>.
Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Erase from Add. Book>, then press [OK].
Follow the procedure described in this section from step 7.
1 Press (Main Menu).
2 Press the right Any key to select
<Additional Func.>.
4 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Register Address>, then press [OK].
3 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Address Book Settings>, then press [OK].
5 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the destination you want to check or edit, then press the left Any key to select
<Edit/Erase>.
3-30
If a password has been set for the Address Book, enter the password to enter Address Book
Settings menu. Enter the password using –
(numeric keys), then press [OK]. (For details about the Address Book password, see “Security,” in the e-Manual.)
–
–
–
–
You cannot erase multiple destinations at the same time.
Use [ ◀ ] or [ ▶ ] to select the index key (e.g.,
[ABC]) to restrict the display range of entries.
Select [All] to return to the full address list.
If the desired destination is not displayed, use
[ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to scroll to the desired destination.
If you select [All], destinations registered in one-touch are also displayed. However, you cannot delete those destinations. For information on how to delete the destinations
registered in one-touch, see “Erasing Addresses
Registered in One-Touch,” on p. 3-62.
6 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Erase from Add. Book>, then press [OK].
7 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Yes>, then press [OK].
If you want to cancel erasing the destination, select <No>.
8 Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
Storing/Editing Address Book
3-31
3-32
Storing/Editing One-Touch
Storing/Editing One-Touch
You can register up to 200 destinations in one-touch.
–
–
–
–
Each address entry is treated as a single entry, so if a destination is registered in a group address, that destination and the group address are counted as two entries.
Destinations stored in the Address Book can be exported to your computer as a file, which can be imported into the machine. For information on how to export and import the Address Book, see “Setting from a PC,” in the e-Manual.
For easy reference, it is recommended to print the list of recipients registered in the Address Book and one-touch. For information on how to print the lists, see “Introduction of the Machine,” in the e-Manual.
New destinations cannot be registered in one-touch if <Restrict New Addresses> in <Restrict the Send Function> in
<System Management Set.> is set to <On>.
Registering Fax Numbers in One-Touch
This section describes the procedure for registering fax numbers in one-touch.
–
–
–
–
This section describes how to register destinations from the Additional Functions screen. You can also register destinations from the
Select Send Type screen, as follows:
In the Select Send Type screen, press the right Any key to select <One-touch>.
Press the left Any key to select <Reg/Edit/Erase>.
Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Register New Dest. to One-touch>, then press [OK].
Follow the procedure described in this section from step 5.
1 Press (Main Menu).
2 Press the right Any key to select
<Additional Func.>.
3 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Address Book Settings>, then press [OK].
If a password has been set for the Address Book, enter the password to enter Address Book
Settings menu. Enter the password using –
(numeric keys), then press [OK]. (For details about the Address Book password, see “Security,” in the e-Manual.)
4 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Register One-touch>, then press [OK].
Storing/Editing One-Touch
7 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Register Name>, then press [OK].
5 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the one-touch you want to register, then press [OK].
8 Use the software keyboard to enter the recipient’s name.
6 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Fax>, then press [OK].
–
–
You can enter up to 16 characters for the recipient’s name.
For information on how to use the software
keyboard, see “Entering Characters,” on p. 1-19.
Registered destinations are sorted in the Address
Book by its recipient’s name, in alphabetical order.
9 If you are finished, press the right Any key to select <Set>.
3-33
Storing/Editing One-Touch
10 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Register One-touch Name>, then press
[OK].
13 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Destination Registration>, then press
[OK].
11 Use the software keyboard to enter the one-touch name.
14 Use – (numeric keys) to enter the fax number.
3-34
–
–
You can enter up to 12 characters for the onetouch name.
For information on how to use the software
keyboard, see “Entering Characters,” on p. 1-19.
12 If you are finished, press the right Any key to select <Set>.
–
–
–
–
–
–
You can enter up to 40 characters for fax number.
If you want to move the position of the cursor, use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel).
If you want to delete the number or character immediately to the left of the cursor, use [ ▼ ],
[ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Backspace>, then press [OK].
If you want to insert a pause of several seconds, use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Pause>, then press [OK]. If you insert a pause within the fax number, the letter <p> is displayed between the numbers. If you insert a pause at the end of the fax number, the letter <P> appears. When dialing an overseas number, insert a pause after the country code, and at the end of the fax number.
If you want to directly call an extension line that is connected to a PBX (Private Branch
Exchange), which accepts only tone signals, use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Tone>, then press [OK].
If you want to insert a space between numbers, use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Space>, then press [OK].
– If you want to delete the entire number you entered, press (Clear).
Storing/Editing One-Touch
17 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<On> or <Off>, then press [OK].
–
–
–
–
For information on how to set the length of a
pause, see “Communications Settings,” on p. 13-8.
For information on how to insert a pause for an
overseas number, see “Dialing an Overseas
Number (With Pauses),” on p. 5-22.
You cannot insert a pause or a space at the beginning of a number.
If you enter a pause at the end of the number, the pause is always 10 seconds long.
15 If you want to set the ECM TX, sending speed, and long distance settings, press the right Any key to select <Option>.
18 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Sending Speed>, then press [OK].
19 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the sending speed, then press [OK].
These settings are optional. If you do not want to set the optional settings, skip to step 23.
16 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<ECM TX>, then press [OK].
If your document transmissions are slow to start, it may mean that the telephone lines in your area are in poor condition. Select a slower speed. You can select <33600 bps>,
<14400 bps>, <9600 bps>, or <4800 bps>.
3-35
3-36
Storing/Editing One-Touch
20 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Long Distance>, then press [OK].
23 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Set Destination>, then press [OK].
21 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the long distance setting, then press [OK].
24 Press the right Any key to select
<Register>.
Select <Domestic> for dialing domestic (local) telephone numbers. Select <Long Distance (1)> if communication errors frequently occur when you make overseas calls (when the overseas telephone number is registered in the Address
Book). If errors persist, try selecting <Long
Distance (2)> or <Long Distance (3)>.
22 Press the right Any key to select <Done>.
If you want to register another fax number, repeat from step 5.
25 Press the right Any key to select <Done>.
26 Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
Storing/Editing One-Touch
Registering Fax Numbers Obtained via an LDAP Server in One-Touch
This section describes how to register the fax numbers that are obtained by searching the directory listings on the network using LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access Protocol) servers.
–
–
–
–
This section describes how to register destinations from the Additional Functions screen. You can also register destinations from the
Select Send Type screen, as follows:
In the Select Send Type screen, press the right Any key to select <One-touch>.
Press the left Any key to select <Reg/Edit/Erase>.
Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Register New Dest. to One-touch>, then press [OK].
Follow the procedure described in this section from step 5.
1 Press (Main Menu).
2 Press the right Any key to select
<Additional Func.>.
4 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Register One-touch>, then press [OK].
3 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Address Book Settings>, then press [OK].
5 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the one-touch you want to register, then press [OK].
If a password has been set for the Address Book, enter the password to enter Address Book
Settings menu. Enter the password using –
(numeric keys), then press [OK]. (For details about the Address Book password, see “Security,” in the e-Manual.)
3-37
Storing/Editing One-Touch
6 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Search LDAP Server>, then press [OK].
9 Press the right Any key to select <Set>.
3-38
7
Follow steps 4 to 7 in “Specifying Fax
Numbers via an LDAP Server,” on p. 5-43
to search destinations.
8 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired destination from the search results, then press [OK].
10 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Display Name>, then press [OK].
11 Confirm the recipient’s name, then press the right Any key to select <Set>.
You cannot select multiple destinations at a time.
–
–
To cancel a selected destination, select the destination again, then press [OK] to clear the check mark.
You can use [ ◀ ] or [ ▶ ] to restrict the displayed range of destinations.
If you edit the recipient’s name obtained from
the search results, see “Registering Fax Numbers in One-Touch,” on p. 3-32.
Registered destinations are sorted in the Address
Book by its recipient’s name, in alphabetical order.
12 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Display One-touch Name>, then press
[OK].
Storing/Editing One-Touch
15 Confirm the destination.
13 Use the software keyboard to enter the one-touch name, then press the right Any key to select <Set>.
If you edit the destination obtained from the search results and specify the optional settings,
see “Registering Fax Numbers in One-Touch,” on p. 3-32.
16 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Set Destination>, then press [OK].
–
–
You can enter up to 12 characters for the onetouch name.
For information on using the software
keyboard, see “Entering Characters,” on p. 1-19.
14 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Display Destination>, then press [OK].
17 Press the right Any key to select
<Register>.
18 Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
3-39
3-40
Storing/Editing One-Touch
Registering E-Mail Addresses in One-Touch
This section describes the procedure for registering e-mail addresses in one-touch.
–
–
•
•
•
By storing your own e-mail address, you can specify a reply e-mail address.
This section describes how to register destinations from the Additional Functions screen. You can also register destinations from the
•
Select Send Type screen, as follows:
In the Select Send Type screen, press the right Any key to select <One-touch>.
Press the left Any key to select <Reg/Edit/Erase>.
Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Register New Dest. to One-touch>, then press [OK].
Follow the procedure described in this section from step 5.
1 Press (Main Menu).
2 Press the right Any key to select
<Additional Func.>.
4 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Register One-touch>, then press [OK].
3 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Address Book Settings>, then press [OK].
5 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the one-touch you want to register, then press [OK].
If a password has been set for the Address Book, enter the password to enter Address Book
Settings menu. Enter the password using –
(numeric keys), then press [OK]. (For details about the Address Book password, see “Security,” in the e-Manual.)
6 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<E-mail>, then press [OK].
7 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Register Name>, then press [OK].
Storing/Editing One-Touch
10 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Register One-touch Name>, then press
[OK].
8 Use the software keyboard to enter the recipient’s name.
11 Use the software keyboard to enter the one-touch name.
–
–
You can enter up to 16 characters for the recipient’s name.
For information on how to use the software
keyboard, see “Entering Characters,” on p. 1-19.
Registered destinations are sorted in the Address
Book by its recipient’s name, in alphabetical order.
9 If you are finished, press the right Any key to select <Set>.
–
–
You can enter up to 12 characters for the onetouch name.
For information on how to use the software
keyboard, see “Entering Characters,” on p. 1-19.
12 If you are finished, press the right Any key to select <Set>.
3-41
3-42
Storing/Editing One-Touch
13 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Destination Registration>, then press
[OK].
16 Press the right Any key to select
<Register>.
14 Use the software keyboard to enter the recipient’s e-mail address.
If you want to register another e-mail address, repeat from step 5.
17 Press the right Any key to select <Done>.
–
–
You can enter up to 120 characters for the email address.
For information on how to use the software
keyboard, see “Entering Characters,” on p. 1-19.
15 If you are finished, press the right Any key to select <Set>.
18 Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
Storing/Editing One-Touch
Registering E-Mail Addresses Obtained via an LDAP Server in One-Touch
This section describes how to register the e-mail addresses that are obtained by searching the directory listings on the network using LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access Protocol) servers.
–
–
•
•
•
By storing your own e-mail address, you can specify a reply e-mail address.
This section describes how to register destinations from the Additional Functions screen. You can also register destinations from the
•
Select Send Type screen, as follows:
In the Select Send Type screen, press the right Any key to select <One-touch>.
Press the left Any key to select <Reg/Edit/Erase>.
Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Register New Dest. to One-touch>, then press [OK].
Follow the procedure described in this section from step 5.
1 Press (Main Menu).
2 Press the right Any key to select
<Additional Func.>.
4 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Register One-touch>, then press [OK].
3 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Address Book Settings>, then press [OK].
5 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the one-touch you want to register, then press [OK].
If a password has been set for the Address Book, enter the password to enter Address Book
Settings menu. Enter the password using –
(numeric keys), then press [OK]. (For details about the Address Book password, see “Security,” in the e-Manual.)
3-43
Storing/Editing One-Touch
6 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Search LDAP Server>, then press [OK].
9 Press the right Any key to select <Set>.
3-44
7 Follow steps 4 to 7 in “E-mail,” in the e-Manual to search destinations.
8 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired destination from the search results, then press [OK].
10 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Display Name>, then press [OK].
–
–
You cannot select multiple destinations at a time.
If you press the left Any key to select <Menu> and use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Register E-mail for I-Fax>, the selected e-mail address can be specified as an I-fax destination.
11 Confirm the recipient’s name, then press the right Any key to select <Set>.
–
–
To cancel a selected destination, select the destination again, then press [OK] to clear the check mark.
You can use [ ◀ ] or [ ▶ ] to restrict the displayed range of destinations.
If you edit the recipient’s name obtained from
the search results, see “Registering E-Mail
Addresses in One-Touch,” on p. 3-40.
Registered destinations are sorted in the Address
Book by its recipient’s name, in alphabetical order.
12 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Display One-touch Name>, then press
[OK].
Storing/Editing One-Touch
15 Confirm the destination, then press the right Any key to select <Set>.
13 Use the software keyboard to enter the one-touch name, then press the right Any key to select <Set>.
If you edit the destination obtained from the
search results, see “Registering E-Mail Addresses in One-Touch,” on p. 3-40.
16 Press the right Any key to select
<Register>.
–
–
You can enter up to 12 characters for the onetouch name.
For information on using the software
keyboard, see “Entering Characters,” on p. 1-19.
14 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Display Destination>, then press [OK].
17 Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
3-45
Storing/Editing One-Touch
Registering I-Fax Addresses in One-Touch
This section describes the procedure for registering I-fax addresses in one-touch.
–
–
–
–
This section describes how to register destinations from the Additional Functions screen. You can also register destinations from the
Select Send Type screen, as follows:
In the Select Send Type screen, press the right Any key to select <One-touch>.
Press the left Any key to select <Reg/Edit/Erase>.
Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Register New Dest. to One-touch>, then press [OK].
Follow the procedure described in this section from step 5.
1 Press (Main Menu).
2 Press the right Any key to select
<Additional Func.>.
4 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Register One-touch>, then press [OK].
3 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Address Book Settings>, then press [OK].
5 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the one-touch you want to register, then press [OK].
3-46
If a password has been set for the Address Book, enter the password to enter Address Book
Settings menu. Enter the password using –
(numeric keys), then press [OK]. (For details about the Address Book password, see “Security,” in the e-Manual.)
6 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<I-Fax>, then press [OK].
Storing/Editing One-Touch
9 If you are finished, press the right Any key to select <Set>.
7 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Register Name>, then press [OK].
10 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Register One-touch Name>, then press
[OK].
8 Use the software keyboard to enter the recipient’s name.
11 Use the software keyboard to enter the one-touch name.
–
–
You can enter up to 16 characters for the recipient’s name.
For information on how to use the software
keyboard, see “Entering Characters,” on p. 1-19.
Registered destinations are sorted in the Address
Book by its recipient’s name, in alphabetical order.
–
–
You can enter up to 12 characters for the onetouch name.
For information on how to use the software
keyboard, see “Entering Characters,” on p. 1-19.
3-47
Storing/Editing One-Touch
12 If you are finished, press the right Any key to select <Set>.
15 If you are finished, press the right Any key to select <Set>.
13 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Destination Registration>, then press
[OK].
16 Press the right Any key to select
<Register>.
3-48
14 Use the software keyboard to enter the recipient’s I-fax address.
If you want to register another I-fax address, repeat from step 5.
17 Press the right Any key to select <Done>.
–
–
You can enter up to 120 characters for the Ifax address.
For information on how to use the software
keyboard, see “Entering Characters,” on p. 1-19.
18 Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
Registering File Server Addresses in One-Touch
This section describes the procedure for registering file server addresses in one-touch.
Storing/Editing One-Touch
–
–
•
•
•
•
If <Language Switch> in Common Settings is set to <On>, the Host Name and File Path of the file server destination may not be displayed correctly, so you may not be able to refer to them.
This section describes how to register destinations from the Additional Functions screen. You can also register destinations from the
Select Send Type screen, as follows:
In the Select Send Type screen, press the right Any key to select <One-touch>.
Press the left Any key to select <Reg/Edit/Erase>.
Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Register New Dest. to One-touch>, then press [OK].
Follow the procedure described in this section from step 5.
1 Press (Main Menu).
2 Press the right Any key to select
<Additional Func.>.
4 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Register One-touch>, then press [OK].
3 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Address Book Settings>, then press [OK].
5 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the one-touch you want to register, then press [OK].
If a password has been set for the Address Book, enter the password to enter Address Book
Settings menu. Enter the password using –
(numeric keys), then press [OK]. (For details about the Address Book password, see “Security,” in the e-Manual.)
3-49
Storing/Editing One-Touch
6 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<File>, then press [OK].
9 If you are finished, press the right Any key to select <Set>.
3-50
7 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Register Name>, then press [OK].
10 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Register One-touch Name>, then press
[OK].
8 Use the software keyboard to enter the file server name.
11 Use the software keyboard to enter the one-touch name.
–
–
You can enter up to 16 characters for the file server name.
For information on how to use the software
keyboard, see “Entering Characters,” on p. 1-19.
Registered destinations are sorted in the Address
Book by its recipient’s name, in alphabetical order.
–
–
You can enter up to 12 characters for the onetouch name.
For information on how to use the software
keyboard, see “Entering Characters,” on p. 1-19.
12 If you are finished, press the right Any key to select <Set>.
13 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Destination Registration>, then press
[OK].
Storing/Editing One-Touch
–
–
<Windows (SMB)>: Select this protocol if you are sending documents to a computer running UNIX/Linux (Samba 2.2.8a or later) or
Windows 98/Me/2000/XP/Vista/7/Server
2003/Server 2008.
<Windows (SMB): Browse>: Select this protocol if you want to specify a file server connected to a specific network.
After turning the main power on, you must wait for the time set in the Startup Time Settings to elapse before selecting <Windows (SMB):
Browse>. Network transmission is not possible until this startup time has elapsed. (See “Network
Settings,” in the e-Manual.)
■ If you select <FTP> or <Windows (SMB)>:
① Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Host Name>, then press [OK].
14 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select a server protocol, then press [OK].
② Use the software keyboard to enter the host name.
– <FTP>: Select this protocol if you are sending documents to a computer running Sun Solaris
2.6 or later, Mac OS X, Internet Information
Services 5.0 on Windows 2000 Server, Internet
Information Services 5.1 on Windows XP
Professional, Internet Information Services 6.0 on Windows Server 2003, Internet Information
Services 7.0 on Windows Vista/Server 2008,
Internet Information Services 7.5 under
Windows 7/Server 2008 R2, or Red Hat
Linux 7.2.
–
–
You can enter up to 47 characters (120 characters if <Windows (SMB)> is selected) for the host name.
For information on how to use the software
keyboard, see “Entering Characters,” on p. 1-19.
3-51
Storing/Editing One-Touch
A host name is a unique name assigned to identify each host computer that provides services on the Internet. In this entry box, enter the name of the file server on the network as the destination of the send job.
③ If you are finished, press the right Any key to select <Set>.
–
–
A file path is a series of characters that signify the location of the folder. Specify a folder in the file server as the destination of the send job.
If you are sending to an imageWARE Document
Manager folder, enter the folder name set in imageWARE Gateway (Color imageCLASS
MF9280Cdn only).
⑥ If you are finished, press the right Any key to select <Set>.
④ Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Folder Path>, then press [OK].
⑦ Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<User Name>, then press [OK].
⑤ Use the software keyboard to enter the path to the folder.
⑧ Use the software keyboard to enter the user name.
3-52
–
–
You can enter up to 120 characters for the folder path.
For information on how to use the software
keyboard, see “Entering Characters,” on p. 1-19.
–
–
You can enter up to 24 characters for the user name.
For information on how to use the software
keyboard, see “Entering Characters,” on p. 1-19.
If you are sending to an imageWARE Document
Manager folder, enter the user name set in imageWARE Gateway (Color imageCLASS
MF9280Cdn only).
⑨ If you are finished, press the right Any key to select <Set>.
Storing/Editing One-Touch
If you are sending to an imageWARE Document
Manager folder, enter the password set in imageWARE Gateway (Color imageCLASS
MF9280Cdn only).
⑫ If you are finished, press the right Any key to select <Set>.
⑩ Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Password>, then press [OK].
⑬ Press the right Any key to select <Set>.
⑪ Use the software keyboard to enter the password.
⑭ Press the right Any key to select <Register>.
–
–
You can enter up to 24 characters when
<FTP> is selected as the server protocol, or up to 14 when <Windows (SMB)> is selected.
For information on how to use the software
keyboard, see “Entering Characters,” on p. 1-19.
3-53
3-54
Storing/Editing One-Touch
■ If you select <Windows (SMB): Browse>:
① Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired workgroup, then press [OK].
To enter the user name and the network password, select a file server from the list and press [OK]. Enter the user name (up to 24 character) and network password (up to 14 characters), then press the right Any key to select
<Set>.
④ Specify the folder path, user name, and password as described from steps 5 to 11 in
“If you select <FTP> or <Windows (SMB)>,” on p. 3-51.
⑤ Press the right Any key to select <Set>.
If the desired workgroup is not displayed, use [ ▼ ],
[ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to scroll to the desired workgroup.
② Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired file server, then press [OK].
⑥ Press the right Any key to select <Register>.
If the desired file server is not displayed, use [ ▼ ],
[ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to scroll to the desired file server.
③ Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired file server, then press the right
Any key to select <Set>.
If you want to register another file server address, repeat from step 5.
Storing/Editing One-Touch
15 Press the right Any key to select <Done>.
16 Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
Registering Group Addresses in One-Touch
The Group Address feature enables you to create a group of up to 299 stored destinations (199 for the Color imageCLASS MF9220Cdn) as a single destination.
–
–
–
You cannot register new destinations in a group address. New destinations need to be registered in the Address Book before you can register them as part of a group address.
The types of destinations you can register in a group address are fax numbers, e-mail addresses, I-fax addresses, and file server addresses. You cannot register a group address in a group address.
•
•
•
•
This section describes how to register destinations from the Additional Functions screen. You can also register destinations from the
Select Send Type screen, as follows:
In the Select Send Type screen, press the right Any key to select <One-touch>.
Press the left Any key to select <Reg/Edit/Erase>.
Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Register New Dest. to One-touch>, then press [OK].
Follow the procedure described in this section from step 5.
1 Press (Main Menu).
2 Press the right Any key to select
<Additional Func.>.
3 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Address Book Settings>, then press [OK].
If a password has been set for the Address Book, enter the password to enter Address Book
Settings menu. Enter the password using –
(numeric keys), then press [OK]. (For details about the Address Book password, see “Security,” in the e-Manual.)
3-55
3-56
Storing/Editing One-Touch
4 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Register One-touch>, then press [OK].
8 Use the software keyboard to enter the group name.
5 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the one-touch you want to register, then press [OK].
–
–
You can enter up to 16 characters for the group name.
For information on how to use the software
keyboard, see “Entering Characters,” on p. 1-19.
6 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Group>, then press [OK].
Registered destinations are sorted in the Address
Book by its name, in alphabetical order.
9 If you are finished, press the right Any key to select <Set>.
7 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Register Name>, then press [OK].
10 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Register One-touch Name>, then press
[OK].
11 Use the software keyboard to enter the one-touch name.
Storing/Editing One-Touch
14 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the destination to store in the group address, then press [OK].
12
–
–
You can enter up to 12 characters for the onetouch name.
For information on how to use the software
keyboard, see “Entering Characters,” on p. 1-19.
If you are finished, press the right Any key to select <Set>.
–
–
–
–
To cancel a selected destination, select the destination again and press [OK] to clear the check mark.
Use [ ◀ ] or [ ▶ ] to select the index key (e.g.,
[ABC]) to restrict the display range of entries.
Select [All] to return to the full address list.
If the desired destination is not displayed, use
[ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to scroll to the desired destination.
You can select a destination and press the left
Any key to select <Details> to confirm the detailed information related to the selected destination. Press the right Any key to select
<Done> to return to the previous screen.
13 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Destination Registration>, then press
[OK].
15 Repeat step 14 to select all destinations you want to register in the group address, then press the right Any key to select
<Set>.
3-57
3-58
Storing/Editing One-Touch
16 Press the right Any key to select
<Register>.
If you want to register another group address, repeat from step 5.
17 Press the right Any key to select <Done>.
18 Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
Storing/Editing One-Touch
Checking/Editing Addresses Registered in One-Touch
This section describes the procedure for checking and editing the details of the destinations registered in one-touch.
–
–
–
–
This section describes how to check and edit the details of the destinations from the Additional Functions screen. You can also check and edit the details from the Select Send Type screen, as follows:
–
In the Select Send Type screen, press the right Any key to select <One-touch>.
Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the one-touch you want to check or edit.
Press the left Any key to select <Reg/Edit/Erase>.
Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Confirm/Edit One-touch Dest.>, then press [OK].
Follow the procedure described in this section from step 7.
1 Press (Main Menu).
2 Press the right Any key to select
<Additional Func.>.
3 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Address Book Settings>, then press [OK].
If a password has been set for the Address Book, enter the password to enter Address Book
Settings menu. Enter the password using –
(numeric keys), then press [OK]. (For details about the Address Book password, see “Security,” in the e-Manual.)
3-59
3-60
Storing/Editing One-Touch
4 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Register One-touch>, then press [OK].
7 Check or edit the address details.
■ If you want to check the address details:
① Check the details, then press the right Any key to select <Done>.
5 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the one-touch you want to check or edit, then press [OK].
■ If you want to edit the address details:
① Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the item you want to edit, then press [OK].
–
–
You cannot check or edit multiple one-touch destinations at the same time.
If the desired one-touch is not displayed, use
[ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to scroll to the desired one-touch.
6 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Details/Edit>, then press [OK].
② Confirm that <Edit> is selected, then press
[OK].
③ Edit the address details.
Follow the same procedure as you used when registering destinations.
–
–
–
–
–
For information on how to register fax
numbers, see “Registering Fax Numbers in One-
For information on how to register e-mail
addresses, see “Registering E-Mail Addresses in
For information on how to register I-fax
addresses, see “Registering I-Fax Addresses in
For information on how to register file server
addresses, see “Registering File Server
Addresses in One-Touch,” on p. 3-49.
For information on how to register group
addresses, see “Registering Group Addresses in
④ Press the right Any key to select <Done>.
8 Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
Storing/Editing One-Touch
3-61
Storing/Editing One-Touch
Erasing Addresses Registered in One-Touch
This section describes the procedure for erasing addresses registered in one-touch.
–
–
–
–
This section describes how to erase one-touch destinations from the Additional Functions screen. You can also erase them from the
Select Send Type screen, as follows:
–
In the Select Send Type screen, press the right Any key to select <One-touch>.
Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the one-touch you want to erase.
Press the left Any key to select <Reg/Edit/Erase>.
Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Erase from One-touch>, then press [OK].
Follow the procedure described in this section from step 7.
1 Press (Main Menu).
2 Press the right Any key to select
<Additional Func.>.
4 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Register One-touch>, then press [OK].
3 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Address Book Settings>, then press [OK].
5 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the one-touch you want to erase, then press [OK].
3-62
If a password has been set for the Address Book, enter the password to enter Address Book
Settings menu. Enter the password using –
(numeric keys), then press [OK]. (For details about the Address Book password, see “Security,” in the e-Manual.)
–
–
You cannot erase multiple one-touch destinations at the same time.
If the desired one-touch is not displayed, use
[ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to scroll to the desired one-touch.
6 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Erase>, then press [OK].
7 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Yes>, then press [OK].
If you want to cancel erasing the destination, select <No>.
8 Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
Storing/Editing One-Touch
3-63
3-64
Storing/Editing One-Touch
Copying
Chapter
4
This chapter describes the copying features.
Overview of Copy Functions .......................................4-2
Basic Copying Method ................................................4-4
Canceling Copy Jobs ....................................................4-6
Selecting Color Mode ..................................................4-7
Selecting Paper Source ...............................................4-9
Copying on Paper in Drawers ..........................................4-9
Using Stack Bypass Tray with Standard
Paper Sizes .......................................................................... 4-11
Using Stack Bypass Tray with Irregular
Sizes of Paper ..................................................................... 4-13
Using Stack Bypass Tray with Envelopes .................. 4-15
Adjusting Density ......................................................4-19
Adjusting Base Color ....................................................... 4-21
2-Sided Copying ........................................................4-23
1 to 2-Sided Copying ....................................................... 4-24
2 to 2-Sided Copying ....................................................... 4-26
2 to 1-Sided Copying ....................................................... 4-28
Enlarge/Reduce Images ............................................4-31
Preset Zoom........................................................................ 4-31
Custom Copy Ratio........................................................... 4-33
Selecting Image Quality ............................................4-35
Multiple Originals onto One Sheet (N on 1).............4-37
Making ID Card Copies ..............................................4-40
Adjusting Sharpness .................................................4-42
Erasing Shadows/Lines .............................................4-44
Original Frame Erase ........................................................ 4-45
Book Frame Erase ............................................................. 4-48
Binding Erase ...................................................................... 4-51
Adjusting Color Balance ............................................4-54
Registering Color Balance .............................................. 4-56
Recalling Registered Color Balance ............................ 4-58
Deleting Color Balance ................................................... 4-59
Collating Copies .........................................................4-60
Making Multiple Copies ............................................4-62
Checking Current Settings ........................................4-63
Frequently Used Settings (Mode Memory) .............4-64
Registering Mode Memory ........................................... 4-64
Recalling Mode Memory ................................................ 4-66
Checking Mode Memory ............................................... 4-67
Deleting Mode Memory ................................................. 4-68
Changing Standard Mode .........................................4-69
Initializing Standard Mode .......................................4-71
Checking and Canceling Copy Jobs/Checking Copy
Logs ............................................................................4-72
Checking Copy Jobs ........................................................ 4-72
Canceling Copy Jobs ....................................................... 4-73
Checking Copy Logs ........................................................ 4-74
4-1
Overview of Copy Functions
Overview of Copy Functions
In addition to the enlarging/reducing the copy, you can make 2-sided copies or use the N on
1 mode, which reduces multiple originals to fit on one sheet of paper.
4-2
Overview of Copy Functions
4-3
Basic Copying Method
Basic Copying Method
This section describes the basic procedure for copying.
1 Place originals on the platen glass or load it them in the feeder.
2
3
Press
Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲
(Main Menu).
] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Copy>, then press [OK].
4-4
–
–
–
–
–
For details, see “Placing Originals,” on p. 2-4.
Close the feeder after placing your originals.
For originals you can copy, see “Originals
When the display shows the message <Enter the Dept. ID and password using the numeric keys.>, enter the department ID and password. Then press (Log In/Out) on the control panel. For details, see “Security” in the e-Manual.
• When <Allow Black Copy Jobs> in <System
Management Set.> from the Additional
Functions screen is set to <On>, you can make black and white copies without entering <Dept. ID> and <Password>. (For details, see “Accepting B&W Copy Jobs without Entering the Department ID and
Password,” in the e-Manual.) To make black and white copies, press the right Any key to select <Black Copy>.
When the display shows the message <Enter
User ID and password.>, enter the user ID and password. Then press (Log In/Out) on the control panel. For details, see “Security” in the e-Manual.
4 Make the copy settings you require.
You can specify the following settings:
– <Color Mode Settings>: Specifies the color or
B&W. (See “Selecting Color Mode,” on p. 4-7.)
– <Paper Source Settings>: Specifies the paper
source. (See “Selecting Paper Source,” on p. 4-9.)
–
–
<Density/Background Rem. Set.>: Adjusts the density and the background color of originals.
(See “Adjusting Density,” on p. 4-19.)
<Various 2-Sided Settings>: Makes two-sided
copies. (See “2-Sided Copying,” on p. 4-23.)
–
–
<Copy Ratio Settings>: Adjusts the size by enlarging/reducing original images. (See
“Enlarge/Reduce Images,” on p. 4-31.)
<Original Image Quality Settings>: Specifies
the image type of originals. (See “Selecting
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
<Copy Multiple Pages onto 1 Page>: Reduces multiple originals to fit on one sheet of paper.
(See “Multiple Originals onto One Sheet (N on
<Sharpness Settings>: Adjusts the contrast of
the originals. (See “Adjusting Sharpness,” on p. 4-42.)
<Shadow/Frame Erase Settings>: Erases
unnecessary shadows and lines. (See “Erasing
<Color Adjustment>: Adjusts the color
balance for the copy. (See “Adjusting Color
<Finishing Settings>: Sorts copies into sets.
(See “Collating Copies,” on p. 4-60.)
<ID Card Copy Settings>: Makes ID card
copies. (See “Making ID Card Copies,” on p. 4-40.)
<Number of Copies Settings>: Makes multiple
copies. (See “Making Multiple Copies,” on p. 4-62.)
When you press (Reset), all settings will return to the Standard mode. If you want to keep your own settings as the Standard
mode, see “Changing Standard Mode,” on p. 4-69.
5 Use – (numeric keys) to enter the desired copy quantity (1 to 99).
Basic Copying Method
6 Press (Start) to start copying.
– When scanning is complete, remove your originals.
You cannot change copy mode settings, such as the copy quantity, paper size, and copy ratio, while the machine is copying.
–
–
–
–
If you want to cancel a copy job, see
“Canceling Copy Jobs,” on p. 4-6, or “Checking and Canceling Copy Jobs/Checking Copy
To cancel all settings and return the machine to the Standard mode, press (Reset).
If the machine remains idle for more than two minutes, the display returns to the Main Menu screen (Auto Clear Time). You can change the value of time for the Auto Clear Time. For
details, see “Setting Auto Clear Time,” on p. 1-23.
If you want to make another copy when there is an ongoing job, press the right Any key to select <Done>. Then repeat from the step 1.
7 Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
If you make a mistake when entering values, press (Clear) and enter the correct values. The copy quantity appears on the right side of the
Copy top screen.
You cannot change the copy quantity while the machine is copying.
4-5
4-6
Canceling Copy Jobs
Canceling Copy Jobs
You can cancel scanning or ongoing jobs.
If you cancel a copy job during scanning, make sure to remove the original.
1 Press the left Any key to select <Cancel>.
The display will return to the Copy top screen.
While the machine is scanning, printing, or waiting to print, you can cancel a copy job by pressing (Stop).
2 Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
Selecting Color Mode
Selecting Color Mode
This section describes how to select the color mode (color/B&W).
The default setting is <Auto-color Select>.
1 Set originals.
4 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ press [OK].
] or (Scroll Wheel) to display <Color Mode Settings>, then
For details, see “Placing Originals,” on p. 2-4.
2 Press (Main Menu).
3 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Copy>, then press [OK].
5 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the color mode, then press [OK].
–
–
–
<Auto-color Select>: For the automatic selection of color or B&W*
<Color>: For copies in full-color
<Black>: For black and white copies
* Depending on the condition of the originals, the machine may not be able to properly distinguish between color and black-andwhite originals.
4-7
4-8
Selecting Color Mode
6 Use – (numeric keys) to enter the desired copy quantity (1 to 99).
7 Press (Start).
If you want to copy multiple originals using the platen glass, set an original and press (Start) once for each page.
8 Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
Selecting Paper Source
Selecting Paper Source
You can manually specify a paper source.
The default setting is <Drawer 1: LTR>.
–
–
If you are copying an original with an image that extends all the way to the edges onto the same size paper at a copy ratio
The suffix <R> (such as in STMTR), used in paper size designations, indicates that the paper is loaded in a paper drawer or the stack bypass tray horizontally.
Copying on Paper in Drawers
You can select paper drawer 1 or 2 (optional) for a copy. You need to set up the paper size and type for each
1 Set originals.
3 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Copy>, then press [OK].
For details, see “Placing Originals,” on p. 2-4.
2 Press (Main Menu).
4 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to display <Paper Source Settings>, then press [OK].
4-9
4-10
Selecting Paper Source
5 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired paper source, then press [OK].
6 Use – (numeric keys) to enter the desired copy quantity (1 to 99).
7 Press (Start).
If you want to copy multiple originals using the platen glass, set an original and press (Start) once for each page.
8 Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
Using Stack Bypass Tray with Standard Paper Sizes
This section describes how to copy onto standard-sized paper using the stack bypass tray.
Selecting Paper Source
If <Stack Bypass Paper (Std.)> setting in <Paper Settings> from the Additional Functions screen is set to <Off>, the paper size/type setting screen appears when you load paper in the stack bypass tray. If <Stack Bypass Paper (Std.)> is set to <On>, copying can be
1 Set originals.
4 Load the paper into the stack bypass tray.
For details, see “Placing Originals,” on p. 2-4.
2 Press (Main Menu).
3 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Copy>, then press [OK].
5 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired paper size, then press [OK].
You can select from the following paper sizes:
<LTR>, <LGL>, <STMT>, <EXEC>, <FLSC>,
<OFI>, <B-OFI>, <M-OFI>, <G-LTR>, <G-LGL>
For details, see “Paper Requirements,” on p. 2-7.
The available paper sizes will vary depending on the country where the unit was purchased.
4-11
4-12
Selecting Paper Source
6 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired paper type, then press [OK].
9 Press (Start).
You can select from the following paper types:
<Plain 1>, <Plain 2>, <Recycled Paper>,
<Color>, <Bond>, <Heavy 1>, <Heavy 2>,
<Transparencies>, <Labels>
For details, see “Paper Requirements,” on p. 2-7.
If you want to copy multiple originals using the platen glass, set an original and press (Start) once for each page.
10 Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
If you want to print the back side of the printed paper, press the right Any key to select <2nd of 2-
Sided>.
7 Press [OK] to select <Stack Bypass:>.
The selected paper size is displayed next to
<Stack Bypass:>.
8 Use – (numeric keys) to enter the desired copy quantity (1 to 99).
Selecting Paper Source
Using Stack Bypass Tray with Irregular Sizes of Paper
This section describes how to copy onto non-standard-sized paper using the stack bypass tray.
If <Stack Bypass Paper (Std.)> setting in <Paper Settings> from the Additional Functions screen is set to <Off>, the paper size/type setting screen appears when you load paper in the stack bypass tray. If <Stack Bypass Paper (Std.)> is set to <On>, copying can be
1 Set originals.
4 Load the paper into the stack bypass tray.
For details, see “Placing Originals,” on p. 2-4.
2 Press (Main Menu).
3 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Copy>, then press [OK].
5 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Custom Size>, then press [OK].
6 Press [OK] to select the horizontal length
<X>.
4-13
Selecting Paper Source
7 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to specify the length of X, then press [OK].
10 Use [ ▼ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Set Size>, then press [OK].
4-14
You can adjust values for <X> between 3”
(76 mm) and 8 1/2” (216 mm).
8 Use [ ▼ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the vertical length <Y>, then press [OK].
11 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired paper type, then press [OK].
You can select from the following paper types:
<Plain 1>, <Plain 2>, <Recycled Paper>,
<Color>, <Bond>, <Heavy 1>, <Heavy 2>,
<Labels>, <Envelope>
For details, see “Paper Requirements,” on p. 2-7.
9 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to specify the length of Y, then press [OK].
If you want to print the back side of the printed paper, press the right Any key to select <2nd of 2-
Sided>.
12 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Stack Bypass: Custom Size>, then press
[OK].
You can adjust values for <Y> between 5”
(127 mm) and 14” (356 mm).
13 Use – (numeric keys) to enter the desired copy quantity (1 to 99).
14 Press (Start).
Selecting Paper Source
If you want to copy multiple originals using the platen glass, set an original and press (Start) once for each page.
15 Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
Using Stack Bypass Tray with Envelopes
This section describes how to copy onto envelopes using the stack bypass tray.
If <Stack Bypass Paper (Std.)> setting in <Paper Settings> from the Additional Functions screen is set to <Off>, the paper size/type setting screen appears when you load paper in the stack bypass tray. If <Stack Bypass Paper (Std.)> is set to <On>, copying can be
1 Set originals.
3 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Copy>, then press [OK].
For details, see “Placing Originals,” on p. 2-4.
2 Press (Main Menu).
4-15
Selecting Paper Source
4 Load envelopes into the stack bypass.
7 Press (Start).
For details, see “In the Stack Bypass Tray,” on p. 2-16.
5 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired size of envelopes, then press
[OK].
8 Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
4-16
You can select from the following sizes of envelopes:
<COM10>, <Monarch>, <DL>, <ISO-C5>, <ISO-
B5>
For details, see “Paper Requirements,” on p. 2-7.
6 Press [OK] to select <Stack Bypass:>.
The selected paper size is displayed next to
<Stack Bypass:>.
Selecting Paper Source
Recalling Irregular Paper Size Registered for the Stack Bypass Tray
You can easily set the frequently used irregular paper size for the paper loaded in the stack
bypass tray by recalling the pre-registered paper size. For details, see “Registering Irregular
Paper Sizes for the Stack Bypass Tray,” on p. 2-26.
1 Set originals.
4 Load the paper into the stack bypass tray.
For details, see “Placing Originals,” on p. 2-4.
2 Press (Main Menu).
3 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Copy>, then press [OK].
5 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Custom Size>, then press [OK].
6 Press the right Any key to select <Recall/
Register>.
4-17
Selecting Paper Source
7 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Size 1> or <Size 2>, then press [OK].
If you want to print the back side of the printed paper, press the right Any key to select <2nd of 2-
Sided>.
10 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Stack Bypass: Custom Size>, then press
[OK].
8 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Set Size>, then press [OK].
4-18
Make sure that the recalled paper size is the same as the actual size of the paper you loaded in the stack bypass tray in step 4. If not, set the
correct paper size. (See “Using Stack Bypass Tray with Irregular Sizes of Paper,” on p. 4-13.)
9 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the paper type, then press [OK].
11 Use – (numeric keys) to enter the desired copy quantity (1 to 99).
12 Press (Start).
You can select the paper type from the following:
<Plain 1>, <Plain 2>, <Recycled Paper>,
<Color>, <Bond>, <Heavy 1>, <Heavy 2>,
<Labels>, <Envelope>
For details, see “Paper Requirements,”on p. 2-7.
If you want to copy multiple originals using the platen glass, set an original and press (Start) once for each page.
13 Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
Adjusting Density
Adjusting Density
You can manually adjust the copy exposure to the most appropriate level for the original.
The copy tone becomes lighter as the indicator moves to the left, and darker as it moves to the right.
The default setting is <0>.
1 Set originals.
3 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Copy>, then press [OK].
For details, see “Placing Originals,” on p. 2-4.
2 Press (Main Menu).
4 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to display <Density/Background Rem. Set.>, then press [OK].
4-19
Adjusting Density
5 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ], [ ◀ ], [ ▶ ], or (Scroll
Wheel) to adjust the copy density, then press [OK].
–
–
To make dark originals lighter, move the density scale to the left.
To make light originals darker, move the density scale to the right.
6 Use – (numeric keys) to enter the desired copy quantity (1 to 99).
7 Press (Start).
4-20
If you want to copy multiple originals using the platen glass, set an original and press (Start) once for each page.
8 Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
Adjusting Density
Adjusting Base Color
This mode enables you to adjust or remove the base color of the originals.
The default setting is <Off>.
1 Set originals.
5 Press the right Any key to select
<Background>.
For details, see “Placing Originals,” on p. 2-4.
2 Press (Main Menu).
3 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Copy>, then press [OK].
6 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the background setting, then press [OK].
■ If you select <Background Removal>:
① Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Background Removal>, then press [OK].
4 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to display <Density/Background Rem. Set.>, then press [OK].
② Press [OK], then skip to step 7.
4-21
4-22
Adjusting Density
■ If you select <Background Fine Adjust.>:
① Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Background Fine Adjust.>, then press [OK].
7 Use – (numeric keys) to enter the desired copy quantity (1 to 99).
② Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired color, then press [OK].
8 Press (Start).
③ Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ], [ ◀ ], [ ▶ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to adjust the strength of the color, then press [OK].
If you want to copy multiple originals using the platen glass, set an original and press (Start) once for each page.
9 Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
④ Press the right Any key to select <Set>, then press [OK].
2-Sided Copying
2-Sided Copying
This mode enables you to make two-sided copies from one-sided or two-sided originals, or make one-sided copies from two-sided originals. This enables you to cut print costs in half when copying in large quantities.
The default setting is <Off>.
–
–
–
When you use the feeder to make two-sided copies from two-sided originals or one-sided copies from two-sided originals, the original size must be LTR, LGL, FLSC, or A4.
For the paper size that can be used for the 2-sided copying, see the following: e-Manual > “Print” > “Printer Settings from the Machine” > “Settings Menu” > “2-Sided”
(The same paper size can be used for the 2-sided copying and 2-sided printing.)
2-Sided modes cannot be used with the ID Card Copy mode.
4-23
4-24
2-Sided Copying
1 to 2-Sided Copying
1 Set originals.
5 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<1-Sided to 2-Sided>.
For details, see “Placing Originals,” on p. 2-4.
2 Press (Main Menu).
3 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Copy>, then press [OK].
If there are odd number of originals when the 1-
Sided to 2-Sided mode is used, the back side of the last copy is left blank.
6 Press the right Any key to select <Layout
Settings>.
4 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to display <Various 2-Sided Settings>, then press [OK].
7 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Vertical Original> or <Horizontal
Original>, then press [OK].
8 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Book Type Copy> or <Calendar Type
Copy>, then press [OK].
2-Sided Copying
12 Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
–
–
<Book Type Copy>: The front and back sides of the copy will have the same top-bottom orientation.
<Calendar Type Copy>: The front and back sides of the copy will have the opposite topbottom orientation.
9 Press [OK].
10 Use – (numeric keys) to enter the desired copy quantity (1 to 99).
11 Press (Start).
If you want to copy multiple originals using the platen glass, set an original and press (Start) once for each page. After scanning all originals, press the right Any key to select <Done>.
4-25
4-26
2-Sided Copying
2 to 2-Sided Copying
When you use the feeder to make two-sided copies from two-sided originals, the original size must be LTR, LGL, FLSC, or A4.
1 Set originals.
4 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ press [OK].
] or (Scroll Wheel) to display <Various 2-Sided Settings>, then
For details, see “Placing Originals,” on p. 2-4.
2 Press (Main Menu).
3 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Copy>, then press [OK].
5 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<2-Sided to 2-Sided>, then press [OK].
6 Press the right Any key to select <Layout
Settings>.
7 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Vertical Original> or <Horizontal
Original>, then press [OK].
2-Sided Copying
9 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Book Type Copy> or <Calendar Type
Copy>, then press [OK].
8 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Book Type Original> or <Calendar Type
Original> for the original layout, then press [OK].
–
–
<Book Type Copy>: The front and back sides of the copy will have the same top-bottom orientation.
<Calendar Type Copy>: The front and back sides of the copy will have the opposite topbottom orientation.
10 Press [OK].
–
–
<Book Type Original>: The front and back sides of the original will have the same topbottom orientation.
<Calendar Type Original>: The front and back sides of the original will have the opposite top-bottom orientation.
11 Use – (numeric keys) to enter the desired copy quantity (1 to 99).
4-27
4-28
2-Sided Copying
12 Press (Start).
13 Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
If you want to copy multiple originals using the platen glass, set an original and press (Start) once for each page. After scanning all originals, press the right Any key to select <Done>.
2 to 1-Sided Copying
When you use the feeder to make one-sided copies from two-sided originals, the original size must be LTR, LGL, FLSC, or A4.
1 Set originals.
3 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Copy>, then press [OK].
For details, see “Placing Originals,” on p. 2-4.
2 Press (Main Menu).
4 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to display <Various 2-Sided Settings>, then press [OK].
5 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<2-Sided to 1-Sided>.
2-Sided Copying
8 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Book Type Original> or <Calendar Type
Original> for the original layout, then press [OK].
6 Press the right Any key to select <Layout
Settings>.
–
–
<Book Type Original>: The front and back sides of the original will have the same topbottom orientation.
<Calendar Type Original>: The front and back sides of the original will have the opposite top-bottom orientation.
9 Press [OK].
7 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Vertical Original> or <Horizontal
Original>, then press [OK].
10 Use – (numeric keys) to enter the desired copy quantity (1 to 99).
4-29
4-30
2-Sided Copying
11 Press (Start).
If you want to copy multiple originals using the platen glass, set an original and press (Start) once for each page. After scanning all originals, press the right Any key to select <Done>.
12 Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
Enlarge/Reduce Images
Enlarge/Reduce Images
You can convert a standard-sized original to a different standard-sized copy (preset zoom), or you can also enlarge or reduce images in 1% increments (custom copy ratio).
The default setting is <100% 1:1>.
Preset Zoom
You can enlarge or reduce originals from one standard paper size to another.
1 Set originals.
3 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Copy>, then press [OK].
For details, see “Placing Originals,” on p. 2-4.
2 Press (Main Menu).
4-31
4-32
Enlarge/Reduce Images
4 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to display <Copy Ratio Settings>, then press
[OK].
6 Use – (numeric keys) to enter the desired copy quantity (1 to 99).
5 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the zoom ratio, then press [OK].
7 Press (Start).
–
–
You can select the preset zoom from the following:
– <100% Direct>
– <200% Maximum>
–
–
<129% STMT ▶ LTR>
<78% LGL ▶ LTR>
<64% LTR ▶ STMT>
<50% Minimum>
If you want to specify the other copy ratio, see
“Custom Copy Ratio,” on p. 4-33.
If you want to copy multiple originals using the platen glass, set an original and press (Start) once for each page.
8 Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
Enlarge/Reduce Images
Custom Copy Ratio
You can reduce or enlarge images by any copy ratio in 1% increments. The available copy ratios are from 50% to 200%.
1 Set originals.
5 Use [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Custom Copy Ratio>, then press [OK].
For details, see “Placing Originals,” on p. 2-4.
2 Press (Main Menu).
3 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Copy>, then press [OK].
6 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to adjust the zoom ratio in 1% increments, then press [OK].
4 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to display <Copy Ratio Settings>, then press
[OK].
If you enter a value outside the setting range, a message prompting you to enter an appropriate value appears on the screen.
7 Use – (numeric keys) to enter the desired copy quantity (1 to 99).
4-33
4-34
Enlarge/Reduce Images
8 Press (Start).
If you want to copy multiple originals using the platen glass, set an original and press (Start) once for each page.
9 Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
Selecting Image Quality
Selecting Image Quality
You can adjust the image quality of copies according to the types of originals. A correct selection is necessary for the optimal reproduction of the colors of the original.
The default setting is <Text/Photo/Map>.
–
–
Combinations of these four modes (Text/Photo/Map, Printed Image, Photo, and Text) cannot be selected at the same time. If you select one of these modes, the previously set mode is canceled.
If the original is a transparency, select the original type, then adjust the exposure to the most appropriate level for the original.
1 Set originals.
3 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Copy>, then press [OK].
For details, see “Placing Originals,” on p. 2-4.
2 Press (Main Menu).
4-35
4-36
Selecting Image Quality
4 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to display <Original Image Quality
Settings>, then press [OK].
6 Use – (numeric keys) to enter the desired copy quantity (1 to 99).
5 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the image quality, then press [OK].
7 Press (Start).
– <Text/Photo/Map>: For originals that contain text, photos, and maps
If you want to copy multiple originals using the platen glass, set an original and press (Start) once for each page.
8 Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
If you select <Text/Photo/Map>, you can set priority on <Text> or <Photo>. Press the right Any key to select <Priority Level>, then use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ],
[ ◀ ], [ ▶ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to adjust the priority revel.
–
–
–
<Printed Image>: For originals that contain dot photos such as magazines
<Photo>: For photo paper originals such as photos
<Text>: For originals that contain only text
Multiple Originals onto One Sheet (N on 1)
Multiple Originals onto One Sheet (N on 1)
This mode enables you to reduce multiple originals to fit on one sheet of paper (one-sided/ two-sided). You can make well-organized copies by copying multiple originals onto one sheet. This mode enables you to cut print costs by saving copy paper, and it is also useful for saving space.
The default setting is <Off>.
–
–
The N on 1 mode cannot be used with the ID Card Copy, Original Frame Erase mode, Book Frame Erase, or Binding Erase
mode. For details about the erase mode, see “Erasing Shadows/Lines,” on p. 4-44.
The reduction ratio is automatically set so that the originals fit onto the selected paper size.
4-37
4-38
Multiple Originals onto One Sheet (N on 1)
1 Set originals.
4 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to display <Copy Multiple Pages onto 1
Page>, then press [OK].
For details, see “Placing Originals,” on p. 2-4.
When placing horizontal (landscape) originals into the feeder in the 2 on 1 mode, place the originals bottom side up.
2 Press (Main Menu).
3 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Copy>, then press [OK].
5 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the combination type, then press [OK].
– <2 On 1>: This setting reduces two 1-sided originals or one 2-sided original to fit onto one side or both sides of the copy sheet.
– <4 On 1>: This setting reduces four 1-sided or two 2-sided originals to fit onto one side or both sides of the copy sheet.
If you select <4 On 1>, you can specify the copy layout. Press the right Any key to select
<Option>, then select the desired layout type.
6 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the original size, then press [OK].
Multiple Originals onto One Sheet (N on 1)
8 Use – (numeric keys) to enter the desired copy quantity (1 to 99).
To switch to the A/B Sizes, press the left Any key to select <A/B Sizes>.
7 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the paper source, then press [OK].
9 Press (Start).
If you want to copy multiple originals using the platen glass, set an original and press (Start) once for each page. After scanning all originals, press the right Any key to select <Done>.
10 Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
If you select <Stack Bypass Tray>, specify the paper size and type.
–
–
If you want to make two-sided copies of N on
1, see “2-Sided Copying,” on p. 4-23.
If you want to make N on 1 copies from twosided originals, select <2-Sided to 1-Sided> in
the two-sided settings. For details, see “2-Sided
4-39
Making ID Card Copies
Making ID Card Copies
This mode enables you to copy the both sides of an ID card on one side of paper at actual size.
4-40
–
–
–
– The ID Card Copy mode can be combined with the Color Mode, Density/Background Rem., Original Image Quality,
Collate, Copies, or Sharpness settings. Other setting combinations are not available.
Place the ID card on the platen glass when using this function. Make sure that no originals are placed in the feeder.
The zoom ratio is automatically set to 100% with this mode. You cannot change the copy ratio.
The ID Card Copy mode can be used with LTR or A4 paper.
1 Place the ID card on the platen glass as illustrated.
Place the ID card on the middle of the left side of the platen glass.
3 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Copy>, then press [OK].
4 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to display <ID Card Copy Settings>, then press [OK].
2 Press (Main Menu).
5 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<On>, then press [OK].
6 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the paper source, then press [OK].
Making ID Card Copies
–
–
You can adjust the copy density and base color by pressing [OK] to proceed to the
Density setting display. After the settings are complete, press [OK] to return to the previous display. For details on density and base color
settings, see “Adjusting Density,” on p. 4-19.
Proceed to step 9 if density and base color adjustment is not necessary.
9 To scan one side of the ID card, press
(Start).
10 To scan the other side, turn the ID card and place it on the platen glass, then press (Start).
7 Use – (numeric keys) to enter the desired copy quantity (1 to 99).
You can adjust the copy density and base color as indicated in step 8 to scan the other side of the ID card.
8 Press (Start).
11 Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
4-41
4-42
Adjusting Sharpness
Adjusting Sharpness
You can set the sharpness of the copied image. If you want to copy text and lines more clearly, move the sharpness scale to the right. If you want to copy a halftone original such as a picture, move the sharpness scale to the left.
The default setting is <0>.
1 Set originals.
4 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to display <Sharpness Settings>, then press
[OK].
For details, see “Placing Originals,” on p. 2-4.
2 Press (Main Menu).
3 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Copy>, then press [OK].
5 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ], [ ◀ ], [ ▶ ] or (Scroll
Wheel) to adjust the sharpness, then press [OK].
–
–
To make copies of printed images or other halftones, move the sharpness scale to the left.
To make copies of blueprints or faint pencildrawn images, move the sharpness scale to the right.
6 Use – (numeric keys) to enter the desired copy quantity (1 to 99).
7 Press (Start).
If you want to copy multiple originals using the platen glass, set an original and press (Start) once for each page.
8 Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
Adjusting Sharpness
4-43
Erasing Shadows/Lines
Erasing Shadows/Lines
This mode enables you to erase shadows and lines that appear when using various types of originals. The following three Frame Erase modes are available: Original Frame Erase, Book
Frame Erase, and Binding Erase.
The default setting is <Off>.
4-44
–
–
Combinations of the three Frame Erase modes cannot be set. If you select one of these modes, the previously set mode is canceled.
Frame Erase modes cannot be used with the ID Card Copy mode.
Erasing Shadows/Lines
Original Frame Erase
This mode erases the dark borders and frame lines that appear around the copy if the original is smaller than the selected paper size. You can also use this mode to create a blank border around the edge of the copy.
The Original Frame Erase mode cannot be used with the N on 1 mode.
1 Set originals.
4 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to display <Shadow/Frame Erase Settings>, then press [OK].
For details, see “Placing Originals,” on p. 2-4.
2 Press (Main Menu).
3 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Copy>, then press [OK].
5 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Original Frame Erase>, then press [OK].
4-45
Erasing Shadows/Lines
6 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the original size, then press [OK].
■ If you want to set the top, left, right, and bottom widths independently:
① Press the right Any key to select <Adj. Each
Dim.>.
4-46
To switch to the A/B Sizes, press the left Any key to select <A/B Sizes>.
■ If you want to set the same width for all four borders:
① Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to enter a frame erase width value, then press [OK].
② Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired frame erase borders, then press
[OK].
To enter values in millimeters, press the left Any key to select <Enter mm>. When entering the value in millimeters, you can also use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ],
(Scroll Wheel), and – (numeric keys).
–
–
–
–
The default setting is <3/16" (6 mm)>. The maximum original frame erase width that you can set is <1 15/16" (50 mm)>.
To enter values in millimeters, press the left Any key to select <Enter mm>. When entering the value in millimeters, you can also use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ],
(Scroll Wheel), and – (numeric keys).
If you want to change the value, press
(Clear) before entering the new value.
If you enter a value outside the setting range, a message prompting you to enter an appropriate value appears on the screen.
③ Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to enter a frame erase width value, then press [OK].
Erasing Shadows/Lines
7 Use – (numeric keys) to enter the desired copy quantity (1 to 99).
–
–
–
The default setting is <3/16" (6 mm)>. The maximum original frame erase width that you can set is <1 15/16" (50 mm)>.
If you want to change the value, press
(Clear) before entering the new value.
If you enter a value outside the setting range, a message prompting you to enter an appropriate value appears on the screen.
④ Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Apply Settings>, then press [OK].
8 Press (Start).
If you want to copy multiple originals using the platen glass, set an original and press (Start) once for each page.
9 Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
The display will return to the Copy top screen.
4-47
4-48
Erasing Shadows/Lines
Book Frame Erase
This mode erases the dark borders and the center and contour lines that appear when you copy facing pages in a book or bound original onto a single sheet of paper.
–
–
The Book Frame Erase mode cannot be used with the N on 1.
You must place an original on the platen glass when using this function.
1 Set an original on the platen glass.
4 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to display <Shadow/Frame Erase Settings>, then press [OK].
For details, see “Placing Originals,” on p. 2-4.
2 Press (Main Menu).
3 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Copy>, then press [OK].
5 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Book Frame Erase>, then press [OK].
6 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the original size, then press [OK].
Erasing Shadows/Lines
② Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to enter a frame erase width value, then press [OK].
To switch to the A/B Sizes, press the left Any key to select <A/B Sizes>.
7 Enter the each erase width value:
■ If you want to specify the erase width value for center:
① Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Center>, then press [OK] .
–
–
–
–
The default setting is <3/8" (10 mm)>. The maximum original frame erase width that you can set is <1 15/16" (50 mm)>.
When entering the value in millimeters, you can also use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ], (Scroll Wheel), or
– (numeric keys).
If you want to change the value, press
(Clear) before entering the new value.
If you enter a value outside the setting range, a message prompting you to enter an appropriate value appears on the screen.
■ If you want to specify the erase width value for all sides:
① Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<All Sides>, then press [OK].
To enter values in millimeters, press the left Any key to select <Enter mm>.
4-49
4-50
Erasing Shadows/Lines
② Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to enter a frame erase width value, then press [OK].
10 Press (Start).
The default setting is <3/16" (6 mm)>. The maximum original frame erase width that you can set is <1 15/16" (50 mm)>.
8 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Apply Settings>, then press [OK].
If you want to copy multiple originals using the platen glass, set an original and press (Start) once for each page.
11 Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
9 Use – (numeric keys) to enter the desired copy quantity (1 to 99).
Erasing Shadows/Lines
Binding Erase
This mode erases the shadows that appear on copies from binding holes on originals.
–
–
–
Do not place originals with binding holes into the feeder, as this may damage the originals.
The borders you do not select are attenuated when using this function.
You must place an original on the platen glass when using this function.
1 Set an original on the platen glass.
4 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to display <Shadow/Frame Erase Settings>, then press [OK].
For details, see “Placing Originals,” on p. 2-4.
2 Press (Main Menu).
3 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Copy>, then press [OK].
5 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Binding Erase>, then press [OK].
4-51
4-52
Erasing Shadows/Lines
6 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the original size, then press [OK].
8 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the frame erase width, then press [OK].
To switch to the inch sizes, press the left Any key to select <A/B Sizes>.
7 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the hole punch location, then press [OK].
–
–
–
–
The default setting is <3/4" (18 mm)>. The maximum original frame erase width that you can set is <13/16" (20 mm)>.
If you want to change the value, press
(Clear) before entering the new value.
If you enter a value outside the setting range, a message prompting you to enter an appropriate value appears on the screen.
When entering the value in millimeters, you can also use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ], (Scroll Wheel), or
– (numeric keys).
9 Use – (numeric keys) to enter the desired copy quantity (1 to 99).
To enter values in millimeters, press the left Any key to select <Enter mm>.
10 Press (Start).
If you want to copy multiple originals using the platen glass, set an original and press (Start) once for each page.
11 Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
Erasing Shadows/Lines
4-53
4-54
Adjusting Color Balance
Adjusting Color Balance
This mode enables you to adjust the color balance depending on the color of the originals.
The adjusted color balance can be stored and named so that you can use them repeatedly.
1 Set documents.
4 Use [
[OK].
▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to display <Color Adjustment>, then press
For details, see “Placing Originals,” on p. 2-4.
2 Press (Main Menu).
3 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Copy>, then press [OK].
5 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired color, then press [OK].
6 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ], [ ◀ ], [ ▶ ] or (Scroll
Wheel) to adjust the strength of each color then, press [OK].
9 Press (Start).
Adjusting Color Balance
–
–
To weaken the selected color, move the adjust scale to the left.
To heighten the selected color, move the adjust scale to the right.
7 Press the left Any key to select <Set>.
If you want to copy multiple originals using the platen glass, set an original and press (Start) once for each page.
10 Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
8 Use – (numeric keys) to enter the desired copy quantity (1 to 99).
4-55
4-56
Adjusting Color Balance
Registering Color Balance
This section describes how to register the color balance setting. Up to four different settings can be stored.
1 Press (Main Menu).
2 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Copy>, then press [OK].
5 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ], [ ◀ ], [ ▶ ] or (Scroll
Wheel) to adjust the strength of each color, then press [OK].
3 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to display <Color Adjustment>, then press
[OK].
–
–
To weaken the selected color, move the adjust scale to the left.
To heighten the selected color, move the adjust scale to the right.
6 Press the right Any key to select <Recall/
Register>.
4 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired color, then press [OK].
7 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the memory key that you want to store the color balance setting under, then press the right Any key to select
<Register/Erase>.
Adjusting Color Balance
② Use the software keyboard to enter a name, then press the right Any key to select
<Set>.
8 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Register Settings>.
–
–
You can enter up to 10 characters for the name.
For information on using the software
keyboard, see “Entering Characters,” on p. 1-19.
9 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel)
to select <Yes>, then press [OK].
■ If you want to name the color balance setting:
① Use [ ▼ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Register Name>, then press [OK].
10 Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
4-57
4-58
Adjusting Color Balance
Recalling Registered Color Balance
This section describes how to recall registered Color Balance.
1 Press (Main Menu).
2 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Copy>, then press [OK].
5 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired memory key, then press [OK].
3 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to display <Color Adjustment>, then press
[OK].
6 Press the left Any key to select <Set>.
4 Press the right Any key to select <Recall/
Register>.
7 Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
Adjusting Color Balance
Deleting Color Balance
This section describes how to delete the color balance setting.
1 Press (Main Menu).
2 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Copy>, then press [OK].
5 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the memory key that you want to delete, then press the right Any key to select
<Register/Erase>.
3 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to display <Color Adjustment>, then press
[OK].
6 Use [ ▼ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Erase>, then press [OK].
4 Press the right Any key to select <Recall/
Register>.
7 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Yes>, then press [OK].
8 Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
4-59
4-60
Collating Copies
Collating Copies
You can sort copies into sets arranged in page order. This function is useful when making handouts for meetings.
The default setting is <Off>.
1 Set originals.
Collating Copies
5 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<On>, then press [OK].
For details, see “Placing Originals,” on p. 2-4.
2 Press (Main Menu).
3 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Copy>, then press [OK].
6 Use – (numeric keys) to enter the desired copy quantity (1 to 99).
7 Press (Start).
4 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select display <Finishing Settings>, then press
[OK].
If you want to copy multiple originals using the platen glass, set an original and press (Start) once for each page.
8 Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
4-61
Making Multiple Copies
Making Multiple Copies
This section describes how to make multiple copies.
1 Set documents.
4 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to display <Number of Copies Settings>, then press [OK].
4-62
For details, see “Placing Originals,” on p. 2-4.
2 Press (Main Menu).
3 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Copy>, then press [OK].
5 Use – (numeric keys), [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or
(Scroll Wheel) to enter the desired copy quantity (1 to 99), then press [OK].
6 Press (Start).
If you want to copy multiple originals using the platen glass, set an original and press (Start) once for each page.
7 Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
Checking Current Settings
Checking Current Settings
1
This section describes how to visually confirm the settings selected for the copy.
Press (Main Menu).
2 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Copy>, then press [OK].
4 Check the current settings, then press the right Any key to select <Done>.
3 Press the right Any key to select <Preview
Img.>.
Actual scanned image of the original will not be displayed.
5 Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
4-63
4-64
Frequently Used Settings (Mode Memory)
Frequently Used Settings (Mode Memory)
You can set any possible combination of copy modes and store them as a mode memory.
There are four mode memories, and they can be assigned names for increased convenience.
This feature is useful for storing frequently used copy settings.
Even if the power is turned OFF, the copy settings stored in memory keys are not deleted.
Registering Mode Memory
This section describes how to register the copy settings to a mode memory.
Even if the power is turned OFF, the copy settings stored in memory keys are not deleted.
1 Press (Main Menu).
2 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Copy>, then press [OK].
3 Press the left Any key to select <Mode
Memory>.
The currently specified settings are registered for the mode memory.
4 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the mode memory key that you want to store the copy settings under, then press the right Any key to select <Register/
Erase>.
Frequently Used Settings (Mode Memory)
② Use the software keyboard to enter a name, then press the right Any key to select
<Set>.
5 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Register Settings>.
–
–
You can enter up to 10 characters for the name.
For information on using the software
keyboard, see “Entering Characters,” on p. 1-19.
6 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Yes>, then press [OK].
■ If you want to name the mode memory setting:
① Use [ ▼ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Register Name>, then press [OK].
If you want to check the details of the setting, use [ ▼ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Details>, then press [OK].
7 Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
4-65
4-66
Frequently Used Settings (Mode Memory)
Recalling Mode Memory
This section describes how to recall the registered mode memories.
1 Press (Main Menu).
2 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Copy>, then press [OK].
3 Press the left Any key to select <Mode
Memory>.
4 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired mode memory, then press
[OK].
Frequently Used Settings (Mode Memory)
Checking Mode Memory
This section describes how to confirm the registered mode memories.
1 Press (Main Menu).
2 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Copy>, then press [OK].
5 Check the details of the mode memory, then press the right Any key to select
<Done>.
3 Press the left Any key to select <Mode
Memory>.
6 Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
4 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired mode memory, then press the left Any key to select <Details>.
4-67
4-68
Frequently Used Settings (Mode Memory)
Deleting Mode Memory
This section describes how to delete the copy settings from the mode memory list.
1 Press (Main Menu).
2 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Copy>, then press [OK].
5 Use [ ▼ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Erase>, then press [OK].
3 Press the left Any key to select <Mode
Memory>.
6 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Yes>, then press [OK].
4 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the mode memory key that you want to delete, then press the right Any key to select <Register/Erase>.
7 Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
Changing Standard Mode
Changing Standard Mode
The Standard mode is the combination of copy modes that the machine automatically applies when the power is turned ON, or when (Reset) is pressed. You can change the
Standard mode to suit your needs.
The default settings are as follows:
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
<Color Mode Settings>: Auto-color Select
<Paper Source Settings>: Drawer 1: LTR
<Density/Background Rem. Set.>: 0
<Various 2-Sided Settings>: Off
<Copy Ratio Settings>: 100%
<Original Image Quality Settings>: Text/Photo/Map
<Copy Multiple Pages onto 1 Page>: Off
<Sharpness Settings>: 0
<Shadow/Frame Erase Settings>: Off
<Color Adjustment>: Default
<Finishing Settings>: Off
<ID Card Copy Settings>: Off
<Number of Copies Settings>: 1
1 Press (Main Menu).
2 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Copy>, then press [OK].
3 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to display <Standard Mode Reg./Initialize>, then press [OK].
The currently specified settings are registered as the standard mode.
4-69
4-70
Changing Standard Mode
4 Press [OK] to select <Register>.
5 Use [ ▼ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Yes>, then press [OK].
6 Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
Initializing Standard Mode
Initializing Standard Mode
1
2
This section describes how to initialize the current standard mode.
Press
Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲
(Main Menu).
] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Copy>, then press [OK].
5 Use [ ▼ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Yes>, then press [OK].
3 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to display <Standard Mode Reg./Initialize>, then press [OK].
6 Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
4 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Initialize>, then press [OK].
4-71
4-72
Checking and Canceling Copy Jobs/Checking Copy Logs
Checking and Canceling Copy Jobs/Checking
Copy Logs
This section describes how to confirm copy jobs/logs, or cancel copy jobs.
Checking Copy Jobs
You can check the status of a copy job while it is printing or waiting to be processed.
1 Press (Status Monitor/Cancel).
2 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Copy>, then press [OK].
4 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired job, then press the left Any key to select <Details>.
3 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Job Status>, then press [OK].
5 Check the copy status, then press the right Any key to select <Done>.
6 Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
Checking and Canceling Copy Jobs/Checking Copy Logs
Canceling Copy Jobs
You can cancel a copy job while it is printing or waiting to be processed.
1 Press (Status Monitor/Cancel).
2 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Copy>, then press [OK].
5 Use [ ▼ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Yes>, then press [OK].
3 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Job Status>, then press [OK].
6 Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
4 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired job, then press the right Any key to select <Cancel>.
If you want to check the copy information, press the left Any key to select <Details>.
4-73
4-74
Checking and Canceling Copy Jobs/Checking Copy Logs
Checking Copy Logs
You can check copy logs that contain detailed information of finished copy jobs.
1 Press (Status Monitor/Cancel).
2 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Copy>, then press [OK].
5 Check the copy log, then press the right
Any key to select <Done>.
3 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Log>, then press [OK].
6 Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
4 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired job, then press the left Any key to select <Details>.
Fax
Overview of Fax Functions .............................................................. 5-2
Introduction to Using Fax Functions .............................................. 5-4
Methods for Receiving Faxes ..................................................................5-4
Selecting the Receive Mode ...................................................................5-9
Setting the Current Date and Time ....................................................5-12
Setting the Type of Telephone Line ...................................................5-13
Registering the Machine’s Name ........................................................5-14
Registering Your Machine’s Fax Number ..........................................5-16
Sending Fax Documents ...............................................................5-17
Basic Methods for Sending Faxes .......................................................5-17
Calling the Recipient before Sending Fax Documents
Switching Temporarily to Tone Dialing .............................................5-21
Dialing an Overseas Number (With Pauses) ...................................5-22
Basic Methods for Sending I-Faxes .....................................................5-25
Basic Methods for Sending PC Faxes .................................................5-27
Canceling Sending Fax Documents ..............................................5-29
Specifying Destinations ................................................................5-30
Specifying a New Fax Number .............................................................5-30
Using the Address Book .........................................................................5-34
Using the Group Addresses ..................................................................5-38
Sending Originals to More Than One Location
Specifying Fax Numbers via an LDAP Server ..................................5-43
Selecting Resolution .....................................................................5-50
Adjusting Density ..........................................................................5-51
Manual Exposure Adjustment ............................................................5-51
Selecting Image Quality ................................................................5-54
2-Sided Original .............................................................................5-56
Sending Originals at a Preset Time (Delayed Sending) ..............5-58
Direct Sending ...............................................................................5-61
Checking Settings for Recalled Favorites .........................................5-71
ECM Transmission ..........................................................................5-76
Adjusting the Pause Time .............................................................5-78
Redialing Automatically When the Line Is Busy (Auto Redial) ...5-80
Chapter
5
Checking the Dial Tone before Sending ......................................5-83
Standard Send Settings ................................................................5-85
Storing the Standard Send Settings ..................................................5-85
Restoring the Standard Send Settings to Their Default ..............5-87
Printing the TX Terminal ID ..........................................................5-89
Adjusting Sharpness .....................................................................5-92
Specifying What to Display on the Screen for a
Send Operation ..............................................................................5-94
Restoring the Send Function Settings to Their Default ..............5-96
Send Start Speed ...........................................................................5-98
Printing Received Documents on Both Sides of Paper .............5-100
Reducing a Received Document .................................................5-102
Printing Footer Information on a Received Document ............5-105
Specifying the Way of Printing When Toner Is Low ...................5-107
ECM Reception .............................................................................5-109
Setting the Incoming Ring Tone .................................................5-111
Receiving Documents Manually with an External Telephone
(Remote Reception) .....................................................................5-113
Activating the Remote Reception ...................................................5-113
Receiving Documents with the Remote Reception ..................5-114
Adjusting the Auto Switch Time for the Manual RX Mode .......5-115
Rejecting Incoming Faxes from the Unidentified Senders .......5-117
Receive Start Speed .....................................................................5-119
Receiving Documents in Memory without Printing Out
(Memory Lock Reception) ...........................................................5-121
Printing All Documents Stored in the Memory Lock
Reception Mode ...........................................................................5-124
Forwarding Received Fax Documents to a Computer or Fax
Before Specifying the Forwarding Settings .................................5-127
Specifying Forwarding Settings .......................................................5-128
Sending Documents in Memory to a Different Destination ...5-140
Handling Forwarding Documents ..................................................5-141
Resending Documents with Forwarding Errors .........................5-143
Checking/Changing the Status of Documents with
Checking/Changing the Status of Fax Documents in
Memory ........................................................................................5-147
Checking/Deleting Fax Transmission Documents .....................5-147
Checking/Deleting Fax Reception Documents ..........................5-148
Checking/Printing the Fax Log .........................................................5-150
5-2
Overview of Fax Functions
Overview of Fax Functions
In addition to supporting the Super G3 fax functions, this machine enables you to send/ receive I-faxes and send faxes from your computer. Received fax/I-fax documents can be also forwarded to specified destinations such as other fax machines and computers.
Overview of Fax Functions
5-3
5-4
Introduction to Using Fax Functions
Introduction to Using Fax Functions
The necessary settings before sending fax documents are as follows.
●
Your fax number
Register your machine’s fax number. (See “Registering Your Machine’s Fax Number,” on p. 5-16.)
●
Your personal name or company name
Register your name or company name. (See “Registering the Machine’s Name,” on p. 5-14.)
●
Tme and date
Set the current time and date. (See “Setting the Current Date and Time,” on p. 5-12.)
●
Your telephone lne type
●
Fax recevng mode
Methods for Receiving Faxes
Your machine provides several methods for receiving fax documents. You can receive documents automatically or manually. Follow the chart below to choose the fax receive mode that best suits your needs.
The default setting is <Auto RX>.
Introduction to Using Fax Functions
●
Auto RX Mode
In this mode, the machine receives documents automatically. Select this mode if you use the machine for fax operations only, and not for voice communications using an external telephone.
● Before using this mode
Simply set the receive mode to <Auto RX>. (See “Selecting the Receive Mode,” on p. 5-9.)
●
–
When an incoming call is received
With no external telephone connected to the machine:
–
•
• For fax calls, the machine receives fax documents automatically.
For telephone calls, you cannot talk to the caller.
With external telephone connected to the machine:
If you want to change <Incoming Ring>, see “Setting the Incoming Ring Tone,” on p. 5-111.
5-5
Introduction to Using Fax Functions
●
Fax/Tel Auto Swtch Mode
In this mode, the machine receives documents automatically for fax calls and the external telephone connected to the machine rings for telephone calls. (If <Incoming Ring> is set to <On>, the external telephone rings for both fax and telephone calls. To set the telephone to ring only when a telephone call is received, set <Incoming Ring> to <Off>.)
–
–
● Before using this mode
Make sure to do the following:
Connect your external telephone to the machine. (See “Introduction of the Machine,” in the e-Manual.)
Set the receive mode to <Fax/Tel Auto Switch>. (See “Selecting the Receive Mode,” on p. 5-9.)
● When an incoming call is received
5-6
–
–
–
Incoming calls or outgoing calls may not work properly, depending on the type of the external telephone connected to the machine.
If you want to change <Incoming Ring>, see “Setting the Incoming Ring Tone,” on p. 5-111.
Introduction to Using Fax Functions
●
Answer Mode
In this mode, the machine receives documents automatically for fax calls and your answering machine records a message for telephone calls.
● Before using this mode
Make sure to do the following:
– Connect your external telephone with built-in answering machine to the machine. (See “Introduction of the
Machine,” in the e-Manual.)
–
–
Set your answering machine to answer after 1 to 2 rings.
Record a message on your answering machine. (When you record a message, we recommend you insert
–
● about 4 seconds of silence at the beginning of the message, or limit the message to 20 seconds.)
Set the receive mode to <Answer Mode>. (See “Selecting the Receive Mode,” on p. 5-9.)
When an incoming call is received
–
–
This mode does not support voice mail.
Make sure to change the receive mode if you turn off your answering machine; otherwise, the machine cannot receive fax documents automatically.
5-7
Introduction to Using Fax Functions
●
Manual RX Mode
In this mode, you can monitor all incoming calls by picking up the handset each time your telephone rings.
This mode is a suitable option if you expect to use the machine mainly as a telephone, and only occasionally receive fax documents.
● Before using this mode
Make sure to do the following:
– Connect your external telephone to the machine. (See “Introduction of the Machine,” in the e-Manual.)
–
●
Set the receive mode to <Manual RX>. (See “Selecting the Receive Mode,” on p. 5-9.)
When an incoming call is received
5-8
*If <Remote RX> is set to <On>, you can also start to receive fax documents by dialing from your telephone.
(See “Receiving Documents Manually with an External Telephone (Remote Reception),” on p. 5-113.)
If you do not pick up the handset, you receive neither telephone nor fax calls. However, setting <Manual/Auto Switch> to <On> enables
Introduction to Using Fax Functions
●
DRPD Mode
–
–
DRPD (Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection) service assigns two or more telephone numbers with distinctive ring patterns to a single telephone line, allowing you to have both a fax number(s) and a telephone number(s) using only one telephone line. Your fax will automatically monitor incoming calls and based on the ring pattern, will let you know if the call is a fax or voice call. Set the fax ring pattern that matches the pattern assigned by your telephone company. Contact your telephone company for availability.
● Before using this mode
Make sure to do the following:
– Subscribe to a DRPD service. Contact your telephone company for availability.
Connect your external telephone to the machine. (See “Introduction of the Machine,” in the e-Manual.)
Set the receive mode to <DRPD>. (See “Selecting the Receive Mode,” on p. 5-9.)
Selecting the Receive Mode
Select the fax receive mode to suite your needs.
The default setting is <Auto RX>.
1 Press (Main Menu).
2 Press the right Any key to select
<Additional Func.>.
3 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Communications Settings>, then press
[OK].
4 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Fax Settings>, then press [OK].
5-9
Introduction to Using Fax Functions
5 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<RX Settings>, then press [OK].
■ If you specify the optional settings for <Fax/
Tel Auto Switch>:
① Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Fax/Tel Auto Switch>, then press the right Any key to select <Option>.
6 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Reception Mode Selection>, then press
[OK].
② Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Ring Start Time>, then press [OK].
5-10
7 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired receive mode, then press
[OK].
③ Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to specify the duration (4 to 30 seconds) for which the machine attempts to detect the fax tone before it starts ringing, then press [OK].
For <Fax/Tel Auto Switch> and <DRPD>, you can specify optional settings. If you want to specify the optional settings, press [OK] again.
–
–
–
You can also use – (numeric keys) to specify the duration.
If the machine receives a fax, the machine does not ring and switches to the receive mode automatically.
The default setting is <6 Seconds>.
④ Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Fax/Tel Ring Time>, then press [OK].
Introduction to Using Fax Functions
⑦ Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the action the machine will take after the ringing ends, then press [OK].
⑤ Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to specify the duration (15 to 300 seconds) of ringing, then press [OK].
–
–
<Done>: Disconnects the call.
<Receive>: Receives a fax.
■ If you specify the optional settings for
<DRPD>:
① Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<DRPD>, then press the right Any key to select <Option>.
–
–
You can also use – (numeric keys) to specify the duration.
The default setting is <15 Seconds>.
⑥ Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<After Ring Action>, then press [OK].
② Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select a ring pattern, then press [OK].
8 Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
5-11
5-12
Introduction to Using Fax Functions
Setting the Current Date and Time
You can set the current date and time. The current date and time settings are used as standard timer settings for functions that require them.
1 Press (Main Menu).
2 Press the right Any key to select
<Additional Func.>.
5 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Current Time Settings>, then press [OK].
3 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Timer Settings>, then press [OK].
6 Enter the current date and time using
– (numeric keys), then press [OK].
4 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Date & Time Settings>, then press [OK].
7 Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
Introduction to Using Fax Functions
Setting the Type of Telephone Line
Set the type of telephone line that is connected to the machine.
If this setting is incorrect, you will be unable to send faxes. Be sure to check the type of telephone line that you are using, and make the correct setting.
The default setting is <Tone>.
1 Press (Main Menu).
2 Press the right Any key to select
<Additional Func.>.
4 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Fax Settings>, then press [OK].
3 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Communications Settings>, then press
[OK].
5 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<User Settings>, then press [OK].
6 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Tel. Line Type Selection>, then press
[OK].
5-13
5-14
Introduction to Using Fax Functions
7 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Manual>, then press [OK].
8 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the type of telephone line, then press
[OK].
–
–
–
<Pulse>: Pulse dialing
<Tone>: Tone dialing
If you do not know the telephone line type, call your telephone service provider for details.
9 Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
Registering the Machine’s Name
Your name or company’s name must be registered as the machine’s name.
When you send a document, the name that you registered is printed as the sender’s name on the recipient’s paper.
1 Press (Main Menu).
2 Press the right Any key to select
<Additional Func.>.
3 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Communications Settings>, then press
[OK].
4 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Common Settings>, then press [OK].
Introduction to Using Fax Functions
7 Use the software keyboard to enter the machine’s name, then press the right Any key to select <Set>.
5 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<TX Settings>, then press [OK].
For information on using the software keyboard,
see “Entering Characters,” on p. 1-19.
8 Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
6 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Register Unit Name>, then press [OK].
5-15
5-16
Introduction to Using Fax Functions
Registering Your Machine’s Fax Number
Your machine’s fax number must be registered. When you send a document, the number that you registered is printed on the recipient’s paper.
1 Press (Main Menu).
2 Press the right Any key to select
<Additional Func.>.
5 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<User Settings>, then press [OK].
3 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Communications Settings>, then press
[OK].
6 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Register Unit Telephone #>, then press
[OK].
4 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Fax Settings>, then press [OK].
7 Enter the machine’s fax number using
– (numeric keys), then press the right Any key to select <Register>.
8 Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
Sending Fax Documents
Sending Fax Documents
This section describes the settings and procedures for sending fax documents.
Basic Methods for Sending Faxes
This section describes the flow of sending faxes.
1 Place your originals.
4 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Enter Fax (New)>, then press [OK].
2 Press (Main Menu).
3 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Send/Fax>, then press [OK].
5 Enter the fax number using – , and (numeric keys).
–
–
You can enter up to 40 characters for the fax number.
For details about how to specify destinations,
see “Specifying Destinations,” on p. 5-30.
5-17
Sending Fax Documents
6 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Set Destination>, then press [OK].
8 Press (Start)
5-18
7 Make the scan settings you require.
–
–
Scanning starts if the original is placed in the feeder, and the scanned data is sent to the specified destination when scanning is complete.
To cancel scanning, press the left Any key to select <Cancel> or press (Stop).
9 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the original size, then press [OK].
You can specify the following settings:
– <Resolution Settings>: Adjusts the resolution
of originals. (See “Selecting Resolution,” on p. 5-50.)
– <Density/Background Rem.Set.>: Adjusts the density and the background color of originals.
(See “Adjusting Density,” on p. 5-51.)
–
–
–
–
–
<Original Image Quality Settings>: Adjusts the
image quality of originals. (See “Selecting
<2-Sided Orig. Orientation Set.>: Scans two-
sided originals for sending. (See “2-Sided
<Delayed TX Settings>: Sends scanned
documents at a specified time. (See “Sending
Originals at a Preset Time (Delayed Sending),” on p. 5-58.)
<Direct Send Settings>: Sends each page of the document to the destination as it is
scanned. (See “Direct Sending,” on p. 5-61.)
<Register Favorites>: Stores frequently used
send settings for future use. (See “Favorites,” on p. 5-63.)
10 Press (Start).
–
–
Scanning starts.
To cancel scanning, press the left Any key to select <Cancel> or press (Stop).
11 Follow the instructions on the display, then press (Start) once for each original.
Sending Fax Documents
12 When scanning is complete, press the right Any key to select <Done>.
The scanned data is sent to the specified destination.
Calling the Recipient before Sending Fax Documents (Manual Sending)
Use manual sending when you want to talk to the recipient before sending a document, or if the recipient does not have a fax machine that can receive automatically.
You cannot use group addresses for manual sending.
1 Connect an external telephone to the machine if you want to talk to the recipient before sending a document.
For information on how to connect an external telephone to the machine, see “Introduction of the Machine,” in the e-Manual.
2 Place your originals.
You can only send one page at a time when you place your original on the platen glass.
5-19
Sending Fax Documents
3
4
Press
Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲
(Main Menu).
] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Send/Fax>, then press [OK].
5 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Enter Fax (New)>, then press [OK].
8 Talk through the handset to the recipient.
– If you select <Hook> in step 6, you can pick up the handset when you hear the recipient’s voice.
– If you hear a high-pitched signal instead of the recipient’s voice, go to step 10.
9 Ask the recipient to set their fax machine to receive faxes.
10 When you hear a high-pitched signal, use
[ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<RX Start>, then press [OK] before hanging up the handset.
–
–
Scanning starts, and the scanned data is sent to the specified destination.
To cancel scanning, press the left Any key to select <Cancel>.
6 Press the left Any key to select <Hook> or pick up the handset of your external telephone.
5-20
7 Dial the recipient’s fax number.
– You can enter up to 40 characters for the fax number.
– Make sure to confirm the dial tone before entering a fax number. If you enter the number before the dial tone can be heard, the call may not connect, or the wrong number may be dialed.
Sending Fax Documents
Switching Temporarily to Tone Dialing
If your machine is set for pulse dialing, use the procedure below to switch to tone dialing to use information services (e.g., banks, airline reservations, and hotel reservations).
To talk to the other party, you will need to connect an external telephone to the machine.
1 Press (Main Menu).
2 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Send/Fax>, then press [OK].
5 Enter the number of the fax information service using – (numeric keys).
3 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Enter Fax (New)>, then press [OK].
■If you are using one-touch:
① Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<One-touch>, then press [OK].
4 Press the left Any key to select <Hook>.
② Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired one-touch, then press the right
Any key to select <Set>.
5-21
5-22
Sending Fax Documents
6 When the recorded message of the information service answers, use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Tone> to switch to tone dialing, then press [OK].
7 Enter the numbers requested by the information service using –
(numeric keys).
–
–
If you are already using this machine with tone dialing, this step is not necessary.
After you press <Tone>, <T> appears on the display.
8 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<RX Start>, then press [OK] if you require a faxed copy of the information.
If you do not require a faxed copy of the information, press the right Any key to select
<Done>.
Dialing an Overseas Number (With Pauses)
When you dial or register an overseas number, you may need to insert a pause within the number.
1 Place your originals.
2 Press (Main Menu).
3 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Send/Fax>, then press [OK].
4 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Enter Fax (New)>, then press [OK].
Sending Fax Documents
7 Enter the country code, the area code, and the fax number of the recipient.
5 Enter the international access code using
– (numeric keys).
8 If necessary, use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll
Wheel) to select <Pause>, then press
[OK].
6 If necessary, use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll
Wheel) to select <Pause>, then press
[OK].
Pauses entered at the end of fax numbers are always 10 seconds long.
9 Press (Start).
–
–
You can enter successive pauses within the fax number to make the pause time longer.
You can change the length of a pause inserted within the fax number in <Set Pause Time>.
The default setting is two second. (See
“Adjusting the Pause Time,” on p. 5-78.)
–
–
Scanning starts if the original is placed in the feeder, and the scanned data is sent to the specified destination when scanning is complete.
To cancel scanning, press the left Any key to select <Cancel>.
5-23
5-24
Sending Fax Documents
10 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the original size, then press [OK].
13 When scanning is complete, press the right Any key to select <Done>.
11 Press (Start).
–
–
Scanning starts.
To cancel scanning, press the left Any key to select <Cancel> or press (Stop).
12 Follow the instructions on the display, then press (Start) once for each original.
The scanned data is sent to the specified destination.
Sending Fax Documents
Basic Methods for Sending I-Faxes
This section describes the flow of sending I-faxes.
–
–
•
The following conditions are always selected:
Paper Size: LTR
This is because the sender does not know whether the recipient’s machine can receive sizes other than LTR. Originals larger than LTR are reduced to LTR size.
•
• File Format: TIFF
Resolution: B&W 200 × 100 dpi or B&W 200 × 200 dpi
For details on the I-fax functions, see “Fax,” in the e-Manual.
1 Place your originals.
4 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Enter I-Fax (New)>, then press [OK].
2 Press (Main Menu).
3 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Send/Fax>, then press [OK].
5 Use the software keyboard to enter the Ifax address, then press the right Any key to select <Set>.
–
–
You can enter up to 120 characters for the Ifax address.
For information on using the software
keyboard, see “Entering Characters,” on p. 1-19.
5-25
5-26
Sending Fax Documents
6 Make the scan settings you require.
7 Press (Start).
You can specify the following settings:
– <Color/File Format Settings>: Sets <B&W TIFF
(Divide into Pages)> or <B&W TIFF (Do Not
Divide into Pages)>.*
–
–
<Resolution Settings>: Adjusts the resolution of originals. (See “Fax,” in the e-Manual.)
<Density/Background Rem.Set.>: Adjusts the density and the background color of originals.
(See “Fax,” in the e-Manual.)
–
–
–
–
<Original Image Quality Settings>: Adjusts the image quality of originals. (See “Fax,” in the e-Manual.)
<2-Sided Orig. Orientation Set.>: Scans twosided originals for sending. (See “Fax,” in the e-Manual.)
<Delayed TX Settings>: Sends scanned documents at a specified time. (See “Fax,” in the e-Manual.)
<Send Document Name Settings>: Sets the document’s name. (See “Fax,” in the e-Manual.)
–
–
<Subject/Message Settings>: Sets the subject line and message body text. (See “Fax,” in the e-Manual.)
<Reply-to Settings>: Sets the reply-to address.
(See “Fax,” in the e-Manual.)
– <Register Favorites>: Stores frequently used send settings for future use. (See “Fax,” in the e-Manual.)
* If you want to divide multiple images into single pages and send each page as a separate file, use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<B&W TIFF (Divide into Pages)>, then press [OK].
If you want to send multiple images as a single file without dividing them, use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or
(Scroll Wheel) to select <B&W TIFF (Do Not
Divide into Pages)>, then press [OK].
–
–
Scanning starts if the original is placed in the feeder, and the scanned data is sent to the specified destination when scanning is complete.
To cancel scanning, press the left Any key to select <Cancel> or press (Stop).
8 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the original size, then press [OK].
9 Press (Start).
–
–
Scanning starts.
To cancel scanning, press the left Any key to select <Cancel> or press (Stop).
10 Follow the instructions on the display, then press (Start) once for each original.
Sending Fax Documents
11 When scanning is complete, press the right Any key to select <Done>.
The scanned data is sent to the specified destination.
Basic Methods for Sending PC Faxes
This section describes the flow of sending PC faxes.
–
–
Faxing methods may differ depending on the application you are using. For details, see the instruction manuals provided with the application software.
For details on the PC fax functions, see “Fax,” in the e-Manual.
1 Open the document you want to fax from the application.
2 Select [Print] from the [File] menu.
The procedure for displaying the [Print] dialog box may differ depending on the application you are using.
–
–
The fax name displayed in the fax driver screen is changed by settings in the [Printers] folder
(or [Printers and Faxes]). (See “Fax,” in the e-Manual.)
The procedure for displaying the fax driver screen may differ depending on the applications you are using.
3 Select your fax from [Name], then click
[Properties].
4 Configure the required settings in the fax driver screen, then click [OK].
5 Click [Print].
5-27
5-28
Sending Fax Documents
6 Specify recipient name and fax number in the [Sending Settings] sheet → click [Add to Destinations List].
–
–
–
The number of recipients to which you can send simultaneously depends on the conditions of cover sheet attachment. For more information, click [Help] in the bottom righthand corner of the fax driver window to view the online help.
You can select a recipient from the address book by clicking [Address Book]. (See “Fax,” in the e-Manual.)
You can use or edit the address book only if you are permitted access to the folder where the address book file is saved (by default, Power
Users and higher have access to the folder). If you are not permitted access to the folder, log on as a user who has access to the folder, or click [Specify a Folder] in the [Edit Address
Book] sheet, and save the address book file in a folder, such as the [My Documents] folder, where you have write permission. (See “Fax,” in the e-Manual.)
When you click [Add to Destination List], a dialog box to prompt you to confirm the destination appears, if the Security Settings in the [Special] page is enabled. For more information, click [Help] in the bottom righthand corner of the fax driver window to view the online help.
7 If you want to attach a cover sheet, select
[Cover Sheet] sheet → specify a format for the cover sheet.
See “Fax,” in the e-Manual for cover sheet attachment.
8 Click [OK].
Canceling Sending Fax Documents
Canceling Sending Fax Documents
1
Follow this procedure to cancel a transmission in progress.
Press (Status Monitor/Cancel) during transmission.
2 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Fax>, then press [OK].
5 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<No> or <Yes>, then press [OK].
3 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Send Job Status>, then press [OK].
6 Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
4 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the job you want to cancel, then press the right Any key to select <Cancel>.
5-29
5-30
Specifying Destinations
Specifying Destinations
This section describes how to specify a fax destination. You can select a destination stored in the Address Book or a one-touch, or specify a new destination.
–
–
–
If <Restrict New Addresses> in <Restrict the Send Function> in <System Management Set.> under <Additional Func.> is set to <On>, you can only specify a destination using <Address Book>, <Search LDAP Server>, or <Log>. If you select
<Log>, you can select only settings stored. (See “Security,” in the e-Manual.)
The destination that you just specified is not stored in the Address Book. It is deleted once the document is sent.
If you frequently send documents to the same destinations, store these destinations in the Address Book beforehand. (See
“Registering Fax Numbers in the Address Book,” on p. 3-2.)
Specifying a New Fax Number
You can specify a new fax number using – , and (numeric keys).
For details on how to send the documents, see “Basic Methods for Sending Faxes,” on p. 5-17.
1 Press (Main Menu).
2 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Send/Fax>, then press [OK].
3 Use [ ▼ ] , [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Enter Fax (New)>, then press [OK].
Specifying Destinations
4 Enter a fax number using – , and
(numeric keys).
–
–
You can enter up to 40 characters for the fax number.
Details of each item are shown below.
– <Set Destination>: Set the desired destination.
<Backspace>: Delete the last number entered.
<Pause>: Insert a pause of several seconds in the fax number you are dialing. If you insert a pause within the fax number, the letter <p> is displayed between the numbers. If you insert a pause at the end of the fax number, the letter <P> appears.
When dialing an overseas number, insert a pause after the country code and at the end
of the fax number. (See “Dialing an Overseas
Number (With Pauses),” on p. 5-22.)
–
–
–
<Tone>: Select when you want to directly call an extension line that is connected to a PBX
(Private Branch Exchange), which accepts only tone signals. If you select <Tone> and press
[OK], the letter <T> appears.
<Direct Send>: Send documents directly to the recipient. Select <On>, then press [OK]. If you do not select direct sending mode,
memory sending mode is used. (See “Direct
<Hook>: Send a fax document manually or
use tone dialing. (See “Calling the Recipient before Sending Fax Documents (Manual
Sending),” on p. 5-19, or “Switching
Temporarily to Tone Dialing,” on p. 5-21.)
–
–
–
–
You cannot insert a pause at the beginning of a number.
If you enter a pause at the end of the number, the pause is always 10 seconds long.
You can press (Clear) to clear your entry.
If <Confirm Entered Fax No.> in <Restrict the
Send Function> in <System Management Set.> under <Additional Func.> is set to <On>, you should enter the fax number again for confirmation. Enter the fax number you entered in step 4, then press [OK]. (See
“Security,” in the e-Manual.)
5 Use [ ▼ ] , [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Set Destination>, then press [OK].
■ If you want to clear the specified destination:
① Press the left Any key to select <Confirm/
Erase>.
5-31
5-32
Specifying Destinations
② Check if the destination you want to clear is selected, then press the left Any key to select <Erase>.
③ Confirm the specified destination.
③ Specify a destination again.
■ If you want to confirm/edit the specified destination:
① Press the left Any key to select <Confirm/
Erase>.
–
–
To complete this procedure, press the right
Any key to select <Done>.
To edit the specified destination, press [OK], then edit the destination.
■ If you want to register the specified destination in the Address Book:
For the Color imageCLASS MF9220Cdn, you cannot register the destination in the following procedures.
① Press the left Any key to select <Confirm/
Erase>.
② Check if the destination you want to confirm or edit is selected, then press [OK].
② Check if the destination you want to register is selected, then press [OK].
③ Press the left Any key to select <Reg. Add.
Book>.
④ Register the specified destination.
For details on how to register the destination in the Address Book, see
“Registering Fax Numbers in the Address
Specifying Destinations
5-33
5-34
Specifying Destinations
Using the Address Book
You must specify the destination to send documents. A maximum of 300 (200 for the Color imageCLASS
MF9220Cdn) destinations (including 200 one-touch destinations) can be stored. If you store addresses in the
Address Book, you can easily select them.
–
–
–
–
If you use the Color imageCLASS MF9220Cdn, you can register only one-touch destinations in the Address Book.
Address Books can be saved, imported, and transferred using the Remote User Interface. (See “Settings from a PC,” in the e-Manual.)
For details on how to send the documents, see “Basic Methods for Sending Faxes,” on p. 5-17.
1 Press (Main Menu).
2 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Send/Fax>, then press [OK].
4 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired destination, then press [OK].
3 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Address Book>, then press [OK].
–
–
The icons displayed on the Address Book are:
– : Fax
–
: I-Fax
: File Server
– : Group
You can select multiple destinations at a time.
–
–
–
–
You can use [ ◀ ], [ ▶ ] to restrict the displayed range of destinations.
If the register name is longer than 10 characters, the first 10 characters are displayed in the name column in the Address Book.
If the registered destination name is longer than 13 characters, the first 13 characters are displayed in the destination column in the
Address Book.
To cancel a selected destination, select the destination again to clear the check mark.
5 Press the right Any key to select <Set>.
Specifying Destinations
③ Specify a destination again.
■ If you want to clear the specified destination:
① Press the left Any key to select <Confirm/
Erase>.
② Check if the destination you want to clear is selected, then press the left Any key to select <Erase>.
If multiple destinations are specified, clear the other destinations as necessary.
5-35
5-36
Specifying Destinations
Using the One-Touch
You can specify up to 200 destinations in one-touch.
Follow the procedure below to start a transmission and send a document using one-touch.
–
–
–
If you use the Color imageCLASS MF9220Cdn, you can register only one-touch destinations in the Address Book.
For details on how to send the documents, see “Basic Methods for Sending Faxes,” on p. 5-17.
1 Press (Main Menu).
2 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Send/Fax>, then press [OK].
4 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired destination, then press [OK].
3 Press the right Any key to select <Onetouch>.
You can select multiple destinations at a time.
To cancel a selected destination, select the destination again to clear the check mark.
5 Press the right Any key to select <Set>.
■ If you want to clear the specified destination:
① Press the left Any key to select <Confirm/
Erase>.
② Check if the destination you want to clear is selected, then press the left Any key to select <Erase>.
If multiple destinations are specified, clear the other destinations as necessary.
③ Specify a destination again.
Specifying Destinations
5-37
5-38
Specifying Destinations
Using the Group Addresses
Group address enables you to specify a group of registered destinations in the Address Book or one-touch.
This is useful if you want to send the same document to several destinations. You can register up to 299 (199 for the Color imageCLASS MF9220Cdn) destinations in one group. You can use the group address from the
Address Book or from the one-touch.
For details on how to send the documents, see “Basic Methods for Sending Faxes,” on p. 5-17.
●
Specfyng a Group from the Address Book
1 Press (Main Menu).
2 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Send/Fax>, then press [OK].
4 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired group which is made up of several destinations, then press [OK].
You can select multiple destinations at a time.
3 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Address Book>, then press [OK].
–
–
You can use [ ◀ ] or [ ▶ ] to restrict the displayed range of destinations.
To cancel a selected destination, select the destination again to clear the check mark.
5 Press the right Any key to select <Set>.
■ If you want to clear the specified destination:
① Press the left Any key to select <Confirm/
Erase>.
Specifying Destinations
② Check if the destination you want to clear is selected, then press the left Any key to select <Erase>.
If multiple destinations are specified, clear the other destinations as necessary.
③ Specify a destination again.
●
Specfyng a Group from the One-Touch
1 Press (Main Menu).
2 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Send/Fax>, then press [OK].
3 Press the right Any key to select <Onetouch>.
5-39
5-40
Specifying Destinations
4 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired group which is made up of several destinations, then press [OK].
② Check if the destination you want to clear is selected, then press the left Any key to select <Erase>.
You can select multiple destinations at a time.
To cancel a selected destination, select the destination again to clear the check mark.
5 Press the right Any key to select <Set>.
If multiple destinations are specified, clear the other destinations as necessary.
③ Specify a destination again.
■ If you want to clear the specified destination:
① Press the left Any key to select <Confirm/
Erase>.
Sending Originals to More Than One Location (Broadcasting)
Broadcasting enables you to send the same document to multiple recipients.
Specifying Destinations
–
–
–
–
–
A maximum of 332 (232 for the Color imageCLASS MF9220Cdn) destinations can be specified at the same time. (Out of the 332 or 232 destinations, 32 new destinations can be specified.) If you specify a group of several destinations, each destination is counted as a separate address.
If you frequently send documents to multiple destinations, it is recommended that you store those destinations as a group.
When <Restrict Seq. Broadcast> is set to <Prohibit Broadcast>, you cannot send the documents to multiple recipients. (See “Security,” in the e-Manual.)
You cannot cancel to send only one destination out of the multiple destinations.
If you specify e-mail or file server addresses as destinations, <Color/File Format Settings> appears on the Send Settings screen.
However, this setting is disabled when sending faxes.
1 Place your originals.
4 Specify a destination.
2 Press (Main Menu).
3 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Send/Fax>, then press [OK].
For details about how to specify destinations, see
“Specifying Destinations,” on p. 5-30.
5 Press the right Any key to select <Add
Destination>.
5-41
5-42
Specifying Destinations
6 Repeat step 4 and 5 until all the destinations are set.
9 Press (Start).
–
–
Up to 32 new destinations can be specified. If you add destinations, specify them from
Address Book.
You cannot specify the detail settings for each destination.
7 Press (Start).
–
–
Scanning starts.
To cancel scanning, press the left Any key to select <Cancel> or press (Stop).
10 Follow the instructions on the display, then press (Start) once for each original.
–
–
Scanning starts if the original is placed in the feeder, and the scanned data is sent to the specified destination when scanning is complete.
To cancel scanning, press the left Any key to select <Cancel> or press (Stop).
8 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the original size, then press [OK].
11 When scanning is complete, press the right Any key to select <Done>.
The scanned data is sent to the specified destination.
Specifying Destinations
Specifying Fax Numbers via an LDAP Server
You can specify e-mail addresses and fax numbers by searching the directory listings on the network using
LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access Protocol) servers. E-mail addresses and fax numbers obtained via the server can be specified as destinations or stored in the Address Book.
This section describes how to specify fax numbers via an LDAP server.
–
–
–
–
–
If <Language Switch> is set to <On>, some characters are restricted and cannot be entered. To enter all characters, set <Language
Switch> to <Off>. (See “Introduction of the Machine,” in the e-Manual.)
You may have to set up the LDAP servers beforehand, depending on the network environment.
If you want to specify or register destinations via an LDAP server, the LDAP server settings must be specified in the machine beforehand. (See “Network Settings,” in the e-Manual.)
For information on how to specify e-mail addresses via an LDAP server, see “E-mail,” in the e-Manual.
For details on how to send the documents, see “Basic Methods for Sending Faxes,” on p. 5-17.
1 Press (Main Menu).
2 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Send/Fax>, then press [OK].
4 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired server to search, then press
[OK].
3 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Search LDAP Server>, then press [OK].
5-43
5-44
Specifying Destinations
5 Specify the search criteria.
– There are two methods to search for a fax number: Simple Search and Detailed Search.
Simple Search enables you to search for a fax number by entering the name, e-mail address, or fax number for the destination. To make a more detailed search with multiple search conditions, use Detailed Search.
– If a destination has both a registered e-mail address and fax number, you can search for it by entering either the e-mail address or the fax number as the search criterion.
■ To use Simple Search:
① Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Name>, <E-mail>, or <Fax>, then press
[OK].
To make a more detailed search with multiple search conditions, press the left Any key to select
<Detailed Search>, and follow the directions below. The search criteria you entered for Simple
Search are continuously used in Detailed Search.
■ To use Detailed Search:
① Press the left Any key to select <Detailed
Search>.
② Press the left Any key to select <Menu>.
② Use the software keyboard to enter the name, e-mail address, or fax number, then press the right Any key to select <Set>.
③ Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Add Search Condition>, then press [OK].
–
–
The search criteria boxes that are not filled out, are not searched.
For information on using the software
keyboard, see “Entering Characters,” on p. 1-19.
④
⑤
Use [
Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired search category, then press
[OK].
▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the first item, then press [OK].
Specifying Destinations
–
–
–
<Organization>/<Organization Unit> can be used as search categories only if the information has been registered on the LDAP
Server.
Detailed Search by <Organization>/
<Organization Unit> may not be performed, depending on whether the attribute types have been registered on the LDAP server and depending on the type of application on the server.
You can also add additional user-defined search attributes. For instructions on how to register or edit a search attribute, see “Network
Settings,” in the e-Manual.
⑥ Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the second item, then press [OK].
–
–
–
–
–
<Name>: Search by name.
<E-mail>: Search by e-mail address.
<Fax>: Search by fax number.
<Organization>: Search by organization name.
<Organization Unit>: Search by organization unit (e.g., departments in an organization).
For example, if cn(common name)=user1, ou(organization unit)=salesdept, o(organization)=canon, c(country)=jp is the distinguished name in the directory, enter
<Organization>/<Organization Unit> of the user as follows:
<Organization>=canon
<Organization Unit>=salesdept
⑦ Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired search condition, then press
[OK].
–
–
<contains>: The result must contain the entered name, e-mail address, fax number, organization, or organizational unit.
<does not contain>: The result must not contain the entered name, e-mail address, fax number, organization, or organizational unit.
5-45
5-46
Specifying Destinations
–
–
–
–
<equals>: The result must be exactly the same as the entered name, e-mail address, fax number, organization, or organizational unit.
<differs from>: The result must be different from the entered name, e-mail address, fax number, organization, or organizational unit.
<begins with>: The result must begin with the same first few letters that you entered for the name, e-mail address, fax number, organization, or organizational unit.
<ends with>: The result must end with the same last few letters that you entered for the name, e-mail address, fax number, organization, or organizational unit.
⑧ Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the third item, then press [OK].
⑩ Press the right Any key to select <Set>.
6 Add or edit the search criteria as necessary.
If you search for a fax number using the criteria specified in step 5, go to the next step.
■ To continue adding more search criteria:
① Press the left Any key to select <Menu>.
⑨ Use the software keyboard to enter the search criterion, then press the right Any key to select <Set>.
② Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Search Method (and/or)>, then press [OK].
For information on using the software
keyboard, see “Entering Characters,” on p. 1-19.
③ Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<or> or <and>, then press [OK].
–
–
<or>: The machine searches and returns a result that matches any of the specified search criteria.
<and>: The machine searches and returns a result that matches all of the specified search criteria.
④ Press the left Any key to select <Menu>.
Specifying Destinations
–
–
You can specify up to four different search criteria at a time.
If you specify three or more search criteria, you cannot use both <or> and <and> together.
■ To edit the search criteria:
① Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the search criterion that you want to edit, then press the left Any key to select
<Menu>.
② Use[ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Edit Search Condition>, then press [OK].
⑤ Use[ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Add Search Condition>, then press [OK].
③ Follow step 5 to edit the search criteria.
⑥ Follow step 5 to add the search criteria.
5-47
Specifying Destinations
■ To delete the search criteria:
① Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the search criterion that you want to delete, then press the left Any key to select
<Menu>.
7 Press the right Any key to select <Start
Search>.
5-48
② Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Erase Search Condition>, then press [OK].
③ Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Yes>, then press [OK].
To cancel searching while the machine is searching for your criteria, press the left Any key to select <Cancel>. If the machine finds some results before you select <Cancel>, these search results are displayed.
–
–
–
–
–
Searching for a destination via an LDAP server is not possible if the time setting of the server and the time setting of the machine are more than five minutes apart. If you cannot send even when the user name and password are correct, check the time settings on the server and the machine.
The number of search results displayed will not exceed the maximum limit set in <Register
LDAP Server> in <System Management Set.>.
(See “Network Settings,” in the e-Manual.) If the desired destination is not displayed, either increase the maximum number of addresses to search, or change the search criteria.
If you select <Start Search> without specifying any search criteria, all of the addresses stored
• on the LDAP server are displayed.
If the Network Password Entry screen is displayed, enter your user name and network password, then press [OK].
•
The Network Password Entry screen is displayed if either one of the following is true:
If <Login Information> in <Register LDAP
Server> in <System Management Set.> is set to <Use> or <Use (Sec. Auth.): Ver 3 (UTF-
8)>, and <Display Auth. Screen> is set to
<On>. (See “Network Settings,” in the e-Manual.)
If the user name, password, and domain name specified in <Register LDAP Server> in
<System Management Set.> are incorrect.
(See “Network Settings,” in the e-Manual.)
8 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired destination from the search results, then press [OK].
You can select up to 32 destinations.
–
–
To cancel a selected destination, select the destination again, then press [OK] to clear the check mark.
You can use [ ◀ ] or [ ▶ ] to restrict the displayed range of destinations.
9 Press the right Any key to select <Set>.
Specifying Destinations
5-49
5-50
Selecting Resolution
Selecting Resolution
You can specify the resolution before scanning the original.
The default setting is <200 × 200 dpi (Fine)>.
–
–
The maximum size of an image that you can send at a resolution of 400 x 400 dpi is LGL.
For details on how to send the documents, see “Basic Methods for Sending Faxes,” on p. 5-17.
1 Press (Main Menu).
2 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Send/Fax>, then press [OK].
4 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to display <Resolution Settings>, then press
[OK].
5 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired resolution, then press [OK].
3 Specify a destination.
For details about how to specify destinations, see
“Specifying Destinations,” on p. 5-30.
Adjusting Density
Adjusting Density
You can adjust the density to the most appropriate level for the original manually.
Manual Exposure Adjustment
You can manually adjust the scan exposure to the most appropriate level for the original.
For details on how to send the documents, see “Basic Methods for Sending Faxes,” on p. 5-17.
1 Press (Main Menu).
2 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Send/Fax>, then press [OK].
4 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to display <Density/Background Rem. Set.>, then press [OK].
3 Specify a destination.
5 Use [ ◀ ], [ ▶ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to adjust the density, then press [OK].
For details about how to specify destinations, see
“Specifying Destinations,” on p. 5-30.
Move the indicator to the left to make the exposure lighter or move it to the right to make the exposure darker.
5-51
5-52
Adjusting Density
Adjusting Base Color
This mode enables you to erase the background color of the original when scanning. This mode is especially useful for scanning originals such as catalogs and paper, that have turned yellow from age.
For details on how to send the documents, see “Basic Methods for Sending Faxes,” on p. 5-17.
1 Press (Main Menu).
2 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Send/Fax>, then press [OK].
4 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to display <Density/Background Rem. Set.>, then press [OK].
5 Press the right Any key to select
<Background>.
3 Specify a destination.
For details about how to specify destinations, see
“Specifying Destinations,” on p. 5-30.
6 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select background setting, then press [OK].
Adjusting Density
9 Press the right Any key to select <Set>.
–
–
–
<Off>: Does not erase the background color of the original.
<Background Removal>: If you want to erase the background color of the original, following step is not necessary.
<Background Fine Adjust.>: If you want to make fine adjustments to the density of the background color, go to the next step.
7 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired color, then press [OK].
8 Use [ ◀ ], [ ▶ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to adjust the strength of the color, then press [OK].
If you adjust the strength of <Yellow>, the levels of <Red> and <Green> adjust automatically to the same level as <Yellow>. If you adjust the strength of <Red> or <Green>, the <Yellow> level returns to its default level.
5-53
Selecting Image Quality
Selecting Image Quality
You can manually select the original type according to the type of image that you are scanning.
The default setting is <Text/Photo>.
–
–
–
–
Combinations of these three modes (Text/Photo, Photo, and Text) cannot be selected at the same time. If you select one of these modes, the previously set mode is canceled.
If you scan an original containing halftones, such as a printed image, using the <Photo> mode, the moiré effect (a shimmering, wavy pattern) may occur. In this case, you can lessen this moiré effect by using the sharpness mode. (See
“Adjusting Sharpness,” on p. 5-92.)
If the original is a transparency, select the original type and adjust the exposure to the most appropriate level for the original.
For details on how to send the documents, see “Basic Methods for Sending Faxes,” on p. 5-17.
1 Press (Main Menu).
2 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Send/Fax>, then press [OK].
4 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to display <Original Image Quality
Settings>, then press [OK].
3 Specify a destination.
5-54
For details about how to specify destinations, see
“Specifying Destinations,” on p. 5-30.
5 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the image quality, then press [OK].
–
–
–
<Text/Photo>: This mode is best suited for scanning originals containing both text and photos such as magazines or catalogs.
<Text>: This mode is best suited for scanning text originals. Blueprints or pencil drawn originals can also be scanned clearly.
<Photo>: This mode is best suited for scanning photos printed on photographic paper or photo originals containing halftones
(e.g. printed photos).
Selecting Image Quality
5-55
2-Sided Original
2-Sided Original
You can set the machine to automatically turn over 2-sided originals that are placed in the feeder, and scan each side separately.
The default setting is <Off>.
–
–
–
The 2-sided original mode cannot be used when sending a fax document in the direct sending or manual sending mode.
When you are scanning originals with a horizontal (landscape) orientation, such as LTRR, make sure to place them horizontally into the feeder. If these originals are placed vertically, the back sides of these originals are scanned upside down.
For details on how to send the documents, see “Basic Methods for Sending Faxes,” on p. 5-17.
1 Press (Main Menu).
2 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Send/Fax>, then press [OK].
4 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to display <2-Sided Orig. Orientation Set.>, then press [OK].
3 Specify a destination.
If <Book Type Original> or <Calendar Type
Original> has been selected, <2-Sided Originals
Settings> is displayed.
5-56
For details about how to specify destinations, see
“Specifying Destinations,” on p. 5-30.
5 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the type of original, then press [OK].
–
–
–
<Off>: 1-sided originals are scanned.
<Book Type Original>: The front and back sides of the original have the same topbottom orientation.
<Calendar Type Original>: The front and back sides of the original have opposite topbottom orientations.
2-Sided Original
5-57
Sending Originals at a Preset Time (Delayed Sending)
Sending Originals at a Preset Time (Delayed
Sending)
The delayed sending mode enables you to store a send job in memory, and have it sent at a later time.
The default setting is <Off>.
–
–
–
•
•
You can reserve up to 70 jobs for the delayed sending. However, the actual number of jobs that can be reserved may be less than 70, depending on the following conditions:
If multiple documents are being sent at the same time.
If large documents are being sent.
• If there are jobs other than delayed sending.
Once the delayed documents are sent, the documents are automatically deleted from memory.
You can check the status or cancel the transmission of jobs for which a preset send time has been specified. (See
“Checking/Deleting Fax Transmission Documents,” on p. 5-147.)
1 Place your originals.
3 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Send/Fax>, then press [OK].
5-58
2 Press (Main Menu).
4 Specify a destination.
For details about how to specify destinations, see
“Specifying Destinations,” on p. 5-30.
5 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to display <Delayed TX Settings>, then press
[OK].
Sending Originals at a Preset Time (Delayed Sending)
7 Press (Start).
6 Enter the send time using –
(numeric keys), then press [OK].
–
–
Scanning starts if the original is placed in the feeder. The scanned data is stored in memory and sent to the specified destination at the specified send time.
To cancel scanning, press the left Any key to select <Cancel> or press (Stop).
8 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the original size, then press [OK].
–
–
Enter all four digits of the time (including zeros), using 24- hour notation.
Examples:
3:50 p.m.
→ 1550
To cancel to enter the time, press the left Any key to select <Cancel> to return to the previous screen.
9 Press (Start).
–
–
If you set a time earlier than the current time, the document will be sent at that time on the next day.
If you make a mistake when entering the send time, press (Clear) to clear your entry, then enter another four-digit number.
–
–
Scanning starts.
To cancel scanning, press the left Any key to select <Cancel> or press (Stop).
5-59
5-60
Sending Originals at a Preset Time (Delayed Sending)
10 Follow the instructions on the display, then press (Start) once for each original.
11 When scanning is complete, press the right Any key to select <Done>.
The scanned data is stored in memory and sent to the specified destination at the specified send time.
Direct Sending
Direct Sending
The machine sends each page of the document to the destination as it is scanned.
The default setting is <Off>.
–
–
–
–
–
If you do not select direct sending mode, memory sending mode is used.
With direct sending mode, you can send a document of two or more pages only when using the feeder. You can only send one page at a time when you place your original on the platen glass.
You can specify only one destination at a time for direct sending mode.
Memory sending is automatically set when using delayed sending or when multiple destinations are specified.
If an error occurs or you cancel transmission in the direct sending mode, you can check how many pages have been sent to the destination by printing the Activity Report, the Fax Activity Report, or on the <Log> for fax on the System Monitor screen.
1 Place your originals.
4 Specify a destination.
2 Press (Main Menu).
3 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Send/Fax>, then press [OK].
For details about how to specify destinations, see
“Specifying Destinations,” on p. 5-30.
5 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to display <Direct Send Settings>, then press [OK].
5-61
5-62
Direct Sending
6 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Off> or <On>, then press [OK].
9 Press (Start).
–
–
<Off>: Send after all pages are scanned.
<On>: Send each page as it is scanned.
7 Press (Start).
–
–
Scanning starts.
To cancel scanning, press the left Any key to select <Cancel> or press (Stop).
You can only send one page at a time when you place your original on the platen glass.
–
–
Scanning starts if the original is placed in the feeder, and the scanned data is sent to the specified destination when scanning is complete.
To cancel scanning, press the left Any key to select <Cancel> or press (Stop).
8 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the original size, then press [OK].
Favorites
You can set any possible combination of send settings and register them as favorites in memory. You can register up to 9 favorites. This feature is useful for registering frequently used send settings.
Favorites
–
–
–
The send settings registered as favorites in memory are not erased, even if the power is turned OFF.
If an address included in a favorites is deleted from the Address Book, it is also deleted from the settings registered in the favorites.
For details on how to send the documents, see “Basic Methods for Sending Faxes,” on p. 5-17.
Registering Favorites
You can register names for favorites from the Select Send Type Screen or register settings for favorites from the Send Settings screen.
The currently specified settings are registered for the favorites.
●
Regsterng Names for Favortes from the Select Send Type Screen
1
2
Press
Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲
(Main Menu).
] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Send/Fax>, then press [OK].
3 Press the left Any key to select
<Favorites>.
5-63
5-64
Favorites
4 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the favorites you want to register, then press the right Any key to select
<Register/Erase>.
6 Use the software keyboard to enter a name for favorites, then press the right
Any key to select <Set>.
You can also check the settings stored in the favorites by pressing the left Any key to select
<Details>. Press the right Any key to select
<Done> to return to the previous screen.
5 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Register Name>, then press [OK].
–
–
–
You can enter up to 16 characters for the name.
If you press <Set> without entering any characters, the key name reverts to its current name (default: M1 to M9).
For information on using the software
keyboard, see “Entering Characters,” on p. 1-19.
Favorites
●
Regsterng Favortes from the Send Settngs Screen
1 Press (Main Menu).
2 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Send/Fax>, then press [OK].
4 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to display <Register Favorites>, then press
[OK].
3 Specify a destination.
For details about how to specify destinations, see
“Specifying Destinations,” on p. 5-30.
The currently specified settings are registered for the favorites.
5 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the favorites you want to register, then press the right Any key to select
<Register/Erase>.
You can also check the settings stored in the favorites by pressing the left Any key to select
<Details>. Press the right Any key to select
<Done> to return to the previous screen.
5-65
5-66
Favorites
6 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Register Settings>, then press [OK].
9 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Register Name>, then press [OK].
7 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <No> or <Yes> or <Details>, then press [OK].
10 Use the software keyboard to enter a name for favorites, then press the right
Any key to select <Set>.
To store the current settings, select <Yes>.
To cancel storing the settings, select <No>.
If you select a key that has settings stored, select <Yes> to overwrite the previous settings.
You can check detail settings to select
<Details>.
8 Press the right Any key to select
<Register/Erase>.
–
–
–
You can enter up to 16 characters for the name.
If you press <Set> without entering any characters, the key name reverts to its current name (default: M1 to M9).
For information on using the software
keyboard, see “Entering Characters,” on p. 1-19.
Favorites
Erasing Favorites
You can erase the settings from the Select Send Type screen or from the Send Settings screen.
●
Erasng Favortes from the Select Send Type Screen
1 Press (Main Menu).
2 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel)) to select <Send/Fax>, then press [OK].
4 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the favorites you want to erase, then press the right Any key to select
<Register/Erase>.
3 Press the left Any key to select
<Favorites>.
–
–
You can only erase a key that has settings stored in the favorites.
You can also check the settings stored in the favorites by pressing the left Any key to select
<Details>. Press the right Any key to select
<Done> to return to the previous screen.
5-67
5-68
Favorites
5 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel)) to select <Erase>, then press [OK].
6 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Yes>, then press [OK].
Make sure to check the settings first before erasing them.
Key names are not erased. You can change the name in <Register Name>.
●
Erasng Favortes from the Send Settngs Screen
1 Press (Main Menu).
2 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Send/Fax>, then press [OK].
3 Specify a destination.
For details about how to specify destinations, see
“Specifying Destinations,” on p. 5-30.
4 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to display <Register Favorites>, then press
[OK].
Favorites
6 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Erase>, then press [OK].
5 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the favorites you want to erase, then press the right Any key to select
<Register/Erase>.
Make sure to check the settings first before erasing them.
7 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Yes>, then press [OK].
–
–
You can only erase a key with settings stored in the favorites.
You can also check the settings stored in the favorites by pressing the left Any key to select
<Details>. Press the right Any key to select
<Done> to return to the previous screen.
Key names are not erased. You can change the name in <Register Name>.
5-69
5-70
Favorites
Using the Favorites
If you frequently send documents with the same document settings to the same destination, store these settings in a favorites. Then, when you need to specify the destination, all you have to do is select the favorites containing your stored document settings and the desired destination, and send your document.
You can recall the settings from the Select Send Type screen.
–
–
For details on how to send the documents, see “Basic Methods for Sending Faxes,” on p. 5-17.
1 Press (Main Menu).
2 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Send/Fax>, then press [OK].
4 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the favorites you want to recall, then press [OK].
3 Press the left Any key to select
<Favorites>.
– If you select favorites that already has specified destinations, the Send Settings screen appears. You can change the send settings or add destinations at this time.
You can also check the settings stored in the favorites by pressing the left Any key to select
<Details>.
– If you select favorites that has no specified destinations, the Select Send Type screen appears. You can specify destinations.
To cancel all settings and return to the Select
Send Type screen, press (Reset).
Favorites
Checking Settings for Recalled Favorites
This mode enables you to check detail settings for favorites.
You can check the settings from the Select Send Type screen or from the Send Settings screen.
–
–
For details on how to send the documents, see “Basic Methods for Sending Faxes,” on p. 5-17.
●
Checkng Favortes from the Select Send Type Screen
1 Press (Main Menu).
2 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Send/Fax>, then press [OK].
4 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the favorites you want to check, then press the left Any key to select <Details>.
3 Press the left Any key to select
<Favorites>.
You can check detail settings. Press the right Any key to select <Done> to return to the previous screen.
5-71
5-72
Favorites
●
Checkng Favortes from the Send Settngs Screen
1 Press (Main Menu).
2 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Send/Fax>, then press [OK].
5 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the favorites you want to check, then press the left Any key to select <Details>.
3 Specify a destination.
You can check detail settings. Press the right Any key to select <Done> to return to the previous screen.
For details about how to specify destinations, see
“Specifying Destinations,” on p. 5-30.
4 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to display <Register Favorites >, then press
[OK].
Job Recall
Job Recall
You can recall the last three addresses, scan settings, and send settings which have been set in the <Log>, and then send your documents.
–
–
–
–
–
•
•
The settings such as destinations, scan settings and send settings are stored in a log. The actions below after you change settings are not recorded in a log:
Pressing the (Start) or (Reset) or
Activation of the Auto Clear mode.
(Main Menu).
• Turning OFF the machine.
Identical send settings are stored only once in recall memory.
If <Restrict New Addresses> in <Restrict the Send Function> in <System Management Set.> under <Additional Func.> is set to <On>, the addresses specified from the Address Book are only recalled.
The settings that were stored in memory are not erased even when the main power is turned OFF.
If <Restrict Sending From Log> in <Restrict the Send Function> in <System Management Set.> under <Additional Func.> is set to <On>, you cannot specify a destination using the <Log>. (See “Security,” in the e-Manual.)
1 Place your originals.
4 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Log>, then press [OK].
2 Press (Main Menu).
3 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Send/Fax>, then press [OK].
5 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Mode 1>, <Mode 2> or <Mode 3>, then press [OK].
You can check the recall settings by pressing the left Any key to select <Details>.
5-73
5-74
Job Recall
■ If you select a log in which a destination is stored:
The Send Settings screen appears.
① Confirm the settings.
6 Press (Start).
■ If you select a log in which a destination is not stored:
The Select Send Type screen appears.
① Specify a destination.
–
–
Scanning starts if the original is placed in the feeder, and the scanned data is sent to the specified destination when scanning is complete.
To cancel scanning, press the left Any key to select <Cancel> or press (Stop).
7 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the original size, then press [OK].
For details about how to specify destinations, see
“Specifying Destinations,” on p. 5-30.
8 Press (Start).
–
–
Scanning starts.
To cancel scanning, press the left Any key to select <Cancel> or press (Stop).
9 Follow the instructions on the display, then press (Start) once for each original.
10 When scanning is complete, press the right Any key to select <Done>.
The scanned data is sent to the specified destination.
Job Recall
5-75
5-76
ECM Transmission
ECM Transmission
ECM (Error Correction Mode) is a mode that automatically detects and corrects fax transmission errors resulting from telephone line noise. ECM reduces errors when sending faxes in a poor telephone line condition.
The default setting is <On>.
–
–
–
To communicate using ECM, make sure this mode is activated in both the sending and receiving machines. ECM transmissions are possible only when this mode is activated in both machines.
Even when ECM is activated, errors can sometimes occur due to a poor telephone line connection.
If there is trouble with the line, it will take more time to send the documents.
1 Press (Main Menu).
2 Press the right Any key to select
<Additional Func.>.
4 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Fax Settings>, then press [OK].
3 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Communications Settings>, then press
[OK].
5 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<TX Settings>, then press [OK].
6 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<ECM TX>, then press [OK].
7 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Off> or <On>, then press [OK].
–
–
<Off>: Does not use ECM.
<On>: Uses ECM.
8 Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
ECM Transmission
5-77
5-78
Adjusting the Pause Time
Adjusting the Pause Time
Some overseas dialing may be affected by the distance or complex routing of connections when dialing the international access code, country code, and the destination’s telephone number all at once. In such cases, insert a pause after the international access code. When the machine dials the number, it will pause where the pause was inserted in the number.
This helps to improve the connection.
The default setting is <2 Seconds>.
–
–
Pauses entered at the end of dialed fax numbers are always 10 seconds long.
1 Press (Main Menu).
2 Press the right Any key to select
<Additional Func.>.
4 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Fax Settings>, then press [OK].
3 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Communications Settings>, then press
[OK].
5 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<TX Settings>, then press [OK].
6 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Set Pause Time>, then press [OK].
7 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to set the pause time, then press [OK].
You can also use – (numeric keys) to set the pause time.
8 Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
Adjusting the Pause Time
5-79
5-80
Redialing Automatically When the Line Is Busy (Auto Redial)
Redialing Automatically When the Line Is
Busy (Auto Redial)
Auto Redial enables the machine to automatically redial the recipient’s fax number if the recipient cannot be reached due to a busy line, or if a sending error occurs.
Auto Redial can be turned on or off. If you set Auto Redial to on, you can set how many times the machine redials, the redial interval, and whether the document should be resent due to an error.
The default settings are as follows:
–
–
–
–
<Auto-redial>: On
<Redial Time>: 2 Times
<Redial Interval>: 2 Minutes
<TX Error Redial>: All Pages
1 Press (Main Menu).
2 Press the right Any key to select
<Additional Func.>.
3 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Communications Settings>, then press
[OK].
4 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Fax Settings>, then press [OK].
5 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<TX Settings>, then press [OK].
Redialing Automatically When the Line Is Busy (Auto Redial)
8 Press the right Any key to select
<Option>.
6 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Auto-redial>, then press [OK].
9 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Redial Times>, then press [OK].
7 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Off> or <On>, then press [OK].
10 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to set the number of redial times, then press
[OK].
–
–
<Off>: Does not redial automatically when a transmission fails. If you select <Off> and press [OK], go to step 15.
<On>: Redials automatically when a transmission fails. If you select <On> and press [OK], press [OK] again, then go to the next step.
You can also use – (numeric keys) to set the number of redial times.
5-81
5-82
Redialing Automatically When the Line Is Busy (Auto Redial)
11 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Redial Interval>, then press [OK].
14 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Off>, <All Pages>, or <Error and 1st
Page>, then press [OK].
12 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to set the redial interval, then press [OK].
You can also use – (numeric keys) to set the redial interval.
13 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<TX Error Redial>, then press [OK].
–
–
–
<Off>: Redialing does not take place if a sending error occurs.
<All Pages>: Auto Redial takes place if a sending error occurs. All pages of the document are resent.
<Error and 1st Page>: Auto Redial takes place if a sending error occurs. The first page of the document, the error page, and all subsequent pages are resent.
15 Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
Checking the Dial Tone before Sending
Checking the Dial Tone before Sending
The following redirection problem may happen with certain kinds of fax machines on the market made by companies other than Canon. The Check Tone Before Sending mode prevents this rare occurrence from happening.
If you are sending a fax document from your machine at the same time another fax machine
(made by a company other than Canon) is trying to send you a fax, your fax document may end up being redirected to that fax machine, instead of the original destination you had intended.
Setting <Check Tone Before Sending> to <On> enables you to avoid such sending problems.
The default setting is <On>.
1 Press (Main Menu).
2 Press the right Any key to select
<Additional Func.>.
4 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Fax Settings>, then press [OK].
3 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Communications Settings>, then press
[OK].
5 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<TX Settings>, then press [OK].
5-83
5-84
Checking the Dial Tone before Sending
6 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Check Tone Before Sending>, then press
[OK].
7 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Off> or <On>, then press [OK].
8 Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
Standard Send Settings
Standard Send Settings
This mode enables you to change the standard settings for the send function.
Storing the Standard Send Settings
You can store the standard send settings.
The default settings are as follows:
– <Resolution Settings>: 200 × 200 dpi
– <Density/Background Removal>: 0
– <Original Type>: Text
– <2-Sided Originals Settings>: Off
1 Press (Main Menu).
2 Press the right Any key to select
<Additional Func.>.
4 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Common Settings>, then press [OK].
3 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Communications Settings>, then press
[OK].
5 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<TX Settings>, then press [OK].
5-85
Standard Send Settings
6 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Change Send Func. Mode>, then press
[OK].
You do not need to specify <Color/File Format
Settings>. This setting is disabled when sending faxes.
9 Press the right Any key to select
<Register>.
7 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Register>, then press [OK].
8 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired setting item, then press [OK].
10 Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
5-86
You can specify the following settings:
– <Resolution Settings>: Adjusts the resolution
of originals. (See “Selecting Resolution,” on p. 5-50.)
– <Density/Background Removal>: Adjusts the density and the background color of originals.
(See “Adjusting Density,” on p. 5-51.)
–
–
<Original Type>: Adjusts the image quality of
originals. (See “Selecting Image Quality,” on p. 5-54.)
<2-Sided Originals Settings>: Scans two-sided
originals for sending. (See “2-Sided Original,” on p. 5-56.)
Standard Send Settings
Restoring the Standard Send Settings to Their Default
You can restore the standard send settings to their default settings.
All settings including <Color/File Format Settings> are restored to their default settings.
1 Press (Main Menu).
2 Press the right Any key to select
<Additional Func.>.
5 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<TX Settings>, then press [OK].
3 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Communications Settings>, then press
[OK].
6 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Change Send Func. Mode>, then press
[OK].
4 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Common Settings>, then press [OK].
7 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Initialize>, then press [OK].
5-87
5-88
Standard Send Settings
8 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<No> or <Yes>, then press [OK].
9 Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
Printing the TX Terminal ID
Printing the TX Terminal ID
The TX Terminal ID setting enables you to specify whether the Terminal ID information is printed at the top of every document that you send via fax. Information such as your fax number and name is printed, enabling the recipient to know who sent the document.
The default settings are as follows:
–
–
–
<TX Terminal ID>: On
<Printing Position>: Outside
<Telephone # Mark>: FAX
1 Press (Main Menu).
2 Press the right Any key to select
<Additional Func.>.
4 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Common Settings>, then press [OK].
3 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Communications Settings>, then press
[OK].
5 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<TX Settings>, then press [OK].
5-89
5-90
Printing the TX Terminal ID
6 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<TX Terminal ID>, then press [OK].
9 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Inside> or <Outside>, then press [OK].
7 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<On>, then press the right Any key to select <Option>.
–
–
<Inside>: The Terminal ID information is printed inside the image area on the recipient’s paper.
<Outside>: The Terminal ID information is printed outside the image area on the recipient’s paper.
10 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Telephone # Mark>, then press [OK].
8 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Printing Position>, then press [OK].
12 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<FAX> or <TEL>, then press [OK].
–
–
<FAX>: “FAX” is printed before the fax number.
<TEL>: “TEL” is printed before the telephone number.
13 Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
Printing the TX Terminal ID
5-91
5-92
Adjusting Sharpness
Adjusting Sharpness
This mode enables you to scan original images with a sharper or softer contrast.
The default setting is <0>.
1 Press (Main Menu).
2 Press the right Any key to select
<Additional Func.>.
4 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Common Settings>, then press [OK].
3 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Communications Settings>, then press
[OK].
5 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<TX Settings>, then press [OK].
6 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Sharpness>, then press [OK].
7 Use [ ◀ ], [ ▶ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to slide the indicator towards <Low> or <High>, then press [OK].
–
–
<Low>: To scan originals containing printed images or other halftones, the setting should be towards <Low>. This setting lessens the moiré effect (a shimmering, wavy pattern).
<High>: To scan text or lines clearly, the setting should be towards <High>. This setting is particularly suited for scanning blueprints and faint pencil drawn images.
8 Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
Adjusting Sharpness
5-93
5-94
Specifying What to Display on the Screen for a Send Operation
Specifying What to Display on the Screen for a Send Operation
This mode enables you to specify what screen is displayed for a send operation. When you select <Send/Fax> on the Main Menu screen and press [OK], the screen specified here is displayed for a send operation.
The default setting is <Default Screen>.
1 Press (Main Menu).
2 Press the right Any key to select
<Additional Func.>.
4 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Common Settings>, then press [OK].
3 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Communications Settings>, then press
[OK].
5 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<TX Settings>, then press [OK].
6 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Default Screen for Send>, then press
[OK].
Specifying What to Display on the Screen for a Send Operation
7 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the initial screen, then press [OK].
–
–
–
<Favorites>: The Set Favorites screen is displayed on the initial Send screen.
<One-touch>: The One-touch Selection/Clear screen is displayed on the initial Send screen.
<Default Screen>: The Select Send Type screen is displayed on the initial Send screen.
8 Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
5-95
5-96
Restoring the Send Function Settings to Their Default
Restoring the Send Function Settings to
Their Default
You can restore almost all of the Send Function Settings to their default settings.
1
You cannot initialize <Register Unit Name> and <Retry Times>. (<Retry Times> is disabled for the fax functions.)
Press (Main Menu).
2 Press the right Any key to select
<Additional Func.>.
4 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Common Settings>, then press [OK].
3 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Communications Settings>, then press
[OK].
5 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<TX Settings>, then press [OK].
6 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Initialize TX Settings>, then press [OK].
7 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<No> or <Yes>, then press [OK].
Restoring the Send Function Settings to Their Default
8 Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
5-97
5-98
Send Start Speed
Send Start Speed
This function enables you to change the send start speeds, which is useful when there is difficulty initiating the sending of a document.
The default setting is <33600 bps>.
1 Press (Main Menu).
2 Press the right Any key to select
<Additional Func.>.
4 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Communications Settings>, then press
[OK].
3 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<System Management Set.>, then press
[OK].
5 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Fax Settings>, then press [OK].
If the screen appears prompting you to enter the System Manager ID and System Password, enter the System Manager ID and System
Password using – (numeric keys), then press
(Log In/Out).
6 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Send Start Speed>, then press [OK].
7 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired start speed, then press [OK].
If your document transmission is slow in starting, this may mean that the telephone lines in your area are in poor condition. Select a slower speed. You can select <33600 bps>,
<14400 bps>, <9600 bps>, <7200 bps>, <4800 bps>, or <2400 bps>.
8 Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
Send Start Speed
5-99
5-100
Printing Received Documents on Both Sides of Paper
You can print received documents on both sides of the paper you select. This enables you to save paper.
The default setting is <Off>.
1 Press (Main Menu).
2 Press the right Any key to select
<Additional Func.>.
4 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Common Settings>, then press [OK].
3 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Communications Settings>, then press
[OK].
5 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<RX Settings>, then press [OK].
6 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<2-Sided Print>, then press [OK].
7 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Off> or <On>, then press [OK].
Printing Received Documents on Both Sides of Paper
8 Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
5-101
5-102
Reducing a Received Document
Reducing a Received Document
You can set the machine to automatically reduce received documents so that the whole document is printed within the printable area of the paper.
The default settings are as follows:
–
–
–
–
<Receive Reduction>: On
<RX Reduction>: Auto
<Reduce %>: 90%
<Reduce Direction>: Vertical Only
1 Press (Main Menu).
2 Press the right Any key to select
<Additional Func.>.
4 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Common Settings>, then press [OK].
3 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Communications Settings>, then press
[OK].
5 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<RX Settings>, then press [OK].
6 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Receive Reduction>, then press [OK].
Reducing a Received Document
9 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Auto> or <Fixed Reduction>.
7 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Off> or <On>.
–
–
<Auto>: The image is automatically reduced by a suitable reduction ratio. If you select
<Auto>, press [OK], then go to step 12.
<Fixed Reduction>: The image is reduced by the reduction ratio set for <Reduce %> in the next step. If you select <Fixed Reduction>, press [OK], then go to the next step.
10 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Reduce %>, then press [OK].
–
–
<Off>: Does not reduce received documents.
If you select <Off>, press [OK], then go to step
14.
<On>: Reduces received documents. If you select <On>, press the right Any key to select
<Set>, then go to the next step.
8 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<RX Reduction>, then press [OK].
11 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the reduction ratio, then press [OK].
5-103
5-104
Reducing a Received Document
12 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Reduce Direction>, then press [OK].
13 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Vertical and Horizontal> or <Vertical
Only>, then press [OK].
–
–
<Vertical and Horizontal>: The image is reduced in both the vertical and horizontal directions.
<Vertical Only>: The image is reduced in the vertical direction only.
14 Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
Printing Footer Information on a Received Document
Printing Footer Information on a Received
Document
You can set whether the machine prints the date, day, and time received, transaction number, and page number at the bottom of the received document.
The default setting is <Off>.
1 Press (Main Menu).
2 Press the right Any key to select
<Additional Func.>.
4 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Common Settings>, then press [OK].
3 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Communications Settings>, then press
[OK].
5 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<RX Settings>, then press [OK].
6 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Received Page Footer>, then press [OK].
5-105
5-106
Printing Footer Information on a Received Document
7 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Off> or <On>, then press [OK].
8 Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
Specifying the Way of Printing When Toner Is Low
Specifying the Way of Printing When Toner Is
Low
This function enables you to continue printing your current jobs when the toner is low.
The default setting is <Off>.
1
When <Toner Out Continuous Print> is set to <On>, the printed documents may be light or blurred because of lack of toner. The data is erased when the documents are printed out, so you cannot print the same documents again.
Press (Main Menu).
2 Press the right Any key to select
<Additional Func.>.
4 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Common Settings>, then press [OK].
3 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Communications Settings>, then press
[OK].
5 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<RX Settings>, then press [OK].
5-107
5-108
Specifying the Way of Printing When Toner Is Low
6 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Toner Out Continuous Print>, then press
[OK].
7 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Off> or <On>, then press [OK].
8 Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
ECM Reception
ECM Reception
ECM (Error Correction Mode) is a mode that automatically detects and corrects fax transmission errors resulting from telephone line noise. ECM reduces errors when receiving faxes in a poor telephone line condition.
The default setting is <On>.
–
–
–
To communicate using ECM, make sure this mode is activated in both the sending and receiving machines. ECM transmissions are possible only when this mode is activated in both machines.
Even when ECM is activated, errors can sometimes occur due to a poor telephone line connection.
If there is trouble with the line, it will take more time to receive the documents.
1 Press (Main Menu).
2 Press the right Any key to select
<Additional Func.>.
4 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Fax Settings>, then press [OK].
3 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Communications Settings>, then press
[OK].
5 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<RX Settings>, then press [OK].
5-109
5-110
ECM Reception
6 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<ECM RX>, then press [OK].
7 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Off> or <On>, then press [OK].
8 Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
Setting the Incoming Ring Tone
Setting the Incoming Ring Tone
This function enables you to activate the ring alert of the external telephone when the machine receives a fax or telephone call in the Auto RX or Fax/Tel Auto Switch mode.
The default settings are as follows:
–
–
<Incoming Ring>: On
<Ring Times>: 2 Times
Incoming calls or outgoing calls may not work properly, depending on the type of the external telephone connected to the machine.
1 Press (Main Menu).
2 Press the right Any key to select
<Additional Func.>.
4 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Fax Settings>, then press [OK].
3 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Communications Settings>, then press
[OK].
5 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<RX Settings>, then press [OK].
5-111
Setting the Incoming Ring Tone
6 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Incoming Ring>, then press [OK].
7 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Off> or <On>.
–
–
<Off>: Incoming tone does not ring. If you select <Off>, press [OK], then go to step 9.
<On>: Incoming tone rings. If you select
<On>, press [OK], then go to the next step.
8 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to set the number of ring times, then press [OK].
5-112
You can also use – (numeric keys) to set the number of ring times.
9 Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
Receiving Documents Manually with an External Telephone (Remote Reception)
Receiving Documents Manually with an
External Telephone (Remote Reception)
You can connect one external telephone to the machine.
When the telephone rings with the machine in the Manual RX mode, you can use the external telephone to start receiving the document without walking over to the machine.
Activating the Remote Reception
Follow this procedure to turn on the remote reception.
The default settings are as follows:
– <Remote RX>: On
– <Remote RX ID>: 25
1 Press (Main Menu).
2 Press the right Any key to select
<Additional Func.>.
4 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Fax Settings>, then press [OK].
3 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Communications Settings>, then press
[OK].
5 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<RX Settings>, then press [OK].
5-113
5-114
Receiving Documents Manually with an External Telephone (Remote Reception)
6 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Remote RX>, then press [OK].
8 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to enter a remote reception ID (a combination of two characters using 0 to 9), then press
[OK].
7 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<On>, then press [OK].
–
–
You can also use – (numeric keys) to enter a remote reception ID.
The default ID is 25. If you do not want to change the ID, press [OK] without entering any numbers.
9 Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
Receiving Documents with the Remote Reception
Follow this procedure to receive fax documents using the remote reception.
Before using the remote reception to receive fax documents, make sure the followings:
– An external telephone is connected properly.
– Your telephone is set to tone dialing.
1 When you receive a call, pick up the external telephone.
2 When you hear a beep, use the numeric keys to enter the two-digit remote reception ID to start reception.
If you hear someone on the line, you can start talking to the other party.
3 When the reception is complete, hang up the telephone.
Adjusting the Auto Switch Time for the Manual RX Mode
Adjusting the Auto Switch Time for the
Manual RX Mode
This function enables you to set the machine to switch to document receive mode after ringing for a specified length of time in the Manual RX mode.
The default setting is <Off>.
1 Press (Main Menu).
2 Press the right Any key to select
<Additional Func.>.
4 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Fax Settings>, then press [OK].
3 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Communications Settings>, then press
[OK].
5 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<RX Settings>, then press [OK].
6 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Manual/Auto Switch>, then press [OK].
5-115
5-116
Adjusting the Auto Switch Time for the Manual RX Mode
7 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<On>, then press [OK].
8 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to set the amount of time the machine waits before automatically switching to the document receive mode, then press [OK].
You can also use – (numeric keys) to set the time.
9 Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
Rejecting Incoming Faxes from the Unidentified Senders
Rejecting Incoming Faxes from the
Unidentified Senders
This function enables you to reject incoming faxes from senders who do not transmit their fax numbers (telephone numbers) to your machine. This can be useful when you do not want to receive direct mail (DM).
The default setting is <Off>.
1 Press (Main Menu).
2 Press the right Any key to select
<Additional Func.>.
4 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Fax Settings>, then press [OK].
3 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Communications Settings>, then press
[OK].
5 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<RX Settings>, then press [OK].
6 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<RX Restriction>, then press [OK].
5-117
5-118
Rejecting Incoming Faxes from the Unidentified Senders
7 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Off> or <On>, then press [OK].
–
–
<Off>: Does not reject to receive faxes from unknown senders.
<On>: Rejects to receive faxes from unknown senders.
8 Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
Receive Start Speed
Receive Start Speed
This function enables you to change the receive start speeds, which is useful when there is difficulty initiating the receiving of a document.
The default setting is <33600 bps>.
1 Press (Main Menu).
2 Press the right Any key to select
<Additional Func.>.
4 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Communications Settings>, then press
[OK].
3 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<System Management Set.>, then press
[OK].
5 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Fax Settings>, then press [OK].
If the screen appears prompting you to enter the System Manager ID and System Password, enter the System Manager ID and System
Password using – (numeric keys), then press
(Log In/Out).
6 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Receive Start Speed>, then press [OK].
5-119
5-120
Receive Start Speed
7 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired start speed, then press [OK].
If your document reception is slow in starting, this may mean that the telephone lines in your area are in poor condition. Select a slower speed. You can select <33600 bps>, <14400 bps>, <9600 bps>, <7200 bps>, <4800 bps>, or
<2400 bps>.
8 Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
Receiving Documents in Memory without Printing Out (Memory Lock Reception)
Receiving Documents in Memory without
Printing Out (Memory Lock Reception)
Normally a document prints as soon as you receive it. However, there may be occasions when you want the machine to store all documents in memory until you are ready to print them. Locking the machine to receive and store all documents in memory is called memory lock reception.
The default setting is <Off>.
1 Press (Main Menu).
2 Press the right Any key to select
<Additional Func.>.
4 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Communications Settings>, then press
[OK].
3 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<System Management Set.>, then press
[OK].
5 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Memory Lock Settings>, then press [OK].
If the Memory Lock Password has been set, enter the Memory Lock Password using –
(numeric keys), then press [OK].
If the screen appears prompting you to enter the System Manager ID and System Password, enter the System Manager ID and System
Password using – (numeric keys), then press
(Log In/Out).
5-121
5-122
Receiving Documents in Memory without Printing Out (Memory Lock Reception)
6 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Off> or <On>.
–
–
–
You cannot store a password that only consists of zeros, such as <0000000>.
If you enter fewer than seven digits, the machine stores the password with leading zeros.
Example: If <02> or <002> is entered,
<0000002> is stored.
If you make a mistake when entering the password, press (Clear), then enter the correct password.
–
–
<Off>: Does not use the memory lock reception mode. If you select <Off>, press
[OK], then go to step 12.
<On>: Uses the memory lock reception mode. If you select <On>, press the right Any key to select <Option>, then go to the next step.
7 If you want to set or change a password for the Memory Lock mode, enter a password (up to seven digits) using
– (numeric keys), then press [OK].
8 Set the machine to print an RX report or not.
If you want to print an RX report when receiving documents, use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <On>, then press [OK].
If you do not want to print an RX report, select
<Off>, then press [OK].
If you set a password, it will be necessary to enter the password whenever you want to change the Memory Lock mode settings, or cancel the Memory Lock mode.
If you do not want to set the Memory Lock with a password, press [OK] without entering any numbers.
If you want to print an RX report, you need also to set <RX Report> to <On>. (See “Introduction of the Machine,” in the e-Manual.)
Receiving Documents in Memory without Printing Out (Memory Lock Reception)
9 Set the time for the machine to enter and leave the Memory Lock mode.
11 Specify the time (in 24-hour/military time format) for the machine to leave the
Memory Lock mode using –
(numeric keys), then press [OK].
If you want to specify the Memory Lock Time settings, use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Specify>, then press [OK].
If you do not want to specify the Memory Lock
Time settings, select <No>, select <Do Not
Specify>, then press [OK]. Go to step 12.
If <Do Not Specify> is selected, the Memory
Lock mode will not start automatically at a specified time. The machine enters the Memory
Lock mode only when you manually set the
Memory Lock mode to <On> in step 6.
10 Specify the time (in 24-hour/military time format) for the machine to enter the
Memory Lock mode using –
(numeric keys), then press [OK].
–
–
If you make a mistake when entering the time, press (Clear) to clear your entry, then enter another four digit number.
If you set the same time for Memory Lock Start
Time and Memory Lock End Time, the machine will be in the Memory Lock mode through the entire day.
12 Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
If you make a mistake when entering the time, press (Clear) to clear your entry, then enter another four digit number.
5-123
5-124
Printing All Documents Stored in the Memory Lock Reception Mode
Printing All Documents Stored in the
Memory Lock Reception Mode
Follow this procedure to print documents received when the machine is in the memory lock reception mode.
1 Press (Main Menu).
2 Press the right Any key to select
<Additional Func.>.
4 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Communications Settings>, then press
[OK].
3 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<System Management Set.>, then press
[OK].
5 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Memory Lock Settings>, then press [OK].
If the Memory Lock Password has been set, enter the Memory Lock Password using –
(numeric keys), then press [OK].
If the screen appears prompting you to enter the System Manager ID and System Password, enter the System Manager ID and System
Password using – (numeric keys), then press
(Log In/Out).
6 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Off>, then press [OK].
Printing All Documents Stored in the Memory Lock Reception Mode
The received documents are printed.
7 Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
5-125
Forwarding Received Fax Documents to a Computer or Fax Machine
Forwarding Received Fax Documents to a
Computer or Fax Machine
This machine enables you to automatically forward received fax documents to a prespecified destination. You can specify the desired forwarding destination to suit your needs, as shown below.
5-126
When you are forwarding the received documents to a specified destination, you can also specify a condition such as “Only the fax documents sent from a specific fax number are to be forwarded” to sort the received documents automatically.
–
–
–
The maximum number of forwarding settings that you can store is 52 (12 for the Color imageCLASS MF9220Cdn): 50 (10 for the Color imageCLASS MF9220Cdn) with forwarding conditions and 2 without conditions.
Forwarding Documents,” on p. 5-141.)
If a forwarding error occurs when <Print Image> and <Memory Lock Settings> are set to <Off> and <Store Image to
Memory> is set to <Do Not Store>, the received documents will be lost.
Forwarding Received Fax Documents to a Computer or Fax Machine
Before Specifying the Forwarding Settings
The necessary settings before forwarding received fax documents are as follows.
5-127
Forwarding Received Fax Documents to a Computer or Fax Machine
5-128
Specifying Forwarding Settings
This section describes how to register, erase, print, check, and change the forwarding settings.
●
Storng Forwardng Settngs
You can register the forwarding conditions and the forwarding destinations. If the machine receives fax documents matching the registered conditions, the documents are automatically sent to the specified destination. You can also specify forwarding destinations for received documents that do not match the forwarding conditions.
To be able to forward received documents, you need to specify the forwarding settings in this section, then
activate the settings. (See “Activating the Registered Forwarding Settings,” on p. 5-135.)
1 Press (Main Menu).
2 Press the right Any key to select
<Additional Func.>.
Forwarding Received Fax Documents to a Computer or Fax Machine
5 Press the left Any key to select <Menu>.
3 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<System Management Set.>, then press
[OK].
6 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Register>, then press [OK].
If the screen appears prompting you to enter the System Manager ID and System Password, enter the System Manager ID and System
Password using – (numeric keys), then press
(Log In/Out).
4 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Forwarding Settings>, then press [OK].
7 Use the software keyboard to enter a name for the forwarding condition, then press the right Any key to select <Set>.
For information on using the software keyboard,
see “Entering Characters,” on p. 1-19.
5-129
Forwarding Received Fax Documents to a Computer or Fax Machine
8 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Fax>, then press [OK].
10 Enter the forwarding criterion (up to 20 characters) using – (numeric keys), then press the right Any key to select
<Register>.
5-130
9 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the forwarding condition, then press [OK].
The following items are also available for entering the forwarding criterion:
– <Space>: Inserts a space between numbers.
– <+>: Use to insert a country code. Use <+> after the country code, and before the fax number.
– <Backspace>: Deletes the last number entered.
11 Press the right Any key to select <Next>.
The available forwarding conditions are:
– <disregard>: Disregards the Fax Number information as a forwarding condition.
– <Does Not Exist>: Forwards the document if the Fax Number information does not exist.
–
–
<equals>: Forwards the document if the Fax
Number information matches all of the characters entered.
<differs from>: Forwards the document if the
Fax Number information differs from the characters entered.
–
–
<begins with>: Forwards the document if the
Fax Number information begins with the characters entered.
<ends with>: Forwards the document if the
Fax Number information ends with the characters entered.
–
–
<contains>: Forwards the document if the Fax
Number information contains the characters entered.
<does not contain>: Forwards the document if the Fax Number information does not contain the characters entered.
If you select <disregard> or <Does Not Exist>, go to step 11.
12 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the forwarding destination, then press
[OK].
Forwarding Received Fax Documents to a Computer or Fax Machine
14 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the file format of the document you want to forward.
–
–
<TIFF>: Forwards the file in the TIFF format.
<PDF>: Forwards the file in the PDF format.
–
–
–
–
You cannot select multiple destinations at the same time. To forward to multiple destinations, select a group address.
You can use [ ◀ ] or [ ▶ ] to restrict the displayed range of destinations.
To be able to select a forwarding destination, it is necessary to register destinations in the
Address Book beforehand. (See “Storing/Editing
To cancel a selected destination, select the destination again.
13 Press the right Any key to select <Set>.
–
–
–
This procedure is not necessary if a fax number is specified as the destination in step 12. Go to step 17.
To view a TIFF file, a software application that supports the TIFF format (such as Imaging for
Windows) is required.
To view a PDF file, Adobe Reader/Adobe
Acrobat Reader is required.
15 Press the right Any key to select <Divide
Pages>.
5-131
5-132
Forwarding Received Fax Documents to a Computer or Fax Machine
16 If you want to separate multiple images and send them as separate files, each of which consists of only one page, use [ ▼ ],
[ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <On>, then press [OK] twice.
17 Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
If you want to send multiple images as a single file without dividing them, use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or
(Scroll Wheel) to select <Off>, then press [OK] twice.
●
When Forwardng Destnatons Do Not Match the Forwardng Condtons
You can store the forwarding destinations of a received document if the forwarding settings of the received document are not registered, or if the received document does not match all of the forwarding conditions that you have specified.
–
–
Forwarding destinations can be stored one at a time, according to the receive type of the received document.
Forwarding Settings,” on p. 5-135.)
1 Press (Main Menu).
2 Press the right Any key to select
<Additional Func.>.
3 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<System Management Set.>, then press
[OK].
Forwarding Received Fax Documents to a Computer or Fax Machine
6 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Forward w/o Condition>, then press
[OK].
If the screen appears prompting you to enter the System Manager ID and System Password, enter the System Manager ID and System
Password using – (numeric keys), then press
(Log In/Out).
4 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Forwarding Settings>, then press [OK].
7 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Fax>, then press [OK].
5 Press the left Any key to select <Menu>.
8 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the forwarding destination, then press
[OK].
5-133
Forwarding Received Fax Documents to a Computer or Fax Machine
–
–
–
–
You cannot select multiple destinations at the same time. To forward to multiple destinations, select a group address.
You can use [ ◀ ] or [ ▶ ] to restrict the displayed range of destinations.
To be able to select a forwarding destination, it is necessary to register destinations in the
Address Book beforehand. (See “Storing/Editing
To cancel a selected destination, select the destination again.
9 Press the right Any key to select <Set>.
–
–
–
This procedure is not necessary if a fax number is specified as the destination in step 8. Go to step 13.
To view a TIFF file, a software application that supports the TIFF format (such as Imaging for
Windows) is required.
To view a PDF file, Adobe Reader/Adobe
Acrobat Reader is required.
11 Press the right Any key to select <Divide
Pages>.
10 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the file format of the document you want to forward.
12 If you want to separate multiple images and send them as separate files, each of which consists of only one page, use [ ▼ ],
[ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <On>, then press [OK] twice.
5-134
–
–
<TIFF>: Forwards the file in the TIFF format.
<PDF>: Forwards the file in the PDF format.
If you want to send multiple images as a single file without dividing them, use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or
(Scroll Wheel) to select <Off>, then press [OK] twice.
13 Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
Forwarding Received Fax Documents to a Computer or Fax Machine
●
Actvatng the Regstered Forwardng Settngs
You can set whether received documents are forwarded.
1 Press (Main Menu).
2 Press the right Any key to select
<Additional Func.>.
5 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired forwarding setting, then press
[OK].
3 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<System Management Set.>, then press
[OK].
Each time you press [OK], the icon status displayed on the left side of the condition name is switched.
– < >: The received document is forwarded to the specified destination if it matches the forwarding conditions.
– < >: The received document is not forwarded to the specified destination even if it matches the forwarding conditions.
6 Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
If the screen appears prompting you to enter the System Manager ID and System Password, enter the System Manager ID and System
Password using – (numeric keys), then press
(Log In/Out).
4 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Forwarding Settings>, then press [OK].
5-135
5-136
Forwarding Received Fax Documents to a Computer or Fax Machine
●
Erasng Forwardng Settngs
You can erase forwarding settings that have been stored.
1 Press (Main Menu).
2 Press the right Any key to select
<Additional Func.>.
5 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the forwarding setting you want to erase.
3 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<System Management Set.>, then press
[OK].
6 Press the left Any key to select <Menu>.
If the screen appears prompting you to enter the System Manager ID and System Password, enter the System Manager ID and System
Password using – (numeric keys), then press
(Log In/Out).
4 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Forwarding Settings>, then press [OK].
7 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Erase>, then press [OK].
Forwarding Received Fax Documents to a Computer or Fax Machine
8 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<No> or <Yes>, then press [OK].
9 Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
●
Prntng Forwardng Settngs
You can print a list of the stored forwarding settings.
1 Press (Main Menu).
2 Press the right Any key to select
<Additional Func.>.
3 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<System Management Set.>, then press
[OK].
If the screen appears prompting you to enter the System Manager ID and System Password, enter the System Manager ID and System
Password using – (numeric keys), then press
(Log In/Out).
4 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Forwarding Settings>, then press [OK].
5-137
Forwarding Received Fax Documents to a Computer or Fax Machine
5 Press the left Any key to select <Menu>.
7 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<No> or <Yes>, then press [OK].
6 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Print List>, then press [OK].
8 Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
5-138
●
Checkng/Changng Forwardng Settngs
You can check or change forwarding settings that have been stored.
1 Press (Main Menu).
2 Press the right Any key to select
<Additional Func.>.
3 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<System Management Set.>, then press
[OK].
If the screen appears prompting you to enter the System Manager ID and System Password, enter the System Manager ID and System
Password using – (numeric keys), then press
(Log In/Out).
4 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Forwarding Settings>, then press [OK].
Forwarding Received Fax Documents to a Computer or Fax Machine
8 Check or change the forwarding settings.
5 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the forwarding setting you want to check or change.
For instructions on changing forwarding
settings, see “Storing Forwarding Settings,” on p. 5-128.
9 Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
6 Press the left Any key to select <Menu>.
7 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Details/Edit>, then press [OK].
5-139
5-140
Forwarding Received Fax Documents to a Computer or Fax Machine
Sending Documents in Memory to a Different Destination
You can redirect the fax documents received in memory to the specified destination.
1 Press (Status Monitor/Cancel).
2 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Fax>, then press [OK].
5 Press the left Any key to select <Details>.
3 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Received Job Status>, then press [OK].
6 Press the left Any key to select
<Forward>.
4 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the job you want to transfer.
7 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the destination, then press the right Any key to select <Start>.
–
–
–
You can use [ ◀ ] or [ ▶ ] to restrict the displayed range of destinations.
To be able to select a forwarding destination, it is necessary to register destinations in the
Address Book beforehand. (See “Storing/Editing
You cannot select a group address.
Forwarding Received Fax Documents to a Computer or Fax Machine
8 Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
Handling Forwarding Documents
You can set how the machine handles the documents to be forwarded.
The default settings are as follows:
– <Print Image>: On
– <Store Image to Memory>: Do Not Store
–
–
–
When <Print Image> and <Memory Lock Settings> are set to <Off> and <Store Image to Memory> is set to <Do Not Store>, the received documents will be lost if a forwarding error occurs.
If <Memory Lock Settings> is set to <On>, forwarded documents or those with forwarding errors are not printed even if <Print
Image> is set to <On> or <Only When Error Occurs>. They are printed when <Memory Lock Settings> is set to <Off>.
When <Print Image> is set to <On> or <Only When Error Occurs>, the first page of a document with forwarding errors will be printed on the Error TX Report if it is set to be printed with image in <Report Settings>, even if <Memory Lock Settings> is set to <On>. For information on Report Settings, see “Introduction of the Machine,” in the e-Manual.
1 Press (Main Menu).
2 Press the right Any key to select
<Additional Func.>.
3 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<System Management Set.>, then press
[OK].
If the screen appears prompting you to enter the System Manager ID and System Password, enter the System Manager ID and System
Password using – (numeric keys), then press
(Log In/Out).
5-141
Forwarding Received Fax Documents to a Computer or Fax Machine
4 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Store/Print When Fwding.>, then press
[OK].
7 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Store Image to Memory>, then press
[OK].
5-142
5 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Print Image>, then press [OK].
8 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Do Not Store> or <Only When Error
Occurs>, then press [OK].
6 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Off>, <On>, or <Only When Error
Occurs>, then press [OK].
–
–
<Do Not Store>: Does not store the image.
<Only When Error Occurs>: Stores the image in memory if forwarding fails.
–
–
–
<Off >: Does not print the image.
<On>: Prints all the images that has been forwarded.
<Only When Error Occurs>: Prints the image only when forwarding has failed.
If you set <Store Image to Memory> to <Only
When Error Occurs>, you can resend the jobs with forwarding errors to registered destinations in the
Address Book. (See “Resending Documents with
Forwarding Errors,” on p. 5-143.)
9 Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
Forwarding Received Fax Documents to a Computer or Fax Machine
Resending Documents with Forwarding Errors
You can resend the fax documents that the machine failed to forward.
Documents with forwarding errors are stored in memory only if <Store Image to Memory> is set to <Only When Error Occurs> in
1 Press (Status Monitor/Cancel).
2 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Fax>, then press [OK].
4 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the job you want to transfer.
3 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Forwarding Error Status>, then press
[OK].
5 Press the right Any key to select <Menu>.
6 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Forward>, then press [OK].
5-143
5-144
Forwarding Received Fax Documents to a Computer or Fax Machine
7 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the destination, then press the right Any key to select <Start>.
–
–
–
–
You can use [ ◀ ] or [ ▶ ] to restrict the displayed range of destinations.
To be able to select a forwarding destination, it is necessary to register destinations in the
Address Book beforehand. (See “Storing/Editing
If the transfer is successful, the document is erased from memory.
You cannot select a group address for transferring the document.
8 Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
Checking/Changing the Status of Documents with Forwarding Errors
You can check the details of fax documents that the machine failed to forward. You can also erase and print those documents.
Documents with forwarding errors are stored in memory only if <Store Image to Memory> is set to <Only When Error Occurs> in
1 Press (Status Monitor/Cancel).
2 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Fax>, then press [OK].
3 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Forwarding Error Status>, then press
[OK].
■ If you want to check the details of documents with forwarding errors:
① Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the job you want to check.
Forwarding Received Fax Documents to a Computer or Fax Machine
■ If you want to erase a document with a forwarding error:
① Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the job you want to erase.
② Press the right Any key to select <Menu>.
② Press the right Any key to select <Menu>.
③ Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Details>, then press [OK].
③ Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Erase>, then press [OK].
④ Check the details of the selected job, then press the right Any key to select <Done>.
5-145
5-146
Forwarding Received Fax Documents to a Computer or Fax Machine
④ Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<No> or <Yes>, then press [OK].
③ Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Print>, then press [OK].
④ Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<No> or <Yes>, then press [OK].
To erase multiple documents from memory, select and erase one document at a time.
■ If you want to print a document with a forwarding error:
① Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the job you want to print.
② Press the right Any key to select <Menu>.
To print multiple document, select and print one document at a time.
4 Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
Checking/Changing the Status of Fax Documents in Memory
Checking/Changing the Status of Fax
Documents in Memory
The System Monitor screen enables you to view and change the status of fax documents in memory.
Checking/Deleting Fax Transmission Documents
You can check the detailed information of fax documents currently being sent or waiting to be sent, then delete unwanted documents as necessary.
1 Press (Status Monitor/Cancel).
2 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Fax>, then press [OK].
4 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the job whose detailed information you want to check, then press the left Any key to select <Details>.
3 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Send Job Status>, then press [OK].
5 Check the details of the selected job.
5-147
Checking/Changing the Status of Fax Documents in Memory
■ If you want to erase the selected job:
① Press the right Any key to select <Done>, then go to the next step.
7 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<No> or <Yes>, then press [OK].
■ If you complete this procedure:
① Go to step 8.
6 Make sure that the job you want to erase is selected, then press the right Any key to select <Cancel>.
8 Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
5-148
Checking/Deleting Fax Reception Documents
You can check the detailed information of the fax documents currently being received or fax documents that have been received in memory. If the documents are unwanted, you can delete them as necessary. In addition, documents that have been received in memory can be forwarded to a specified destination.
1 Press (Status Monitor/Cancel). 2 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Fax>, then press [OK].
3 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Received Job Status>, then press [OK].
Checking/Changing the Status of Fax Documents in Memory
■ If you want to erase the selected job:
① Press the right Any key to select <Done>, then go to the next step.
4 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the job whose detailed information you want to check, then press the left Any key to select <Details>.
5 Check the details of the selected job.
■ If you complete this procedure:
① Go to step 8.
You can forward the selected job to another destination by pressing the left Any key to select
<Forward>. For information on forwarding
received documents, see “Sending Documents in
Memory to a Different Destination,” on p. 5-140.
6 Make sure that the job you want to erase is selected, then press the right Any key to select <Erase>.
–
–
–
To erase multiple documents from memory, select and erase one document at a time.
You cannot erase a document that is being printed.
If you select a document that is being received,
<Erase> changes to <Cancel>, enabling you to cancel receiving the document.
5-149
5-150
Checking/Changing the Status of Fax Documents in Memory
7 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<No> or <Yes>, then press [OK].
8 Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
Checking/Printing the Fax Log
You can view or print the results of fax transactions that list all faxes sent or received.
1 Press (Status Monitor/Cancel).
2 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Fax>, then press [OK].
3 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Log>, then press [OK].
If <Job Log Display> in <System Management
Set.> is set to <Off>, <Log> is not displayed.
4 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the job whose detailed information you want to check, then press the left Any key to select <Details>.
Checking/Changing the Status of Fax Documents in Memory
7 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<No> or <Yes>, then press [OK].
5 Check the details of the selected job, then press the right Any key to select <Done>.
8 Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
6 If you want to print a list of transaction results, press the right Any key to select
<Print List>.
If you do not want to print the list, go to step 8.
5-151
5-152
Checking/Changing the Status of Fax Documents in Memory
This chapter describes how to use e-mail functions.
Overview of E-Mail Functions .....................................6-2
Introduction to Using E-Mail Functions .....................6-4
Basic E-Mail Operations ..............................................6-5
Sending E-Mail Documents .............................................6-5
Canceling Sending E-Mail Documents ........................6-7
Chapter
6
6-2
Overview of E-Mail Functions
Overview of E-Mail Functions
You can send scanned documents as e-mail attachments.
You can also print out received e-mail messages.
Overview of E-Mail Functions
6-3
6-4
Intrduction to Using E-Mail Functions
Introduction to Using E-Mail Functions
This machine enables you to send scanned documents to an e-mail application. Scanned documents are converted to file formats such as TIFF and are transmitted as an e-mail attachment to the recipient’s e-mail application.
The necessary settings before using the scan to E-mail and I-fax function is as follows.
● Network settings
Connect the network cable and set the IP address to enable your machine to communicate over the
● network. For details, see “Network Settings,” in the e-Manual.
E-mail settings
Check the required information and set up the machine. For details, see “Network Settings,” in the e-Manual.
Basic E-Mail Operations
Basic E-Mail Operations
This section describes the basic procedures for sending e-mails and canceling a transmission in progress.
If you select a file format for color from the <Color/File Format Settings>, you will not be able to consecutively scan multiple-page originals from the platen glass. If you want to consecutively scan multiple-page originals using a file format for color, use the feeder instead.
Sending E-Mail Documents
This section describes the flow of sending e-mails.
1 Place your originals.
4 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Enter E-mail (New)>, then press [OK].
2 Press (Main Menu).
3 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Send/Fax>, then press [OK].
5 Use the software keyboard to enter the e-mail address, then press the right Any key to select <Set>.
–
–
You can enter up to 120 characters for the email address.
For information on using the software
keyboard, see “Entering Characters,” on p. 1-19.
6-5
6-6
Basic E-Mail Operations
6 Make the scan settings you require.
7 Press (Start).
You can specify the following settings:
– <Color/File Format Settings>: Specifies the color type of originals and the file format for sending. (See “E-mail,” in the e-Manual.)
–
–
<Resolution Settings>: Adjusts the resolution of originals. (See “E-mail,” in the e-Manual.)
<Density/Background Rem. Set.>: Adjusts the density and the background color of originals.
(See “E-mail,” in the e-Manual.)
–
–
–
–
<Original Image Quality Settings>: Adjusts the image quality of originals. (See “E-mail,” in the e-Manual.)
<2-Sided Orig. Orientation Set.>: Scans two-sided originals for sending. (See “E-mail,” in the e-Manual.)
<Delayed TX Settings>: Specifies the transmission time. (See “E-mail,” in the e-Manual.)
<Send Document Name Settings>: Sets the name of the document for sending. (See
“E-mail,” in the e-Manual.)
–
–
–
–
<Subject/Message Settings>: Sets your e-mail subject and message. (See “E-mail,” in the e-Manual.)
<Reply-to Settings>: Sets the reply address to your e-mail. (See “E-mail,” in the e-Manual.)
<E-mail Priority Settings>: Sets your e-mail priority. (See “E-mail,” in the e-Manual.)
<Register Favorites>: Stores frequently used send settings for future use. (See “E-mail,” in the e-Manual.)
–
–
Scanning starts if the original is placed in the feeder, and the scanned data is sent to the specified destination when scanning is complete.
To cancel scanning, press the left Any key to select <Cancel> or press (Stop).
8 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the original size, then press [OK].
9 Press (Start).
–
–
Scanning starts.
To cancel scanning, press the left Any key to select <Cancel> or press (Stop).
10 Follow the instructions on the display, then press (Start) once for each original.
Basic E-Mail Operations
11 When scanning is complete, press the right Any key to select <Done>.
The scanned data is sent to the specified destination.
Canceling Sending E-Mail Documents
Follow this procedure to cancel a transmission in progress.
1 Press (Status Monitor/Cancel) during transmission.
2 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Send/Store>, then press [OK].
3 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Send Job Status>, then press [OK].
6-7
6-8
Basic E-Mail Operations
4 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the job you want to cancel, then press the right Any key to select <Cancel>.
5 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<No> or <Yes>, then press [OK].
6 Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
Printing
This chapter describes the basic print features.
Overview of Print Functions .......................................7-2
Introduction to Using Print Functions .......................7-4
Printing Documents from Computer .........................7-6
Scaling Documents ......................................................7-8
Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet .....................7-10
2-Sided Printing .........................................................7-11
Printing from Memory Media (Direct Print) ............7-12
Memory Media Supported by This Machine .......... 7-12
Data Supported by This Machine................................ 7-13
Inserting Memory Media ............................................... 7-14
Removing Memory Media ............................................. 7-15
Printing from Memory Media ....................................... 7-15
Checking and Canceling Print Jobs/Checking Print
Logs ............................................................................7-27
Checking Print Jobs ......................................................... 7-27
Canceling Print Jobs ........................................................ 7-28
Checking Print Logs ......................................................... 7-29
Chapter
7
7-1
Overview of Print Functions
Overview of Print Functions
You can print on both sides of paper or use the mode that reduces multiple pages to fit onto one sheet of paper. You can also print out data from a memory medium inserted into the slot of the machine.
7-2
20XX.12.01
20XX.12.03
Overview of Print Functions
7-3
Introduction to Using Print Functions
Introduction to Using Print Functions
Normally, the series of operations involved in printing data from a computer is specified by control commands generated using a printer driver. Control commands are a command system for controlling a printer. For example, when printing using a printer driver, control commands print data according to the following flow.
7-4
① Using a printer driver, data to be printed is converted to control commands.
② Control command data is sent to the machine.
③ Following the received control commands, the machine processes and prints the data.
To print in the following printer modes, a Printer Driver supported by this machine must be installed.
For installing the driver to send a print job to the machine over a network, see “Network
Connection” in the Starter Guide.
For installing the driver to send a print job directly from your Computer to the machine, see
“USB Connection” in the Starter Guide.
●
UFRII LT Mode
UFR (Ultra Fast Rendering) is printing technology developed by Canon. High-speed printing is made possible by sharing the processing of print data normally done by the machine with the computer.
●
PCL Mode
PCL (Print Control Language), developed by Hewlett-Packard, is a command system for controlling page printers. Command versions supported by this machine are PCL5c and PCL6.
●
PS Mode
PS (PostScript), developed by Adobe Systems, is a page description language renowned for its use in desktop publishing and publishing on demand. The version supported by this machine is PS3.
Introduction to Using Print Functions
–
–
–
–
The PCL and PS printing functions are available only for the Color imageCLASS MF9280Cdn.
The available printer drivers may vary, depending on the machine and the version of Windows that you are using.
If you are using a shared printer in the Print Server (Point and Print) environment, it is necessary to install the Canon Driver Information
Assist Service in the server computer in order to set up the printer configuration automatically or to use Department ID Management.
For instructions on how to install the Canon Driver Information Assist Service, see “Set Up Computers and Software” in the Starter Guide.
Most settings of printing are made from the printer driver. Although there are some settings which can be made from the machine, the settings from the printer driver has priority.
7-5
Printing Documents from Computer
Printing Documents from Computer
This section is the explanation of the basic procedure for printing from the computer
(printer driver). Make sure that the printer driver is installed on your computer. To check if the driver is installed, see “Set Up Computers and Software,” in the Starter Guide. For details on the printer driver settings, see Online Help.
–
–
–
–
Printing methods may differ depending on the applications you are using. For details, see the instruction manuals provided with the application software.
The display may differ according to the operating system, as well as the type and version of the printer driver.
If you are using a shared printer in the Print Server (Point and Print) environment, it is necessary to install the Canon Driver
Information Assist Service in the server computer in order to set up the printer configuration automatically or to use
Department ID Management. For instructions on how to install the Canon Driver Information Assist Service, see “Set Up
Computers and Software” in the Starter Guide.
The machine may not be able to print data such as color photos if the data size of a single page is too large. If such is the case, reduce the data size by lowering the resolution or by changing the file format.
1 Open the document you want to print from the application.
2 Select [Print] from the [File] menu.
3 Select your printer, then click
[Preferences].
7-6
The printer driver screen is displayed.
The procedure to display the printer driver screen may differ depending on the applications you are using.
4 Configure the required settings in the printer driver screen, then click [OK].
Printing Documents from Computer
5 Click [Print].
The name of the button to start printing may vary depending on the application you are using.
Printing begins.
7-7
7-8
Scaling Documents
Scaling Documents
You can enlarge or reduce documents to match the output paper size, such as reducing a document created in LTR size to print on STMT, or enlarging a document created in STMT size to print on LTR.
There are two methods for scaling a document: select the output size of the document to scale it automatically, or specify the scaling value manually.
–
–
–
–
–
Depending on the selected page size and printer model you are using, you may not be able to magnify the document.
Depending on the printer model you are using, you may not be able to magnify the document to the optimum ratio for the selected page size.
If you are using an application that enables you to enlarge or reduce the document, configure the settings in the application.
The display may differ according to the operating system, as well as the type and version of the printer driver.
Most settings of printing are made from the printer driver. Although there are some settings which can be made from the machine, the settings from the printer driver has priority.
1 Display the [Page Setup] sheet.
2 Select page size of the document you created in the application from [Page
Size].
3 Select output size of the document from
[Output Size].
The document is scaled automatically according to the settings made in [Page Size] and [Output
Size].
4 If you want to increase or decrease the magnification manually, select [Manual
Scaling] → specify the scaling ratio for
[Scaling].
Scaling Documents
If the ratio is less than 25% or more than 200%, the document is printed without scaling on the paper specified in [Output Size].
5 Click [OK].
7-9
7-10
Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet
Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet
This mode enables you to reduce multiple pages to fit onto one sheet of paper. You can make well-organized documents by editing multiple materials onto one sheet. And you can cut down print costs by saving papers, and it is also useful for saving space.
–
–
–
–
Although there may be a function for printing multiple copies depending on the application you are using, do not used it together with this function. If you do, printing may not be executed correctly.
You cannot enlarge and reduce manually when using this function.
The display may differ according to the operating system, as well as the type and version of the printer driver.
Most settings of printing are made from the printer driver. Although there are some settings which can be made from the machine, the settings from the printer driver has priority.
1 Display the [Page Setup] sheet.
3 Select the page order from [Page Order].
2 Select the page layout from [Page
Layout].
4 Click [OK].
2-Sided Printing
2-Sided Printing
This mode enables you to make two-sided printing. You can cut down print costs by half when copying in large quantities.
–
–
–
The page sizes for which two-sided printing is available differ according to printer model. For details, click [Help] in the bottom right-hand corner of the printer driver window to view the Online Help.
The display may differ according to the operating system, as well as the type and version of the printer driver.
Most settings of printing are made from the printer driver. Although there are some settings which can be made from the machine, the settings from the printer driver has priority.
1 Display the [Finishing] sheet.
3 Select binding edge for the paper printout from [Binding Location].
2 Select [2-sided Printing] from [Print Style].
4 Click [OK].
7-11
Printing from Memory Media (Direct Print)
Printing from Memory Media (Direct Print)
You can print data from a memory medium, such as an SD card by directly inserting it into the machine and selecting the desired image on the display. You do not need to connect the machine to your computer. The Direct Print function is available only for the Color imageCLASS MF9280Cdn.
7-12
Memory Media Supported by This Machine
The memory media listed below are compatible with this machine.
USB Memory/Memory cards that can be directly inserted into the slot:
– USB Memory
–
–
SD Secure Digital memory card
SDHC memory card
–
–
Compact Flash (CF) Card : supports Type I/II (3.3 V)
Microdrive
USB Memory/Memory cards that can be directly inserted into the slot:
–
–
Memory Stick
Memory Stick PRO
Printing from Memory Media (Direct Print)
Memory cards that can be inserted in the slot using an adapter:
If one of the following memory cards is inserted without an adapter, the card may get stuck in the slot. Be sure to attach an adapter to the memory card before inserting it into the slot.
– miniSD Card* 1
– microSD Card* 2
–
–
Memory Stick Duo* 1
Memory Stick PRO Duo* 1
* 1 Use the special adapter provided with the card.
* 2 Use the SD Card Adapter provided with the card.
Data Supported by This Machine
–
–
Note the followings so you can use an appropriate memory medium.
– Supported file systems of a memory are FAT16 and FAT32.
You can not select the data contained in other folder at once.
You can not select a data in a lower level folder.
–
•
•
The following file formats are supported:
JPEG
TIFF
–
–
–
•
•
•
JPEG files that conform to the following are supported:
DCF/Exif2.21 or earlier/JFIF
Number of pixels: 160 × 120 to 7,040 × 10,200 pixels (approximately equivalent to 11" × 17" or A3 size in 600dpi)
Number of pixels: 160 × 120 to 7,040 × 10,200 pixels
•
• Number of components: 3
Sampling ratios: 4:1:1 (16 × 16), 4:1:1 (32 × 8), 4:2:2 (16 × 8), or 4:4:4 (8 × 8)
Progressive JPEG files are not supported.
Supported TIFF file format is TIFF Profile F, which is a black and white TIFF file format used for I-faxes.
7-13
Printing from Memory Media (Direct Print)
–
–
The size of the TIFF image cannot be scaled for printing. If the size of the TIFF image exceeds the size of the selected paper, only the part that fits on the paper is printed.
Depending on the files, some images cannot be displayed in the <Image Display> mode.
Inserting Memory Media
–
–
–
–
When a memory medium is inserted into the slot, the access lamp lights up. Do not touch the memory medium or the area around the memory medium slot/USB port at this point because the machine is accessing to the data in the memory medium. Doing so may damage the machine and the memory medium.
When inserted, some memory media protrude from the slot. Do not force them into the slot any further. Doing so may damage the machine and the memory media.
Make sure that the memory medium is correctly oriented before inserting it into the slot. Forcing an improperly positioned memory medium into the slot may damage the memory medium and/or the machine.
Depending on the SD card, it may take a few seconds to recognize it.
●
How to nsert a memory medum
Insert only one memory medium into the slot. Confirm that the Access lamp has lit up.
Media Type Inserting Media
– USB Memory
7-14
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
SD Secure Digital memory card
SDHC memory card
Memory Stick
Memory Stick PRO
Memory Stick Duo* 1
Memory Stick PRO Duo* 1 miniSD Card* 1 microSD Card* 2
Printing from Memory Media (Direct Print)
Inserting Media Media Type
–
–
Compact Flash (CF) Card
Microdrive
* 1 Be sure to attach the memory medium to the special adapter before inserting it into the slot.
* 2 Use “SD Card Adapter” Provided with the card.
Removing Memory Media
Do not remove the memory medium when the access lamp is blinking. The blinking lamp indicates that the machine is accessing the data in the memory medium. The data may be damaged if you remove the memory medium at this point.
1 Make sure that the access lamp is not blinking, then remove the memory medium from the slot.
Printing from Memory Media
1 Insert a memory medium into the slot.
2 Confirm that the access lamp has lit up.
3 Press (Main Menu).
4 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Direct Print>, then press [OK].
7-15
Printing from Memory Media (Direct Print)
5 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the memory medium that stores the data that you want to print, then press [OK].
If you want to print an index of all the files in
the selected memory medium, see “Index
6 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the folder that contains the data that you want to print, then press [OK].
You can select the desired data by sorting all data according to date or extension. If you want
see “Selecting Files by Extension,” on p. 7-24.
7 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the data that you want to print, then press [OK].
7-16
If you select data which is saved outside the folder, skip to step 8.
If you want to select the data from the displayed images, press the left Any key to change the display method from <Folder/File Name Display> to <Image Display>, then press [OK].
– In the <Image Display> mode, the screen below appears. Use [ ◀ ], [ ▶ ] or (Scroll
Wheel) to select the data that you want to print, then press [OK].
–
–
You can select data by entering the desired copy quantity with – (numeric keys) instead of pressing [OK].
You can select multiple data at once from one folder.
You can not select the data contained in other folders at once.
8 Press the right Any key to select <Print
Settings>.
In the <Image Display> mode, the screen below appears.
9 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired setting, then press [OK].
The followings are the settings that can be made:
– <Color>: Selects full color or B&W.
– <Drawer 1>: Selects paper for printing.
You cannot set <Stack Bypass Tray> when the custom size is specified for the stack bypass tray.
Printing from Memory Media (Direct Print)
– <Layout>: Specifies the layout.
To make this setting, see the detailed procedures in the next page.
–
–
<Copies>: Selects print quantity.
<Print Date>: Prints the shooting date on data.
To make this setting, see the detailed procedures in the next page.
– <Print File Name>: Prints the file name on data.
To make this setting, see the detailed procedures in the next page.
–
–
–
<Vivid Photo>: Makes green and blue more lively.
<Brightness>: Adjusts brightness.
<Halftones>: Optimizes data for printing.
–
–
The <Halftones> default setting is <Auto>.
<Gradation> is suitable for photos taken with a digital camera and <Error Diffusion> is suitable for scanned images. In <Auto> mode, printing from a memory card is automatically processed with <Gradation> and printing from USB memory is automatically processed with <Error
Diffusion>. For optimal images, select <Error
Diffusion> when printing scanned images stored in memory cards. When printing photos stored in a USB memory, select <Gradation>.
<Copies> can be set up for each file, but the other print settings cannot be specified for each file.
7-17
7-18
Printing from Memory Media (Direct Print)
■ If you select <Layout>:
–
–
–
–
–
–
The print quantity is limited to one.
Only JPEG data can be printed. Even if the selected files contain TIFF data, only JPEG data is printed.
The print size is adjusted automatically to fit on one sheet of paper.
The order of the images in the layout cannot be specified.
This setting cannot be used with two-sided printing.
A blank space for printing the date and file name is left below the printed image even if
<Print Date> or <Print File Name> is set to
<Off>.
① Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the layout type, then press [OK].
■ If you select <Print Date> or <Print File
Name>:
–
–
Only JPEG data can be printed. Even if the selected files contain TIFF data, only JPEG data is printed.
The file name can consist of up to 20 characters.
① Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<On>, then press [OK].
② Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Yes>, then press [OK].
10 Press to start printing.
When printing is complete, remove the memory medium.
Do not remove the memory medium when the access lamp is blinking. The blinking lamp indicates that the machine is accessing the data in the memory medium. The data may be damaged if you remove the memory medium at this point.
Printing from Memory Media (Direct Print)
●
Index Prntng
You can print an index of the data saved on a memory medium.
This functions is only available for JPEG. If the selected medium contains TIFF files, they are not printed.
1 Insert a memory medium into the slot.
2 Confirm that the access lamp has lit up.
3 Press (Main Menu).
4 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Direct Print>, then press [OK].
6 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired memory medium, then press
[OK].
5 Press the right Any key to select <Index
Print>.
–
–
You can not select multiple memory media or folders at once.
If you press the right Any key to select <Set>, only the data saved outside folders will be printed.
7 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired folder, then press the right
Any key to select <Set>.
If the selected folder contains a subfolder, the files in that folder will not be printed.
The maximum depth of a sub-folder you can select is 20.
7-19
7-20
Printing from Memory Media (Direct Print)
8 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired setting, then press [OK].
9 Press (Start).
When printing is complete, remove the memory medium.
Do not remove the memory medium when the access lamp is blinking. The blinking lamp indicates that the machine is accessing the data in the memory medium. The data may be damaged if you remove the memory medium at this point.
Press [OK] after making each setting.
– <Color>: Selects full color or B&W.
– <Drawer 1>: Selects paper source for printing.
●
Selectng All Fles n Folder
You can print all files in the selected folder.
1 Insert a memory medium into the slot.
2 Confirm that the access lamp has lit up.
3 Press (Main Menu).
4 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Direct Print>, then press [OK].
5 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired memory medium, then press
[OK].
6 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the folder that contains the files that you want to print, then press [OK].
7 Press the left Any key to select <Display/
Select>.
Printing from Memory Media (Direct Print)
11 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired setting, then press [OK].
8 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Change File Selection>, then press [OK].
For details about <Print Settings>, see step 9 in
“Printing from Memory Media,” on p. 7-15.
12 Press (Start) to start printing.
When printing is complete, remove the memory medium.
9 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Specify Conditions>, then press [OK].
Do not remove the memory medium when the access lamp is blinking. The blinking lamp indicates that the machine is accessing the data in the memory medium. The data may be damaged if you remove the memory medium at this point.
10 Press [OK] to select <Select All>.
7-21
7-22
Printing from Memory Media (Direct Print)
●
Selectng Fles by Date
You can print only the selected files saved within the specified range of dates or all files on the specified dates.
1 Insert a memory medium into the slot.
2 Confirm that the access lamp has lit up.
3 Press (Main Menu).
4 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Direct Print>, then press [OK].
6 Press the left Any key to select <Display/
Select>.
7 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Change File Selection>, then press [OK].
5 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired memory medium, then press
[OK].
8 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Specify Conditions>, then press [OK].
9 Select the files by specifying dates.
■ If you want to print only the selected files saved within the specified range of dates:
① Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Specified Date>, then press [OK].
Printing from Memory Media (Direct Print)
⑤ Press the right Any key to select <Print
Settings>.
② Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the start date, then press [OK].
■ If you want to print all files on the specified dates:
① Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Specify Date Select All>, then press [OK].
③ Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the end date, then press [OK].
② Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the start date, then press [OK].
④ Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the file that you want to print, then press
[OK].
③ Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the end date, then press [OK].
7-23
7-24
Printing from Memory Media (Direct Print)
10 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired setting, then press [OK].
11 Press (Start) to start printing.
When printing is complete, remove the memory medium.
Do not remove the memory medium when the access lamp is blinking. The blinking lamp indicates that the machine is accessing the data in the memory medium. The data may be damaged if you remove the memory medium at this point.
For details about <Print Settings>, see step 9 in
“Printing from Memory Media,” on p. 7-15.
●
Selectng Fles by Extenson
You can print only the selected files or all files of the specified extension.
1 Insert a memory medium into the slot.
2 Confirm that the access lamp has lit up.
3 Press (Main Menu).
4 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Direct Print>, then press [OK].
5 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired memory medium, then press
[OK].
6 Press the left Any key to select <Display/
Select>.
7 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Change File Selection>, then press [OK].
Printing from Memory Media (Direct Print)
③ Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the file that you want to print, then press
[OK].
8 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Specify Conditions>, then press [OK].
④ Press the right Any key to select <Print
Settings>.
9 Select the files by specifying extensions.
■ If you want to print only the selected files of the specified extension:
① Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Specify Extension>, then press [OK].
■ If you want to print all files of the specified extension:
① Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Specify Ext. Select All>, then press [OK].
② Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired extension, then press [OK].
② Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired extension, then press [OK].
7-25
7-26
Printing from Memory Media (Direct Print)
10 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired setting, then press [OK].
For details about <Print Settings>, see step 9 in
“Printing from Memory Media,” on p. 7-15.
11 Press (Start) to start printing.
When printing is complete, remove the memory medium.
Do not remove the memory medium when the access lamp is blinking. The blinking lamp indicates that the machine is accessing the data in the memory medium. The data may be damaged if you remove the memory medium at this point.
Checking and Canceling Print Jobs/Checking Print Logs
Checking and Canceling Print Jobs/Checking
Print Logs
You can check the numbers of prints and the print results, or you can cancel a print job before the printing starts.
Checking Print Jobs
Make sure that the Processing/Data indicator is on or blinking. When the Processing/Data indicator is off, there are no jobs in the memory of the print job status.
1 Press (Status Monitor/Cancel).
2 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Print>, then press [OK].
4 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired job, then press the left Any key to select <Details>.
3 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Job Status>, then press [OK].
5 Check the print job status, then press the right Any key to select <Done>.
6 Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
7-27
7-28
Checking and Canceling Print Jobs/Checking Print Logs
Canceling Print Jobs
Make sure that the Processing/Data indicator is on or blinking. When the Processing/Data indicator is off, there are no print jobs in the memory.
1 Press (Status Monitor/Cancel).
2 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Print>, then press [OK].
5 Use [ ▼
<Yes>.
], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
3 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Job Status>, then press [OK].
6 Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
4 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired job, then press the right Any key to select <Cancel>.
Checking and Canceling Print Jobs/Checking Print Logs
Checking Print Logs
1 Press (Status Monitor/Cancel).
2 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Print>, then press [OK].
5 Check the print log, then press the right
Any key to select <Done>.
3 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Log (Printer)>, then press [OK].
6 Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
4 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired log, then press the left Any key to select <Details>.
7-29
7-30
Checking and Canceling Print Jobs/Checking Print Logs
Scanning
This chapter describes how to use scanner functions.
Overview of Scanner Functions ..................................8-2
Introduction to Using Scanner Functions ..................8-4
For Scanning Documents to a Shared Folder
(File Server) ............................................................................8-4
For Scanning Documents from a Networked
Computer ...............................................................................8-4
Basic Scanning Operations .........................................8-6
Scanning Documents to a File Server ..........................8-6
Scanning Documents to a USB Memory .....................8-8
Scanning Documents from a Networked
Computer ............................................................................ 8-10
Chapter
8
8-2
Overview of Scanner Functions
Overview of Scanner Functions
You can transmit scanned documents over the network to your computer. You also can store scanned documents in a file server or USB memory.
Overview of Scanner Functions
8-3
8-4
Introduction to Using Scanner Functions
Introduction to Using Scanner Functions
The necessary settings before sending scanned documents to a shared folder (file server), or scanning documents from a computer are as follows.
For Scanning Documents to a Shared Folder (File Server)
●
Network Settngs
Connect the network cable and set the IP address to enable your machine to communicate over the network.
For details, see “Network Settings,” in the e-Manual.
●
Shared Folder (Fle Server) Settngs
Check the required information and set up the machine and computer to enable you to send scanned documents to a shared folder. For details, see “Network Settings,” in the e-Manual.
For Scanning Documents from a Networked Computer
●
TWAIN-complant Applcatons
Color Network ScanGear is launched from the menu of a TWAIN-compliant application (applications capable of modifying images or inserting them into a document, such as Adobe Photoshop, Microsoft Office, etc.). A
TWAIN-compliant application must be installed in your computer, since Color Network ScanGear cannot be used as an independent application software.
●
Network Settngs
Connect the network cable and set the IP address to enable your machine to communicate over the network.
For details, see “Network Settings,” in the e-Manual.
If you want to use the machine as a network scanner, it must be connected to a computer over an IPv4 network.
●
Color Network ScanGear
Color Network ScanGear is an application software required in order to scan documents from a computer. For information on how to install the software, see “Set Up Computers and Software,” in the Starter Guide.
If Color Network ScanGear is already installed, select the [start] (or [Start]) menu on the computer, then [Program](or [All Programs]). The
[Color Network ScanGear] folder is displayed.
Introduction to Using Scanner Functions
●
ScanGear Tool
Before scanning documents from a computer, you need to select the machine for scanning using the
ScanGear Tool. For details, see “Set Up Computers and Software,” in the Starter Guide.
ScanGear Tool is an application software included with the Color Network ScanGear. ScanGear Tool is installed together with the Color
Network ScanGear driver.
8-5
8-6
Basic Scanning Operations
Basic Scanning Operations
Scanning Documents to a File Server
This section describes the basic procedure for scanning documents to a shared folder in a computer.
If you select a file format for color from the <Color/File Format Settings>, you will not be able to consecutively scan multiple-page originals from the platen glass. If you want to consecutively scan multiple-page originals using a file format for color, use the feeder instead.
1 Place your originals.
4 Use [
[OK].
▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Enter File Server (New)>, then press
2 Press (Main Menu).
3 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Send/Fax> or <Scan to Store>, then press [OK].
If you select <Scan to Store>, use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or
(Scroll Wheel) to select <Store on File Server>, then press [OK].
5 Specify the file server’s address.
For information on how to specify the file server’s address, see “Scan,” in the e-Manual.
6 Make the scan settings you require.
You can specify the following settings:
– <Color/File Format Settings>: Specifies the color type of originals and the file format for sending. (See “Scan,” in the e-Manual.)
–
–
<Resolution Settings>: Adjusts the resolution of originals. (See “Scan,” in the e-Manual.)
<Density/Background Rem. Set.>: Adjusts the density and the background color of originals.
(See “Scan,” in the e-Manual.)
–
–
–
<Original Image Quality Settings>: Adjusts the image quality of originals. (See “Scan,” in the e-Manual.)
<2-Sided Orig. Orientation Set.>: Scans two-sided originals for sending. (See “Scan,” in the e-Manual.)
<Delayed TX Settings>: Specifies the transmission time. (See “Scan,” in the e-Manual.)
–
–
–
<Send Document Name Settings>: Sets the name of the document for sending. (See
“Scan,” in the e-Manual.)
<Subject/Message Settings>: Sets the message body text. (See “Scan,” in the e-Manual.)
<Register Favorites>: Stores frequently used send settings for future use. (See “Scan,” in the e-Manual.)
7 Press (Start).
8 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲
Basic Scanning Operations
] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the original size, then press [OK].
9 Press (Start).
–
–
Scanning starts.
To cancel scanning, press the left Any key to select <Cancel> or press (Stop).
10 Follow the instructions on the display, then press (Start) once for each original.
–
–
Scanning starts if the original is placed in the feeder, and the scanned data is sent to the specified destination when scanning is complete.
To cancel scanning, press the left Any key to select <Cancel> or press (Stop).
8-7
8-8
Basic Scanning Operations
11 When scanning is complete, press the right Any key to select <Done>.
The scanned data is sent to the specified destination.
Scanning Documents to a USB Memory
This section describes the basic procedure for storing scanned documents to a USB memory.
If you use the platen glass to scan your originals, you will not be able to scan multiple-page originals consecutively. Also in the <Color/
File Format Settings> screen, you will be able to select <Off> or <On> in the <Divide Pages> menu but the function will be ineffective.
To scan multiple-page originals consecutively, use the feeder.
1 Insert your USB memory to an appropriate slot on the right side of the control panel.
2 Place your originals.
3 Press (Main Menu).
4 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Scan to Store>, then press [OK].
Basic Scanning Operations
7 Make the scan settings you require.
5 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Store on Memory Media>, then press
[OK].
If <Store on Memory Media> in <Memory Media
Settings> is set to <Off>, <Store on Memory
Media> is not displayed. (See “Security,” in the e-Manual.)
6 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the media you want to store in, then press the right Any key to select <Set>.
You can specify the following settings:
– <Color/File Format Settings>: Specifies the color type of originals and the file format for sending. (See “Scan,” in the e-Manual.)
–
–
<Resolution Settings>: Adjusts the resolution of originals. (See “Scan,” in the e-Manual.)
<Density/Background Rem. Set.>: Adjusts the density and the background color of originals.
(See “Scan,” in the e-Manual.)
–
–
–
<Original Image Quality Settings>: Adjusts the image quality of originals. (See “Scan,” in the e-Manual.)
<2-Sided Orig. Orientation Set.>: Scans twosided originals for sending. (See “Scan,” in the e-Manual.)
<Send Document Name Settings>: Sets the name of the document for sending. (See
“Scan,” in the e-Manual.)
8 Press (Start).
Scanning starts if the original is placed in the feeder, and the scanned data is sent to the specified medium.
To cancel scanning, press the left Any key to select <Cancel> or press (Stop).
8-9
Basic Scanning Operations
9 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the original size, then press [OK].
10 Press (Start).
The scanned data is sent to the specified medium.
Scanning Documents from a Networked Computer
With the Color Network ScanGear driver installed in your computer, you can remotely scan an original set on the machine and import the scanned image over the network to a TWAIN-compliant application*. (* See
“NOTE” below for more information on TWAIN-compliant applications.)
sure that all the setups are complete for scanning originals from a computer.
8-10
– Color Network ScanGear cannot be used as an independent application software. To use the Color Network ScanGear driver, a TWAINcompliant application (such as Adobe Photoshop, Adobe Acrobat, Microsoft Word/Excel/PowerPoint of Microsoft Office 2000 or later, etc.) is required. TWAIN is a technical standard for connecting a computer to an image capturing device, such as a scanner, digital camera, etc.
Basic Scanning Operations
–
–
The Color Network ScanGear driver cannot store scanned images or convert them to PDF or other file formats. Store the imported images with the TWAIN-compliant application.
The Color Network ScanGear driver is a software used with the machine connected to a computer over the network. The software does not support USB connection.
1 Press (Main Menu).
2 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Scan to Store>, then press [OK].
3 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Remote Scan>, then press [OK].
–
–
–
When scanning originals remotely from a computer, you must switch the machine online. For details, see “Scan,” in the e-Manual.
If you want to continue scanning another original, keep the Use Remote Scan screen in step 4 displayed. If you change the screen, the machine will automatically go offline when scanning is complete or as soon as the preview image is displayed.
If you press (Main Menu) while the machine is online, the machine will automatically go offline.
5 Place your original on the platen glass or in the feeder.
4 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Online>, then press [OK].
8-11
8-12
Basic Scanning Operations
6 Start the TWAIN-compliant application to select Color Network ScanGear as the scanner to be used.
–
–
The command names for this operation includes [Select a scanner], [Select a device], etc. depending on the application you are using. For details, see the documentation that comes with the application software used.
For the operation procedures for starting the
Color Network ScanGear driver to scan images from an application software, see “Scan,” in the e-Manual. You will find the operation procedures using Microsoft Word 2007 and
2003.
7 From the menu of the application software, select the command to start the
Color Network ScanGear driver.
The command names for this operation includes
[New scan], [Import from TWAIN source], etc. depending on the application you are using. For details, see the documentation that comes with the application software used.
8 On the Color Network ScanGear [Main] sheet, select [Platen], [Feeder (1-sided)], or [Feeder (2-sided)] from [Original
Placement] according to the location of the original placed in step 5.
If [Platen] is selected, clicking on [Preview] allows you to see the preview image of your scan.
9 On the [Main] and [Options] sheets, select the desired settings for Color Mode,
Resolution, etc.
When you select the command to start the Color
Network ScanGear driver, and if it does not start and an error message such as “Scanner is not connected.” appears, check if all the setups are complete for scanning originals from a computer.
(See “Introduction to Using Scanner Functions,” on p. 8-4.)
For more information on the settings on each sheet, see the Online Help (displayed when the
Help icon on the toolbar is clicked).
10 Click [Scan].
–
–
To cancel scanning, click [Cancel] in the
[Transfer Pages] dialog box.
The scanned images are inserted in the document when the scanning is complete.
11 After scanning is complete, switch the scanner offline. (Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll
Wheel) to select <Offline>, then press
[OK].)
To use other functions of the machine, such as copying, you must switch the machine offline. For details, see “Scan,” in the e-Manual.
12 Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
Basic Scanning Operations
8-13
8-14
Basic Scanning Operations
Network
Chapter
9
This chapter describes what the network is, what you can do with the network, and what you have to do to use the machine with the network.
Flowchart for Setting Up Network .............................9-2
What is the Network? ..................................................9-3
Overview of Network Functions .................................9-4
9-1
9-2
Flowchart for Setting Up Network
Flowchart for Setting Up Network
Follow the procedures in the flowchart below to set up each network function.
What is the Network?
What is the Network?
In the computer field, a network is a system of interconnected computers that communicate with each other. “Internet” and “LAN” are the two most common words used to refer to networks. The Internet is the vast network to which computers all over the world are connected. Computers connected to the Internet anywhere in the world can exchange information with one another. On the other hand, LAN is the abbreviation for “Local Area
Network” and means a network within a limited area (in an office, for example).
9-3
9-4
Overview of Network Functions
Overview of Network Functions
This section describes actions you can perform using the network function.
Settings from a
PC
This chapter describes how to use the Remote UI functions.
Overview of Remote UI .............................................10-2
Starting the Remote UI..............................................10-4
Chapter
10
10-1
10-2
Overview of Remote UI
Overview of Remote UI
Remote UI enables you to check the machine’s status and manage the machine’s functions from a computer on the network using a web browser. Using the computer keyboard, the management process, such as entering addresses to the address book will be easier.
Overview of Remote UI
By using remote UI you can set and confirm following functions.
Checking the Device
Information from a computer
The Remote UI enables you to check the device information. Accessing to the device information from the distant place provides you with easy device management.
Managing jobs from a computer
The Remote UI enables you to manage print jobs and view job logs.
Accessing to the print job information from the distant place provides you with easy job management.
For details, see “Checking Device
Status and Information” in the e-Manual.
For details, see “Job Management” in the e-Manual.
Editing the Address Book from a computer
The Remote UI enables you to make additions and changes to each item of the address book. You can use the PC keyboard, so entering a lot of addresses to the address book will be easier.
For details, see “Managing the
Address Book” in the e-Manual.
Setting/registering from a computer
The Remote UI enables you to specify the machine’s system settings. You can specify the various custom system settings more easily and speedy.
For details, see “Customizing System
Settings” in the e-Manual.
10-3
10-4
Starting the Remote UI
Starting the Remote UI
To start the Remote UI, follow the procedure described below.
1 Prepare the Network.
Set up the machine for use in a network, then connect the machine and the computer to your network router or a hub.
For details, see “Setup Computers and Software,” in the Starter Guide.
4 Enter the required data.
The required data differ depending on the authentication mode you are using.
■ If both Department ID and User
Management are disabled:
① Select [System Manager Mode] or [End-User
Mode].
2 Start the web browser.
3 Enter the IP address of the machine in
[Address] or [Location], then press [Enter] on the keyboard.
For details on how to check the IP address, see
“Setting and Checking the IP Address,” in the e-Manual.
The Remote UI screen appears.
② For System Manager Mode enter the
System Manager ID and the Password, and click OK. For End-User Mode, enter the User
Name and click OK.
Starting the Remote UI
■ For User Management mode:
① Enter the User ID and Password, and click
OK.
■ For Department ID Management mode:
① Enter the Department ID and Password, and click OK.
If no password is set, you can log on without entering a password.
10-5
10-6
Starting the Remote UI
5 Operate the Machine.
Now you can manage the machine on the web browser.
For details, see “Settings from a PC,” in the e-Manual.
For details on the Remote UI settings, see Online
Help.
Maintenance
Chapter
11
This chapter describes how to perform routine cleaning operations, and replace toner cartridges.
Cleaning the Machine ...............................................11-2
Exterior ................................................................................. 11-2
Interior .................................................................................. 11-3
Scanning Area .................................................................... 11-4
Replacing the Toner Cartridges ................................11-7
When a Message Appears ............................................. 11-7
Replacing the Toner Cartridge with a New One .... 11-8
Recycling Used Cartridges ......................................11-13
The Clean Earth Campaign - The Canon
Cartridge Return Program ...........................................11-13
U.S.A. PROGRAM .............................................................11-14
Canadian Program – Programme au Canada .......11-17
Transporting the Machine ......................................11-19
11-2
Cleaning the Machine
Cleaning the Machine
Note the following before cleaning your machine:
–
–
–
Make sure no documents are stored in memory when you turn OFF the main power switch and disconnect the power cord.
Use a soft cloth to avoid scratching the components.
Do not use tissue paper, paper towels, or similar materials for cleaning; they can stick to the components or generate static charges.
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Never use volatile liquids such as thinner, benzene, acetone, or any other chemical cleaner to clean the machine. These can damage the machine components.
You cannot send or receive documents when the main power switch is turned off or the power cord is disconnected.
If the main power switch is turned OFF, all jobs waiting in the print queue will be erased.
Documents received into memory and documents stored for delayed send will be retained for approximately 60 minutes after the power cord has been disconnected.
When you turn OFF the main power switch, the documents stored in memory will be erased. To check the jobs stored in memory, see the following:
“Checking and Canceling Copy Jobs/Checking Copy Logs” on p. 4-72.
“Checking and Canceling Print Jobs/Checking Print Logs” on p. 7-27.
“Checking/Changing the Status of Fax Documents in Memory” on p. 5-147.
“Canceling Sending E-Mail Documents” on p. 6-7.
“Checking/Changing the Status of Scanning Data in Memory (Scan to File Server),” in the e-Manual.
Exterior
Clean the exterior of the machine.
1 Turn OFF the main power switch and disconnect the power cord.
2 Wipe the machine’s exterior with a clean, soft, lint-free cloth dampened with water or diluted dishwashing detergent solution.
3 Wait for the machine to dry, then reconnect the power cord and turn ON the main power switch.
Cleaning the Machine
Interior
Clean the machine’s print area periodically to prevent toner powder and paper dust from accumulating inside.
●
Cleanng the Fxng Unt
If black streaks appear on printed output, the fixing unit may be dirty. Also, you should use the Fixing Unit
Cleaning procedure every time the toner cartridge is replaced. Print the cleaning pattern on LTR paper for cleaning the fixing unit.
–
–
As cleaning paper, LTR or A4 paper must be loaded in the paper drawer or the stack bypass tray.
Cleaning the fixing unit takes approximately 60 seconds.
1 Press (Main Menu).
2 Press the right Any key to select
<Additional Func>.
4 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ], or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Fixing Unit Cleaning>, then press
[OK].
3 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ], or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Adjustment/Cleaning>, then press [OK].
11-3
11-4
Cleaning the Machine
5 Confirm that <Start Cleaning> is displayed, then press [OK].
Printing starts.
The cleaning process cannot be canceled. Please wait until it is completed.
6 Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
Discard the cleaning paper after use.
Scanning Area
Keep the scanning area clean to avoid dirty copies or faxes to be sent.
●
Cleanng the Platen Glass
Clean the platen glass and the underside of the feeder by following the procedure below.
1 Open the feeder.
2 Clean the platen glass and the underside of the feeder with a cloth dampened with water. Then, wipe the area with a soft, dry cloth.
Do not dampen the cloth too much, as this may tear the document or damage the machine.
Cleaning the Machine
3 Close the feeder.
–
–
●
Cleanng the Feeder Automatcally
If your originals have black streaks or appear dirty after scanning them through the feeder, clean the rollers of the feeder.
Use LTR or A4 paper as cleaning paper.
It takes approximately 30 seconds to clean the feeder.
1 Press (Main Menu).
2 Press the right Any key to select
<Additional Func>.
3 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ], or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Adjustment/Cleaning>, then press [OK].
4 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ], or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Feeder Cleaning>, then press
[OK].
11-5
11-6
Cleaning the Machine
5 Place 10 sheets of blank paper into the feeder.
6 Confirm that <Start> is displayed, then press [OK].
The display returns to the Adjustment/Cleaning screen.
Discard the cleaning paper after use.
The cleaning process cannot be canceled. Please wait until it is completed.
7 Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
Replacing the Toner Cartridges
Replacing the Toner Cartridges
This section describes how to replace or handle the toner cartridges and precautions on storing them.
When a Message Appears
Toner cartridges are consumable products. If the toner is running out during printing, a message appears in the display.
Message When it is Displayed
Prepare a new toner cartridge. (XXX*) When a toner cartridge needs to be replaced soon.
Check the XXX* toner.
Replace the toner cartridge. (XXX*)
A toner cartridge that cannot guarantee print quality because it has reached the end of its life etc., or a toner cartridge that has already been spent may be set.
When the toner runs out.
Contents and Remedies
–
–
Prepare a new toner cartridge.
Replacing the toner cartridge is recommended before performing a bulk printing.
Continued use of this toner cartridge may cause the machine to malfunction.
Replacing of the toner cartridge is recommended.
Replace the toner cartridge of the indicated color. Incidentally, even if any of Yellow, Cyan or Magenta toner runs out, black and white printing can still be performed if Black toner remains.
* XXX indicates “Black”, “Yellow”, “Cyan”, or “Magenta”.
11-7
11-8
Replacing the Toner Cartridges
Replacing the Toner Cartridge with a New One
–
–
If any of the following messages appears, replace the toner cartridge of the indicated color with a new one.
– <Replace the toner cartridge. (Black)>: Replace the black toner cartridge.
–
<Replace the toner cartridge. (Yellow)>: Replace the yellow toner cartridge.
<Replace the toner cartridge. (Cyan)>: Replace the cyan toner cartridge.
<Replace the toner cartridge. (Magenta)>: Replace the magenta toner cartridge.
Do not dispose of used toner cartridges in open flames. This may cause the toner remaining inside the cartridges to ignite, resulting in burns or fire.
–
–
Do not pull out the sealing tape forcefully or stop at midpoint, as this may cause toner to spill out. If toner gets into your eyes or mouth, wash them immediately with cold water and consult a physician.
When closing the front cover, be careful not to get your fingers caught.
1 Open the front cover by using the handle
(A).
2 To prevent damage to the transfer belt of the delivery feeder unit (A), cover the thin plastic belt with paper (A4 size paper is recommended) as shown in the figure and be sure that they do not move out of place.
The toner cartridges are installed in order of black, yellow, cyan, and magenta from the top as shown in the figure.
–
–
When installing or removing the toner cartridges, be sure to place paper on the transfer belt (A) of the delivery feeder unit to protect the belt.
Do not place any object on or touch the transfer belt (A) of the delivery feeder unit. The transfer belt (A) of the delivery feeder unit has a self cleaning function, therefore, do not clean the belt even when the toner is on it. If the delivery feeder unit is broken or transfer belt (A) is damaged, this may result in misfeeds or deterioration in print quality.
Replacing the Toner Cartridges
Do not touch the high-voltage contact (A) or the electrical contacts (B), as this may result in damage to the printer.
3 Hold the blue tabs on the both sides of toner cartridge, and pull it horizontally.
4 Take the new toner cartridge out of the protective bag after taking it out of the package.
There is a cut near the arrow on the protective bag, so you can open it by hand. However, if you cannot open it by hand, use scissors to open the protective bag so as not to damage the toner cartridge.
11-9
11-10
Replacing the Toner Cartridges
5 Gently rock the toner cartridge several times to evenly distribute the toner inside.
Do not pull the seal out at an angle.
6 Place the toner cartridge on a flat surface, fold back the tab of the sealing tape (A) located at left side of the toner cartridge.
– Do not open the drum protective shutter (A).
7 Remove the sealing tape (approx. 18 7/8 inch long) gently by hooking your fingers into the tab and pulling it out straight in the direction of the arrow.
–
–
–
If toner is adhered on the removed seal, be careful that your hands or clothes do not get dirty from touching the toner.
If your hands or clothes get dirty from touching the toner, wash them immediately in cold water. Do not use hot water. If you do, the toner may be set permanently.
Do not pull the seal out at an angle.
8 Hook your finger into the tab and remove the packing materials (A) located at right side of the toner cartridge.
Replacing the Toner Cartridges
10 Align (A) of the toner cartridge that you want to replace with the slots (B) to which the label of the same color is attached, then insert the cartridge until it stops.
9 Hold the toner cartridge properly by the blue tabs on the both sides with the arrowed side facing up.
11 After removing all the packing materials on the each toner cartridges and installing the cartridges, remove the paper on the transfer belt of the delivery feeder unit.
Do not hold the toner cartridge in a manner that is not directed in this procedure.
When removing the paper, be careful not to touch or damage the transfer belt of the delivery feeder unit.
11-11
11-12
Replacing the Toner Cartridges
12 Close the front cover.
If you cannot close the front cover, do not force it to close. Open the cover and make sure the toner cartridge is properly set in the machine.
Recycling Used Cartridges
Recycling Used Cartridges
Canon has instituted a worldwide recycling program for cartridges called
“The Clean Earth Campaign”. This program preserves precious natural resources by utilizing a variety of materials found in the used cartridges that are of no further use, to remanufacture new cartridges which, at the same time, keeps the environment cleaner by reducing landfill waste.
Complete details concerning this program are enclosed in each Cartridge box.
The Clean Earth Campaign - The Canon Cartridge Return Program
The Canon Cartridge Return Program fulfills the first initiative of Canon’s Clean Earth Campaign, which supports four critical environmental areas:
●
●
●
●
Recycling in the Workplace
Conserving Environmental Resources
Scientific Research and Education
Encouraging Appreciation of the Outdoors
“Clean Earth” initiatives supported by Canon in the U.S. include Eyes on Yellowstone, Canon Envirothon,
NATURE Series on PBS and The Canon Clean Earth Crew. Initiatives supported in Canada include Canon
Envirothon and World Wildlife Fund - Canada.
Since its inception, The Canon Cartridge Return Program has collected millions of cartridges that otherwise would have been discarded into landfills or similar facilities. Instead, this rapidly growing program recovers used cartridges and separates them into components which are then put to various industrial uses.
Becoming a part of this worthwhile program is easy. When your cartridge is of no further use, simply follow the instructions detailed for U.S. or Canadian residents.
We appreciate your support of The Canon Cartridge Return Program.
Working together we can make a significant contribution to a cleaner planet.
●
●
Cartridges collected through this program are not refilled.
This program may be modified or discontinued without notice.
11-13
Recycling Used Cartridges
11-14
U.S.A. PROGRAM
●
Packagng
■ One Box Return
To receive your free eight cartridge collection box:
Call 1-800-OK-CANON or
Visit www.usa.canon.com/cleanearth/return
OR
Place as many cartridges as possible into one box. Carefully seal the box with tape;
OR
Place an empty toner cartridge in the box that contained your new toner cartridge.
■ Bundled Return
Bundle multiple cartridge boxes together securely with tape.
Recycling Used Cartridges
Please be sure that the shipment does not exceed UPS specifications (See Below).
Maximum weight = 70 pounds Maximum length = 108 inches
Maximum girth (length + 2 x width + 2 x height) = 130 inches
Please Note:
Do not send defective cartridges for replacement.
Defective cartridges under warranty should be exchanged by an authorized dealer or service facility as provided in the warranty.
11-15
11-16
Recycling Used Cartridges
●
Shppng
Make sure the UPS A.R.S. label is applied.
■ UPS Pick-up
Give the shipment to your UPS driver when you receive your next regular delivery.
Call 1-800-PICK-UPS for Drop-Off options in your area.
By using either of the above methods of shipment, your used cartridge(s) will be forwarded to the Canon
Cartridge Collection Center at no charge to you.
Residents of Alaska and Hawaii : Do not use UPS authorized return label.
Alternative return service with the U.S. Postal Service is available by calling
1-800-OK-CANON or visit www.usa.canon.com/cleanearth/return
For further information about the Clean Earth Campaign in the United States, please call: 1-800-OK-CANON or visit www.usa.canon.com/cleanearth
Recycling Used Cartridges
Canadian Program – Programme au Canada
■ Single Box Return
● Repackage the empty toner cartridge utilizing the wrapper and pulp mould end-blocks from the new cartridge’s box.
●
●
Place the empty toner cartridge in the box from your new toner cartridge. Seal the box.
Apply the Canon Canada Inc./ Canada Post label provided in this brochure. Canon’s labels are specially
● marked so that Canon pays the postage.
Deposit your empty toner cartridge in any full size street mailbox or take it to your local Canada Post outlet or franchise.
11-17
11-18
Recycling Used Cartridges
■ Volume Box Return (Maximum 8 Cartridges)
We encourage you to use this option as a more efficient way to ship cartridges.
●
●
Please tape your eight cartridges together and place them in a box.
Apply the Canon Canada Inc. / Canada Post label provided in this brochure. Canon’s labels are specially
● marked so that Canon pays the postage.
Deliver to any local Canada Post outlet or franchise. Customers who hold a Commercial pick-up agreement with Canada Post may have their collection box picked up.
Working to protect the environment is a long-standing Canon interest. To this end, for every cartridge collected, Canon Canada donates funds to World Wildlife Fund - Canada and the Canon Envirothon.
For further information about The Clean Earth Campaign in Canada, please write to Canon.
Canon Canada Inc.
Corporate Customer Relations
6390 Dixie Road
Mississauga, ON L5T 1P7
Transporting the Machine
Transporting the Machine
Follow this procedure to avoid vibration damage to the machine when transporting it over a long distance.
1 Turn OFF the main power switch.
2 Disconnect the power cord and all the cables from the machine.
① Disconnect the power cord from the machine.
③ Disconnect the telephone cable and other cables from the machine if you connect your own telephone to the machine.
② Disconnect the LAN and USB cables, if any are connected to the machine.
3 If you are using the output tray extension, fold the paper stopper, and then push the output tray extension into the machine.
11-19
Transporting the Machine
4 If you are using the stack bypass tray, fold stack bypass tray extension, push back the auxiliary tray into place, and then close the stack bypass tray.
7 Pick up the machine using the hand grips on the left, right and back of the machine.
5 Pull out the paper drawer gently.
–
–
Check the weight of the machine to carry it
safely. (See “Specifications,” on p. 14-2.)
If you need to install the Cassette Feeding Unit-
AC1 in the machine, place the feeder at the installation site first, and then transport the machine to the site. For directions on how to install the Cassette Feeding Unit-AC1, see the sheet “Cassette Feeding Unit-AC1 Setup
Instruction.”
6 Hold the paper drawer with both hands and remove it from the machine.
11-20
Remove the Cassette Feeding Unit-AC1 from the machine if it is installed. To remove the Cassette
Feeding Unit-AC1, perform the installation procedure in reverse. (See the sheet “Cassette
Feeding Unit-AC1 Setup Instruction.”)
Troubleshooting
Chapter
12
This chapter explains how to respond to paper and original jams, as well as to error messages.
See “Troubleshooting,” in the e-Manual to troubleshoot problems on the machine’s functions such as Copy, Fax, or
Print, and problems on the computer or network settings.
Clearing Jams .............................................................12-2
Original Jams ...................................................................... 12-3
Paper Delivery Tray ........................................................... 12-5
Duplex Unit ......................................................................... 12-6
Stack Bypass Tray .............................................................. 12-8
Paper Drawer 1 ................................................................12-10
Optional Paper Drawer (Paper Drawer 2) ...............12-11
Inside of the Machine ....................................................12-13
Fixing Unit .........................................................................12-16
Back Cover .........................................................................12-18
When the Message Does Not Disappear ................12-19
If the Delivery Feeder Unit Is Not Installed
Correctly ...................................................................12-22
Error Messages.........................................................12-24
Error Codes ...............................................................12-34
<Paper diff. from set size/type.> is displayed .......12-41
Reloading the Paper ......................................................12-42
Changing the Paper Size Setting ..............................12-42
If a Power Failure Occurs .........................................12-45
If You Cannot Solve a Problem ................................12-46
Customer Support (U.S.A.) ...........................................12-46
Customer Support (Canada) .......................................12-46
12-2
Clearing Jams
Clearing Jams
When <Check the originals.>, <The paper has jammed.>, or <Remove the jammed paper from...> appears on the display, remove the jammed paper from the machine. The screen indicating the location of the paper jam and the procedure for clearing the paper jam appears on the display, and it remains there until the paper jam is entirely cleared.
Check the following if you experience repeated paper jams:
–
–
–
Check that the paper you are using meets the requirements for use. (See “Paper
Make sure you have removed any scraps of paper from the inside of the machine.
Fan and tap the paper stack on a flat surface before loading it in the machine.
–
–
When removing the jammed document or paper, be careful not to cut your hands with the edges of the document or paper.
When removing jammed paper or when inspecting inside of the machine, be careful not to allow necklaces, bracelets, or other metal objects to touch the inside of the machine, as this can result in burns or electrical shock.
–
–
When removing jammed paper, be careful not to get any toner on your hands or clothing, as this will dirty your hands or clothing. If toner gets on your hands or clothing, wash them immediately with cold water. Washing with warm water sets the toner, making it impossible to remove the toner stains.
If paper is jammed, remove the jammed paper so that any pieces of paper do not remain inside the machine according to the displayed message. Also, do not put your hand in an area other than indicated areas, as this may result in personal injuries or burns.
–
–
–
If you tear the paper, remove any torn pieces to avoid further jams.
If your hands or clothes get dirty from touching the toner, wash them immediately in cold water. Do not use hot water. If you do, the toner may be set permanently.
Do not force a jammed document or paper out of the machine. Contact Canon Customer Care Center if needed.
Clearing Jams
Original Jams
If a screen similar to the one shown below appears on the display, remove the jammed original from the feeder. Then press the right Any key to display the next procedure.
1 Open the feeder cover.
3 Open the inner cover, holding it by its front tab (A).
2 Hold both sides of any jammed original and gently pull it out.
4 Lift the release lever (A) until it clicks into place.
Do not force a jammed original out of the machine. If the jammed original cannot be removed easily, proceed to the next step.
12-3
12-4
Clearing Jams
5 Remove the jammed original.
8 Close the feeder cover.
Do not force a jammed paper out of the machine as it may tear.
6 Return the release lever (A) to its original position.
9 Load the original in the feeder again.
7 Close the inner cover.
Clearing Jams
Paper Delivery Tray
If a screen similar to the one shown below appears on the display, remove the jammed paper from the output tray. Then press the right Any key to display the next procedure.
1 Hold both sides of any jammed paper and gently pull it out.
2 Open and close the front cover to reset the machine.
If you are using the stack bypass tray, close it before opening the front cover. Use the handle
(A) to gently close the front cover.
–
–
Do not force a jammed paper out of the machine. If the jammed paper cannot be removed easily, proceed to the next step.
If unfixed toner is on the removed paper, it may adhere to the paper to be printed next.
12-5
12-6
Clearing Jams
Duplex Unit
If a screen similar to the one shown below appears on the display, remove the jammed paper from the duplex unit. Then press the right Any key to display the next procedure.
1 Lift the scanning platform (A) until it is locked.
3 Hold both sides of any jammed paper and gently pull it out.
2 Open the inner cover, holding it by its center tab (A).
Do not force a jammed paper out of the machine.
If the jammed paper cannot be removed easily, proceed to the next step.
4 Close the inner cover.
5 Lower the scanning platform.
6 Open and close the front cover to reset the machine.
If you are using the stack bypass tray, close it before opening the front cover.
Close the front cover gently holding the handle
(A).
Clearing Jams
12-7
12-8
Clearing Jams
Stack Bypass Tray
If a screen similar to the one shown below appears on the display, remove the jammed paper from the stack bypass tray. Then press the right Any key to display the next procedure.
1 Hold both sides of any jammed paper and gently pull it out.
2 Close the stack bypass tray.
Do not force a jammed paper out of the machine.
If the jammed paper cannot be removed easily, proceed to the next step.
3 Open and close the front cover to reset the machine.
Close the front cover gently holding the handle
(A).
Clearing Jams
12-9
Clearing Jams
Paper Drawer 1
If a screen similar to the one shown below appears on the display, remove the jammed paper from the paper drawer. Then press the right Any key to display the next procedure.
1 Using the handle, pull the paper drawer half way out.
3 Gently push the paper drawer back into the machine until it clicks into place in the closed position.
12-10
2 Push downward on the jammed paper as you remove it.
4 Open and close the front cover to reset the machine.
If you are using the stack bypass tray, close it before opening the front cover.
Close the front cover gently holding the handle
(A).
Do not force a jammed paper out of the machine.
Doing so may result in the feed roller coming off.
If the jammed paper cannot be removed easily, proceed to the next step.
Clearing Jams
Optional Paper Drawer (Paper Drawer 2)
If a screen similar to the one shown below appears on the display, remove the jammed paper from the optional paper drawer. Then press the right Any key to display the next procedure.
1 Using the handle, pull the paper drawer half way out.
2 Push downward on the jammed paper as you remove it.
Do not force a jammed paper out of the machine.
Doing so may result in the feed roller coming off.
If the jammed paper cannot be removed easily, proceed to the next step.
12-11
12-12
Clearing Jams
3 Gently push the optional paper drawer back into the machine until it clicks into place in the closed position.
4 Open and close the front cover to reset the machine.
If you are using the stack bypass tray, close it before opening the front cover.
Close the front cover gently holding the handle
(A).
Clearing Jams
Inside of the Machine
If a screen similar to the one shown below appears on the display, remove the jammed paper from the inside of the machine. Then press the right Any key to display the next procedure.
1 Open the front cover
If you are using the stack bypass tray, close it before opening the front cover.
Open the front cover gently holding the handle
(A).
– Do not place any object on or touch the transfer belt (A) of the delivery feeder unit. The transfer belt (A) of the delivery feeder unit is supplied with a function that cleans itself, therefore, do not clean the belt even when the toner is on it. If the delivery feeder unit is broken or transfer belt (A) is damaged, this may result in misfeeds or deterioration in print quality.
– When removing jammed paper, be sure to place paper on the transfer belt (A) of the delivery feeder unit to protect the belt.
–
–
If the size of the paper loaded in the paper drawer differs from the paper size set in the
<Paper Settings> or the paper size set on the printer driver, a paper jam may occur. If this is the case, load the correct size paper before removing the jammed paper.
If you remove the jammed paper before re-loading the correct size paper, another paper jam may occur. Make sure to re-load the correct size paper before removing the jammed paper.
12-13
Clearing Jams
2 Hold both sides of any jammed paper and pull it out in the direction of the arrow.
4 Hold both sides of any jammed paper and gently pull it out in the direction of the arrow.
–
–
–
Gently remove the jammed paper in the direction of the arrow to prevent unfixed toner from spilling.
When removing the paper, be careful not to touch the transfer belt of the delivery feeder unit or toner cartridge.
Do not force a jammed paper out of the machine. If the jammed paper cannot be removed easily, proceed to the next step.
3 Hold both sides of any jammed paper and gently pull it out in the direction of the arrow.
Do not force a jammed paper out of the machine.
If the jammed paper cannot be removed easily, proceed to the next step.
5 Press the lock release buttons (A) on the duplex print transport guide and lift the duplex print transport guide (B).
If you are not performing two-sided printing, proceed to the next step.
12-14
Do not force a jammed paper out of the machine.
If the jammed paper cannot be removed easily, proceed to the next step.
Do not force a jammed paper out of the machine.
If the jammed paper cannot be removed easily, proceed to the next step.
6 Remove the jammed paper while lifting the duplex print transport guide.
Clearing Jams
8 Hold the tab (A) of the delivery feeder unit, and lift the delivery feeder unit until it clicks.
Do not force a jammed paper out of the machine.
If the jammed paper cannot be removed easily, proceed to the next step.
7 Lower the duplex print transport guide until it clicks into its original position.
If the delivery feeder unit comes off, see “If the
Delivery Feeder Unit Is Not Installed Correctly,” on p. 12-22.
9 Remove the jammed paper in the direction of the arrow.
Make sure that the duplex print transport guide is closed completely. If the duplex print transport guide is not closed completely, this may result in misfeeds or paper jams.
Do not force a jammed paper out of the machine.
If the jammed paper cannot be removed easily, proceed to the next step.
12-15
12-16
Clearing Jams
10 Close the front cover.
Fixing Unit
If a screen similar to the one shown below appears on the display, remove the jammed paper from the fixing unit. Then press the right Any key to display the next procedure.
1 Lift the scanning platform (A) until it is locked.
2 Open the fixing cover, holding it by its left tab (A).
3 Hold both sides of any jammed paper and gently pull it out.
Do not force a jammed paper out of the machine.
If the jammed paper cannot be removed easily, proceed to the next step.
4 Close the fixing cover.
5 Lower the scanning platform.
Clearing Jams
12-17
12-18
Clearing Jams
Back Cover
If a screen similar to the one shown below appears on the LCD display, remove the jammed paper from the back side of the machine. Then press the right Any key to display the next procedure.
1 Open the back cover.
3 Close the back cover.
2 Hold both sides of any jammed paper and gently pull it out.
4 Open and close the front cover to reset the machine.
If you are using the stack bypass tray, close it before opening the front cover.
Close the front cover gently holding the handle
(A).
When the Message Does Not Disappear
When the Message Does Not Disappear
When the message that indicates a paper jam occurring inside the top cover does not disappear even after the jammed paper is removed, this indicates that the jammed paper still remains in the fixing unit. Remove the fixing unit using the following procedure to remove the jammed paper.
The fixing unit and its surroundings inside the printer are hot during use. Make sure the fixing unit is completely cool before removing the jammed paper. Touching the fixing unit when it is still hot may result in burns.
–
–
–
–
When you remove the fixing unit, you have to turn the main power switch OFF.
Sending or receiving documents cannot be done when the main power switch is OFF or the power cord is disconnected.
If the main power switch is turned OFF, all jobs waiting in the print queue will be erased.
Documents received into memory and documents stored for delayed send will be retained for approximately 60 minutes after the power cord has been disconnected.
1 Turn OFF the main power switch and disconnect the power cord.
2 Lift the scanning platform (A) until it is locked.
3 Grasp and pull the tab (A) on the left side of the top cover to open the fixing cover.
12-19
When the Message Does Not Disappear
4 Move the control panel into the upright position.
8 Open the fixing unit cover.
5 Press the blue tabs (A) and hold the fixing unit by the parts indicated with arrows.
9 Remove the jammed paper.
12-20
6 Remove the fixing unit with both hands.
10 Install the fixing unit.
7 Place the fixing unit on a flat surface.
11 Close the fixing cover.
12 Lower the scanning platform.
13 Reconnect the power cord and turn on the main power switch.
When the Message Does Not Disappear
12-21
12-22
If the Delivery Feeder Unit Is Not Installed Correctly
If the Delivery Feeder Unit Is Not Installed
Correctly
If the delivery feeder unit is not installed correctly, an error code <E000012> appears on the display. Follow the procedure below to install the delivery feeder unit correctly. If the error code does not disappear after the delivery feeder unit is installed correctly, contact Canon
Customer Care Center.
–
–
–
–
–
You have to remove the delivery feeder unit and re-install the delivery feeder unit correctly.
When you remove the delivery feeder unit, you have to turn the main power switch OFF.
Sending or receiving documents cannot be done when the main power switch is OFF or the power cord is disconnected.
If the main power switch is turned OFF, all jobs waiting in the print queue will be erased.
Documents received into memory and documents stored for delayed send will be retained for approximately 60 minutes after the power cord has been disconnected.
1 Turn OFF the main power switch and disconnect the power cord.
3 Push the levers (A) on both sides of the delivery feeder unit and remove the delivery feeder unit gently, holding it by the tabs (B).
Make sure that the Processing/Data Indicator is turned off and check the display to confirm that a job is not being processed.
2 Open the front cover.
If you are using the stack bypass tray, close it before opening the front cover.
Open the front cover gently holding the handle
(A).
Do not place any object on or touch the transfer belt (A) of the delivery feeder unit. The transfer belt (A) of the delivery feeder unit is supplied with a function that cleans itself, therefore, do not clean the belt even when the toner is on it. If the delivery feeder unit is broken or transfer belt (A) is damaged, this may result in misfeeds or deterioration in print quality.
If the Delivery Feeder Unit Is Not Installed Correctly
5 Confirm that the triangle marks (A) on the delivery feeder unit are aligned with the triangle marks (B) on the machine.
4 Install the delivery feeder unit so that the protrusions (A) of the delivery feeder unit fit into the guides (B) and click into place.
6 Close the front cover
Close the front cover gently holding the handle.
7 Reconnect the power cord and turn on the main power switch.
12-23
12-24
Error Messages
Error Messages
When a message appears on the display, please refer to the examples of error messages in the table below.
Message
A cover is open.
Avail. Mem.
Cannot complete searching due to timeout. Check the settings.
Description
The front cover or the fixing unit cover is open.
This message shows the percentage of the memory currently available.
This message is displayed when you set the originals in the feeder in
Fax/Send mode.
– The machine could not search for destinations within the specified time.
Action
Close the front cover or the fixing unit cover.
If you need more space, wait for the machine to send any documents in memory. Also print, send, or delete any documents stored in memory.
Cannot connect to the selected server. Check the settings.
Cannot connect to the server because timer settings for this device differ to those of the selected server.
Cannot find server.
– An error occurred on the LDAP server side.
The machine cannot connect to the specified IP address/port.
The time setting of the LDAP server and the time setting of the machine are more than five minutes apart.
The IP address that the machine should connect to cannot be determined.
– Increase the time setting for <Search
Timeout> in <Register LDAP Server>.
(See “Network Settings,” in the e-Manual.)
– Check that the LDAP server is functioning normally.
–
–
–
–
Check the gateway address setting.
(See “Network Settings,” in the e-Manual.)
Check the server address and port number for the LDAP server. (See
“Network Settings,” in the e-Manual.)
Check that the LDAP server is operating properly.
If <Login Information> is set to <Use
(Sec. Auth.): Ver 3 (UTF-8)> for the
LDAP server, check whether UDP (User
Datagram Protocol) packages are blocked by the filter.
The machine cannot connect to an LDAP server if the time setting of the server and the time setting of the machine are more than five minutes apart with
<Login Information> set to <Use (Sec.
Auth.): Ver 3 (UTF-8)> for the LDAP server. Check the time settings on the server and the machine.
Check the DNS (Domain Name System)
Server Settings in TCP/IPv4 or v6 in <Network Settings> in <System
Management Set> (from the Additional
Functions screen).
Error Messages
Message
Cannot find the selected server.
Check the settings.
Check the XXX toner. (XXX indicates “Black”, “Yellow”,
“Cyan”, or “Magenta”.)
Check the XXX toner connection.
(XXX indicates “Black”, “Yellow”,
“Cyan”, or “Magenta”.)
Check TCP/IP.
Check that all of the covers are closed.
Check the originals.
Clean the scan area.
Clear the output tray.
Description
– The IP address that the machine should connect to cannot be determined.
–
Action
Check the DNS (Domain Name
System) server settings. (See “Network
Settings,” in the e-Manual.)
– Check whether the DNS server’s DNS settings are correct.
– Check the DNS (Domain Name
System) server settings. (See “Network
Settings,” in the e-Manual.)
– If <Login Information> is set to
<Use (Sec. Auth.): Ver 3 (UTF-8)> for the LDAP server, the machine cannot determine the host name.
A toner cartridge that cannot guarentee print quality because it has reached the end of its life etc., or a toner cartridge that has already been spent may be set.
There may be a problem with the toner cartridge connection of the indicated color.
The machine’s TCP/IP is not operating.
The cover is open.
Continued use of this toner cartridge may cause the machine to malfunction.
Replacing of the toner cartridge is
recommended. (See “Replacing the
Toner Cartridge with a New One,” on p.
– Take out the toner cartridge of the indicated color, then properly set it again. For detailed instructions, (see
“Replacing the Toner Cartridge with a
– Turn OFF the main power switch, wait for more than 10 seconds, then turn it
ON again.
– When this message does not disappear even if you take the above procedures, replace the toner cartridge with a new one (see
“Replacing the Toner Cartridge with a
Check the IP Address Settings in
<Network Settings> in <System
Management Set> (from the Additional
Functions screen). (See “Network
Settings,” in the e-Manual.)
Check the cover and make sure that it is completely closed.
Correctly set the original in the feeder.
The original is not correctly set in the feeder.
The feeder scanning area may be dirty.
Output paper is piled up on the output tray.
Clean the feeder scanning area (see
“Scanning Area,” on p. 2-3), then press
[OK].
Remove the output paper from the output tray.
12-25
12-26
Error Messages
Message
Drawer 1 is not inserted.
Description
Printing or copying could not be performed because the paper drawer (Drawer 1) was not set.
An unknown error occurred.
Action
Set the paper drawer (Drawer 1) and push it in as far as it will go. The copy or print will automatically resume.
The machine failed to analyze the server certificate sent from the RADIUS server.
IEEE802.1X Error An unknown error has occurred.
IEEE802.1X Error Unknown error has occurred.
IEEE802.1X Error Cannot analyze the Certificate.
IEEE802.1X Error Change the password.
IEEE802.1X Error Check authentication settings.
IEEE802.1X Error No reply from the destination.
IEEE802.1X Error Set the correct
Certificate info.
IEEE802.1X Error Set the correct certificate information.
IEEE802.1X Error The Certificate has expired.
IEEE802.1X Error The Certificate is incorrect.
Insert the toner cartridge all the way holding the right & left grips.
Insert the XXX toner correctly.
(XXX indicates “Black”, “Yellow”,
“Cyan”, or “Magenta”.)
Insert the XXX toner in the location of the correct color. (XXX indicates
“Black”, “Yellow”, “Cyan”, or
“Magenta”.)
The machine failed to analyze the server certificate sent from the
RADIUS server.
The password has expired.
The specified authentication method of the machine does not match the authentication method of the
RADIUS server.
An error occurred when communicating with the authenticator.
The correct client authentication information (the key pair and certificate, user name and password, and the CA certificate) is not set.
The server certificate sent from the
RADIUS server has expired.
An error occurred when verifying the server certificate sent from the RADIUS server using the CA certificate.
A toner cartridge is not installed or not installed correctly.
The toner cartridge of the indicated color is not inserted.
The toner cartridge of the indicated color is not inserted in the correct location for that color.
Check for any errors in the server certificate on the RADIUS server.
Set a new password.
Make sure that the correct authentication method is specified on the machine. If the information set on the machine is inconsistent with that of the RADIUS server, specify the correct authentication method.
Check for any errors in the authenticator
(LAN switch) settings, as well as the
RADIUS server settings.
Check for incorrect settings in the authentication method and authentication information (the key pair and certificate, user name and password, and the CA certificate).
Check the expiration date of the server certificate on the RADIUS server.
Check for any errors in the server certificate on the RADIUS server, as well as the CA certificate registered on the machine.
Install the toner cartridge correctly.
Properly insert the toner cartridge of the indicated color. For detailed instructions,
see “Replacing the Toner Cartridge with a New One,” on p. 11-8.
Insert the toner cartridge of the indicated color in the correct location for that color. For detailed instructions, see
“Replacing the Toner Cartridge with a
Error Messages
Message
Insert the fixing unit.
Insert the toner cartridge all the way holding the right & left grips.
Load LTR to Drawer 1.
(Depending on the paper supply and settings, the message displayed may vary.)
Load paper.
No response from the destination.
Description
The fixing unit is not inserted.
Action
Insert the fixing unit. For detailed
instructions, see “When the Message
Does Not Disappear,” on p. 12-19.
Install the toner cartridge correctly.
A toner cartridge is not installed or not installed correctly.
–
•
The following did not match when copying, receiving faxes/I-faxes or
•
E-mails:
The paper size specified on the machine
The size of the paper loaded in the paper drawer
–
•
•
The following did not match when printing:
The paper size specified on the machine
The size of the paper loaded in the paper drawer
The following did not match when printing:
• The paper size specified on the
• printer driver
The paper size specified on the machine
– The server was not running when you tried to send.
– The network connection was lost when you tried to send. (Either you could not connect to the destination or the connection was lost before the job could complete.)
– A TCP/IP error occurred when you tried to send an e-mail or I-fax.
–
•
•
Change the following so that they match:
Paper size setting on the machine
The size of the paper loaded in the paper drawer
(See “Loading Paper” on p. 2-10 or
“Setting Paper Size and Type,” on p. 2-22.)
– To print on the paper of the size specified on the machine’s paper settings and on the printer driver:
Load the paper of the size specified on the machine and on the printer driver and close the paper drawer. Printing will resume.
– To print on the paper of the size that is loaded in the paper drawer:
1. Delete the current job.
2. Change the paper size settings both on the printer driver and on the machine.
3. Retry printing.
Change the following so that they match, and then retry printing (When you change the paper size setting on the printer driver, cancel the job on the machine.):
• The paper size setting on the printer driver
• The paper size setting on the machine
– Check the destination.
–
–
Check the status of the network.
Check that the network cables and connectors are properly connected.
12-27
12-28
Error Messages
Message
No response from the server.
Check the settings.
Not enough TCP/IP resources.
Wait a moment and perform the operation again.
Paper diff. from set size/type.
Description
The specified server settings are incorrect, or the server is not turned
ON. Alternatively, the machine’s
TCP/IP resources may be low.
You cannot browse the network due to a lack of TCP/IP resources. This may be because documents have just been continuously sent or are being continuously sent through FTP or Windows (SMB).
–
•
The following did not match when copying, receiving faxes/I-faxes or
•
E-mails:
The paper size specified on the machine
The size of the paper loaded in the paper drawer
–
•
•
•
The following did not match when printing:
The paper size specified on the printer driver
The paper size specified on the machine
The size of the paper loaded in the paper drawer
Action
Wait for a while, and try browsing again.
If you still fail, try selecting another server.
Wait for a while, and try browsing again.
–
•
•
Change the following so that they match:
Paper size setting on the machine
The size of the paper loaded in the paper drawer
(See “Loading Paper” on p. 2-10 or
“Setting Paper Size and Type,” on p. 2-22.)
–
•
•
•
Change the following so that they match, and then retry printing:
The paper size specified on the printer driver
The paper size specified on the machine
The size of the paper loaded in the paper drawer
(See “Loading Paper” on p. 2-10,
“Setting Paper Size and Type,” on p. 2-22 or “Printing Fundamentals,” in
the e-Manual.)
Error Messages
Message
Paper diff. from set size/type.
Perform the operation again.
Preparing...
Prepare a new toner cartridge.
(XXX) (XXX indicates “Black”,
“Yellow”, “Cyan”, or “Magenta”.)
Description
– The appropriate paper type for printing received faxes, I-faxes, or
E-mails is not loaded.
Paper is jammed in the fixing unit.
Check the manual for instructions.
A paper jam occurred in the fixing unit.
–
Action
If the message <Paper different from set size/type> appears after you have selected <Recover Later> to the message <Remove the jammed paper from inside the front cover.>:
1. Change the following so that they match:
•
• Paper size setting on the machine
The size of the paper loaded in the paper drawer
(See “Loading Paper” on p. 2-10 or
“Setting Paper Size and Type,” on p. 2-22.)
2. Remove the jammed paper inside the machine and close the front
cover (see “Inside of the Machine,” on p. 12-13).
– Load the appropriate type of paper
(Plain 1, Plain 2, Recycled Paper, Color) and change the paper type in <Paper
Settings>.
Check the location of the paper jam and remove the jammed paper. Press the right Any key to display the next procedure. For detailed instructions, see
Check the line condition, then try again.
A transmission error has occurred because the line condition was poor.
The machine is not ready for scanning.
When a toner cartridge needs to be replaced soon.
Wait until the machine is ready.
Have a replacement toner cartridge ready so you can quickly replace the toner cartridge when it runs out.
• If the message is displayed while copying or printing (including
• manually printing a report), printing of the job that is currently being processed will continue.
If the message is displayed when receiving a fax, the received fax is stored in the memory without being printed. If <Toner Out Continuous
Print> is set to <On>, however, printing will continue. (Printing will also continue if a report is printed
automatically.) See “Specifying the
Way of Printing When Toner Is Low,” on p. 5-107.
12-29
12-30
Error Messages
Message
Press the OK key.
Printer Error
Received in memory.
Remove the jammed paper from inside the cover of the feeder.
Description
[Stop] has been pressed while scanning the document using the feeder.
Some kind of error has occurred in the machine.
Action
Press [OK], then set the originals again.
The machine temporarily received the data in memory because an error of some kind has occurred in the machine. This error message appears with one of the messages below.
<Load paper.>, <A cover is open.>,
<Check that all of the covers are closed.>, <The paper has jammed.>,
<Remove the jammed paper from...>, <Replace the toner.>
A paper jam occurred inside the cover of the feeder.
Turn OFF the main power switch, wait for more than 10 seconds, then turn it
ON again. If the message persists, take a note of the error code that appears on the bottom left of the display, turn
OFF the main power switch, disconnect the power cord, and contact Canon
Customer Care Center.
This error message appears with another message. When the error is resolved, the received data will be printed out. For how to solve the problem, see the action for the messages displayed with it.
Check the location of the paper jam and remove the jammed paper. Press the right Any key to display the next procedure. For detailed instructions, see
Error Messages
Message
Remove the jammed paper from inside the front cover.
Description
– A paper jam occurred inside the front cover.
– A paper jam occurred because the paper loaded in the paper drawer is different from the paper specified in <Paper Settings> and the printer driver screen.
Remove the jammed paper from
XXX. (XXX indicates the location of the jam.)
A paper jam occurred at the location shown on the display.
Remove the paper, and close the tray.
Replace the toner cartridge. (XXX)
(XXX indicates “Black”, “Yellow”,
“Cyan”, or “Magenta”.)
A paper jam occurred in the stack bypass tray.
When the toner runs out.
–
Action
Check the location of the paper jam and remove the jammed paper. Press the right Any key to display the next procedure. For detailed instructions,
see “Inside of the Machine,” on p. 12-13.
–
–
When printing, follow the instructions below.
1. Reload the correct size of paper into
the paper drawer. (See “Reloading the Paper,” on p. 12-42.)
2. Remove the jammed paper and close the front cover. When removing the paper, be careful not to touch the transfer belt of the delivery feeder unit or toner cartridge.
When copying, follow the instructions below.
1. Reload the correct size of paper into the paper drawer or stack bypass
tray. (See “Reloading the Paper,” on p. 12-42.)
2. Remove the jammed paper and
close the front cover. (See “Inside of the Machine,” on p. 12-13.)
3. Wait a while until the job resumes.
Check the location of the paper jam and remove the jammed paper. Press the right Any key to display the next procedure. For detailed instructions, see
Check the location of the paper jam and remove the jammed paper. Press the right Any key to display the next procedure. For detailed instructions, see
“Stack Bypass Tray,” on p. 12-8.
Replace the toner cartridge of the indicated color. Incidentally, even if any of Yellow, Cyan or Magenta toner runs out, black and white printing can still be performed if Black toner remains.
12-31
12-32
Error Messages
Message
Search condition includes characters that cannot be used with the selected server.
Set the IP Address.
Set the toner cartridge. (XXX) (XXX indicates either “Black”, “Yellow”,
“Cyan”, or “Magenta”.)
The counter has reached the set value.
The memory is full.
Description
– “\” is used in the search criterion.
–
•
•
The combination of characters used in the search criterion does not constitute an acceptable search criterion.
There is an unequal number of
“(“ and “)”.
“*” is not placed within “( )”.
– If <Server LDAP Version and Char.
Code> is set to <Ver.2 (JIS)>, characters other than ASCII Code
(0x20-0x7E) are being used.
This machine is not set with an IP address.
The toner cartridge of the indicated color is not set.
You cannot print because the set page limit for either scans, prints, or copies in the department ID management function has been reached.
– The machine is full of jobs.
–
Action
Remove “\” from the search criterion, and then search again.
– Make sure that the characters for the search criterion are combined properly, and then search again.
– Omit characters that cannot be used, and then search again.
Specify the IP Address Settings in
<TCP/IP Settings> in <Network Settings> in <System Management Set> (from the Additional Functions screen), then turn the machine’s main power OFF and back ON again. (See “Network Settings,” or “Setting Up the Machine,” in the e-Manual.)
Set the toner cartridge of the indicated color. For detailed instructions, see
“Replacing the Toner Cartridge with a
Contact your system manager.
–
–
–
–
Print, send, or delete any documents stored in memory.
Divide the document stack or data into a few parts and try again one by one.
Send the document with low resolution.
When this message appears during using the feeder, the scanning document stops halfway. In this case, clear the paper jam from the feeder.
Error Messages
Message
The memory is full.
The number of search results has exceeded limits. If the desired destination is not displayed, change the search conditions and try again.
The scan area is dirty.
This size cannot be used with
2-Sided unit modes.
Transmission has been suspended.
Contact system manager.
Turn off the main power on the right side of the machine.
Wait a moment...
Description
– The number of TX/RX jobs that can be stored in memory reached the maximum.
The number of addresses that meet the search criteria exceeds the specified maximum number of addresses to search.
–
Action
The maximum numbers of jobs that can be stored in memory are as follows (Based on the condition that the other party sends the fax by the Color imageCLASS MF9280Cdn/
Color imageCLASS MF9220Cdn with
ITU-T No. 1 Chart standard mode):
Up to 70 jobs for sending or 90 jobs for receiving, 95 fax jobs including sending and receiving, or 75 e-mail and I-fax jobs for receiving.
Wait for the machine to send any documents in memory. Also print, send, or delete any documents stored in memory.
– Narrow down the search criteria, and then search again.
– Increase the maximum number of addresses to search. (See “Network
Settings,” in the e-Manual.)
Clean the feeder’s scanning area.
Set the paper size to <LTR> or <LGL>, then load paper of the same size.
The feeder’s scanning area is dirty.
The paper size is not appropriate for a two-sided copy.
You tried to send e-mails or I-faxes when the machine is in the User ID
Management with the e-mail address of the login user not registered.
Description Some kind of error has occurred in the machine.
This message appears when turning
ON the main power switch, or when the machine is not ready for printing.
Use the Remote UI to register the e-mail address for each user when User ID
Management is enabled.
Turn OFF the main power switch, wait for more than 10 seconds, then turn it
ON again. If the message persists, write down the error code displayed on the bottom left side of the display, turn
OFF the main power switch, disconnect the power cord, and contact Canon
Customer Care Center.
Wait until the message disappears.
12-33
Error Codes
Error Codes
If a job or operation does not complete successfully, check the error code, and perform the necessary operations according to the error code displayed. You can check the error code on the Details screen when you select <Log> on the System Monitor screen.
If a send, receive, or fax job does not complete successfully, the error code is printed in the
RESULT column on the Activity Report, TX Report, and Fax Activity Report.
Perform the necessary procedures according to the error code.
12-34
For details on reports, see “Introduction of the Machine,” in the e-Manual.
See the table below for individual error codes.
Error Code
#0001
#0003
Description
Paper or originals are jammed.
Communications that take longer than the preset time (64 minutes) caused the error.
Action
Remove any jammed paper or originals. (See
–
–
Reduce the resolution or divide the document into two or more parts, and then try sending
the document again. (See “Selecting
When receiving a document, ask the sender to either reduce the resolution at which the document is scanned, or divide the document into two or more parts before sending it.
Error Codes
Error Code
#0005
#0009
#0012
#0018
#0037
#0059
#0099
#0401
–
Description
The recipient did not answer within 35 seconds.
– The recipient’s machine is not a G3 fax.
– There is no paper.
– The paper drawer is not correctly inserted into the machine.
The document could not be sent because the recipient’s machine was out of paper.
– The recipient’s machine did not respond when your machine redialed.
– The documents could not be sent because the recipient’s machine was busy.
– The settings on your machine do not match the settings on the recipient’s machine.
– No pause was included in the telephone number when sending a fax overseas.
– Documents could not be received because there is insufficient memory available.
– The data size exceeds the available memory.
Your transmission is canceled because the number you dialed was different from the number registered on the other party’s fax machine.
A job was interrupted when the Media To Print or
Scan To Media function was being used.
The USB memory is full or the maximum number of files that can be stored in the root directory
(the top level of the directory tree in the USB memory) has been reached.
–
Action
Confirm that the recipient’s machine is able to communicate, and try again.
– Check the type of receiving machine with the receiving party.
–
Load paper. (See “Loading Paper,” on p. 2-10.)
–
Insert the paper drawer properly. (See “Loading
Ask the recipient to load paper into their fax machine.
– Confirm that the recipient’s machine is able to communicate, and then try again.
– Confirm that the recipient’s machine is able to communicate, and then try again.
– Check that the settings on your machine match those on the recipient’s machine, and that the recipient’s machine is able to communicate.
Try sending again.
–
–
Insert a pause after the country code, or after the fax number of the recipient, and then dial
the number again. (See “Dialing an Overseas
Number (With Pauses),” on p. 5-22.)
Change the Long Distance setting if you are sending documents to a destination stored in the Address Book or One-touch.
(See “Registering Fax Numbers in the
Address Book,” on p. 3-2 or “Storing/Editing
– Print, send, or delete any documents stored in memory.
– Reduce the data size by lowering the resolution or by changing the file format.
Check to see that the correct fax number is registered on the other party’s fax machine.
Try to execute the job if necessary.
Delete unnecessary files in the USB memory or organize the files in the root directory by moving existing files to a newly created folder.
12-35
12-36
Error Codes
Error Code
#0403
#0404
#0406
#0407
#0408
#0703
#0705
#0751
Description
The job failed because the same file name existed. Generally, if the same file name exists, a file will be automatically renamed by adding a number, which ranges from 1 to 999, to the tail of its file name in order to avoid naming conflicts.
However, this error occurred because the file with the same number already added to its file name existed.
The job failed because the write protect switch of the USB memory was ON.
– The job failed because the medium was pulled out while the job was in progress.
– An error has occurred while data, such as image data, were being transferred to the medium. (The connected medium may be formatted with a file system that is not supported by the machine.)
– The length of the full path to the specified file
(or folder) exceeded the supported limit.
– The transfer of data has failed because the medium was pulled out during the transfer.
– An error has occurred while data, such as image data, were being transferred to the medium.
The memory for image data is full when sending color documents.
The send process was interrupted because the size of the image data being sent was larger than the size limit set in <Send Data Size Limit> in <E-mail/I-Fax Settings> in <Communications
Settings> in <System Management Set> (from the Additional Functions screen).
The server is not functioning. The network is down (the server is unable to connect to the network or was disconnected).
Action
Rename the file, and then write the data again.
Turn OFF the write protect switch of the USB memory.
– Confirm that the medium is properly inserted, and then write the data again.
– Check the status of the medium, or make sure that the medium is formatted with a file system supported by the machine (FAT16 or FAT32), and then try again.
– The limit of the length of the full path is 120.
Change or shorten the file name to be written.
– Confirm that the medium is correctly inserted and then try the transfer again.
– Check the status of the medium, or make sure that the medium is formatted with a file system supported by the machine.
–
–
Wait a few moments, and then try sending again after other send jobs are complete.
Erase documents stored in memory. If the machine still does not operate normally, turn the main power OFF, and then back ON.
–
–
–
–
Change the setting of the size limit in the
<Send Data Size Limit> in <E-mail/I-Fax
Settings> in <Communications Settings> in <System Management Set> (from the
Additional Functions screen).
Select a lower resolution.
If you are sending an I-fax, reduce the size of the data by decreasing the number of pages that contain images so that it will not exceed the size limit set in <Send Data Size Limit>.
When scanning, set <Divide Pages> to <On> in
<Color/File Format Settings>.
–
–
Check the recipient’s address.
Check that the network is up.
Error Codes
Error Code
#0752
#0753
#0755
–
Description
The SMTP server name for e-mail or I-fax is not correct.
– The domain name or e-mail address may not be set.
– The mail server is not functioning.
– The network is down.
– While an e-mail message were being sent in color, some error occurred.
A TCP/IP error occurred while sending documents to a file server, or sending an e-mail message.
(Socket, Select error, etc.)
– You cannot send jobs because TCP/IP is not functioning correctly.
– The IP address is not set.
– When the machine was turned ON, an IP address was not assigned to the machine by the DHCP, RARP, or BOOTP server.
–
Action
Start the Remote UI and make sure that the
SMTP Server in E-mail/I-Fax Settings under
Network Settings matches the SMTP server address you checked in “Network Settings,” in the e-Manual.
– Start the Remote UI and make sure that
Domain Name in TCP/IP Settings under
Network Settings is set correctly.
– Start the Remote UI and make sure that E-mail
Address in E-mail/I-Fax Settings under Network
Settings is set correctly.
– Ask the network administrator to check that the mail server is operating properly.
– Ask the network administrator to check that the network is operating properly.
– Try sending several times. If the error persists, ask the network administrator to check that the network is operating properly.
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Check that the network cable is properly connected between the machine and your computer.
Check that the <SMB Settings> is set to <On>.
Check that the <Host Name> of the file server destination is set correctly.
Check that the <Workgroup Name> is set correctly.
Set <Use LM Announce> to <On>.
Check the settings in Windows Firewall.
If the machine still does not operate normally, turn the main power OFF, and then back ON.
– Check <TCP/IP Settings> in <Network
Settings> in <System Management Set> (from the Additional Functions screen).
– Check <TCP/IP Settings> in <Network
Settings> in <System Management Set> (from the Additional Functions screen).
– After the machine is turned ON, communication with a network will not start until the time specified in <Startup Time
Settings> in <Network Settings> in <System
Management Set> (from the Additional
Functions screen) elapses. Wait a few moments, and then try sending again.
12-37
12-38
Error Codes
Error Code
#0801
#0802
#0804
#0806
#0808
–
Description
A timeout error occurred while the machine was communicating with the SMTP server to send an e-mail message.
– The SMTP server returned an error while trying to connect. The destination is not correct.
– An error occurred on the server side during transmission to a file server.
– The e-mail address is incorrect.
–
Action
Check that the SMTP server is functioning normally, or check the network status.
– Check the destination setting.
– Check that the file server is operating properly.
–
–
–
–
The name of the SMTP server is incorrect.
The domain name of the DNS server is incorrect.
The name of the DNS server is incorrect.
Connection to the DNS server failed.
You have no permission to access the folder.
– An incorrect user name or password was specified for the sending of a file to a file server.
– Start the Remote UI and make sure that the
E-mail Address in E-mail/I-Fax Settings under
Network Settings is set correctly.
– Start the Remote UI and make sure that SMTP
Server in E-mail/I-Fax Settings under Network
Settings matches the SMTP server address you checked in “Network Settings,” in the e-Manual.
– Start the Remote UI and make sure that
Domain Name in TCP/IP Settings under
Network Settings is set correctly.
– Start the Remote UI and make sure that Primary
DNS Server Address and Secondary DNS Server
Address in TCP/IP Settings under Network
Settings are set correctly.
– Ask the network administrator to check that the DNS server is operating properly.
Check that the user name and password you specified match the user accounts (user name and password) registered to the computer (file server).
– Check that the user name and password you specified match the user accounts (user name and password) registered to the computer (file server).
– Check the e-mail or I-fax address.
– An incorrect destination was specified for the sending of an e-mail message or I-fax.
– A timeout error occurred while the machine was communicating with the FTP server.
– The FTP server returned an error while trying to connect. The destination is not correct.
An error occurred on the server side during transmission.
–
–
–
–
–
– Check that the FTP server is functioning normally.
Check the network status.
Check that the FTP server is functioning normally.
Check the network status.
Check the destination setting.
Check the status and setting of the file server.
Error Codes
Error Code
#0810
#0813
#0816
#0818
#0819
#0820
#0821
#0827
#0828
#0829
–
Description
A POP (Post Office Protocol) server connection error occurred while receiving an I-fax.
– The POP server returned an error during the connection.
– A timeout error occurred on the server while connecting to the POP server.
The login name or password for access to the POP server is incorrect.
You have reached the quota for the number of pages you can scan for faxing.
You have received data that cannot be processed
(cannot print the attached file).
You have received data that cannot be processed
(MIME information is incorrect).
You have received data that cannot be processed
(BASE 64 or uuencode is incorrect).
– You have received data that cannot be processed (TIFF analysis error).
– The read job failed because TIFF or JPEG files were not supported or the image data was corrupted.
You have received data that cannot be processed (contains MIME information that is not supported).
You have received HTML data.
–
–
–
Action
Check the POP Server name in <E-mail/I-Fax
Settings> in <Network Settings> in <System
Management Set> (from the Additional
Functions screen).
Confirm that the POP server is functioning normally.
Check the network status.
– Start the Remote UI and make sure that POP
Server in E-mail/I-Fax Settings under Network
Settings matches the POP server address you checked in “Network Settings,” in the e-Manual.
– Ask the network administrator to check that the mail server or the network is operating properly.
Check that POP Address and POP Password in
E-mail/I-Fax are set correctly.
(See “Network Settings” in the e-Manual.)
Reset or increase the page quota or contact your system administrator.
Check the settings and ask the sender to resend the data.
Check the settings, and then ask the sender to resend the data. The machine can receive only e-mails in plain text format. HTML e-mails cannot be received.
Check the settings, and then ask the sender to resend the data. The machine can receive only e-mails in plain text format. HTML e-mails cannot be received.
– Check the settings, and then ask the sender to resend the data.
– Confirm that the supported file format is used, and then read data again.
Check the settings, and then ask the sender to resend the data.
Data that contains more than approximately
1,000 pages is received. (This error code may also appear when the machine receives corrupted data.)
Ask the sender to use a file format other than
HTML, and then resend the data.
This machine can store up to approximately
1,000 pages of data in memory, but will delete any data that exceeds this limit. Ask the sender to resend the remaining pages. (If the received data is corrupted, ask the sender to resend the appropriate data.)
12-39
12-40
Error Codes
Error Code
#0839
#0853
#0859
Description
The user name or password for the SMTP
Authentication is incorrect.
–
–
Action
Start the Remote UI and make sure that SMTP
Server in E-mail/I-Fax Settings under Network
Settings matches the SMTP server address you checked in “Network Settings,” in the e-Manual.
Start the Remote UI and enter the correct password for the SMTP Authentication in
Password in E-mail/I-Fax Settings under
Network Settings.
If you do not know what your password is, check in the notification form issued by your
ISP (Internet Service Provider) or consult the network administrator.
Check the settings, and then repeat the operation.
–
–
The job was not able to be processed due to the reason why it was canceled from an application or operating system while the print data was being sent to this machine from a computer etc.
You have sent the print data unsupported by the machine or sent corrupted print data.
An error occurred while compressing scanned originals.
Check the scan settings, and then try scanning again.
If a Message Such as <Paper diff. from set size/type.> is displayed
If a Message Such as <Paper diff. from set size/type.> is displayed
If all of the following do not match, a message such as <Paper diff. from set size/type.> is displayed:
–
–
–
The paper size specified on the printer driver (Only when printing from a computer)
The paper size specified in the <Paper Settings> menu on the machine
The size of the paper loaded in the paper drawer or stack bypass tray
If such a message is displayed and you are unable to make a copy or print job, change the paper size in the items described above so that they all match.
The following chart is a list of the messages. See “Error Messages,” on p. 12- 24 for details
concerning the messages and remedies.
●
Messages dsplayed when the paper szes do not match
Message
Copy
Load LTR to Drawer 1.
(Depending on the paper supply and settings, the message displayed may vary.)
Paper diff. from set size/type.
Remove the jammed paper from inside the front cover.
Cause
The following did not match:
– The paper size specified on the machine
– The size of the paper loaded in the paper drawer
The following did not match:
– The paper size specified on the machine
– The size of the paper loaded in the paper drawer
Load LTR to Drawer 1.
(Depending on the paper supply and settings, the message displayed may vary.)
Paper diff. from set size/type.
Load paper
Remove the jammed paper from inside the front cover.
–
–
The following did not match:
The paper size specified on the machine
The size of the paper loaded in the paper drawer
–
–
The following did not match:
–
The paper size specified on the printer driver
The paper size specified on the machine
The size of the paper loaded in the paper drawer
The following did not match when printing:
– The paper size specified on the printer driver
– The paper size specified on the machine
A paper jam occurred because the size of the paper loaded in the paper drawer was different from that of the paper specified on the machine and printer driver.
–
–
–
instructions.
instructions.
For print jobs, you need to specify the paper size from your computer.“
12-41
12-42
If a Message Such as <Paper diff. from set size/type.> is displayed
Reloading the Paper
1 Load the correct size paper, then press
[OK] to resume the job.
The machine re-starts printing.
See “Loading Paper,” on p. 2-10 for instructions
on how to load paper.
Changing the Paper Size Setting
●
For the Stack Bypass Tray
If you set the standard settings for stack bypass tray, follow the procedures below to change paper size.
1 Press (Main Menu).
2 Press the right Any key to select
<Additional Func.>.
4 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Stack Bypass Paper (Std.)>, then press
[OK].
3 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Paper Settings>, then press [OK].
5 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<On>, then press the right Any key to select <Option>.
If you do not want to set the stack bypass standard settings, select <Off>, then press [OK], and press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
6 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select paper size, then press [OK].
If a Message Such as <Paper diff. from set size/type.> is displayed
7 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select paper type, then press [OK].
You can select from the following paper sizes:
<LTR>, <LGL>, <STMT>, <EXEC>, <FLSC>,
<OFI>, <B-OFI>, <M-OFI>, <G-LTR>, <G-LGL>,
<Custom Size>, <COM10>, <Monarch>, <DL>,
<ISO-C5>, <ISO-B5>
If you use A/B size paper, press the right Any key to select <A/B Sizes> and select the paper size you want to use.
You can select from the following paper types:
<Plain 1>, <Plain 2>, <Recycled Paper>,
<Color>, <Bond>, <Heavy 1>, <Heavy 2>,
<Transparencies>, <Labels>, <Envelope>
The selectable paper types vary depending on the paper size you have specified. The unavailable paper types are grayed out on the display.
8 Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
●
For the Paper Drawer
Follow this procedure to change the paper size setting.
1 Press (Main Menu).
2 Press the right Any key to select
<Additional Func.>.
3 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Paper Settings>, then press [OK].
12-43
If a Message Such as <Paper diff. from set size/type.> is displayed
4 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Drawer 1> or <Drawer 2>*, then press
[OK].
7 Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
* Only when the optional Paper Drawer (Paper
Drawer 2) is attached.
5 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select paper size, then press [OK].
You can select from the following paper sizes:
<LTR>, <LGL>, <EXEC>, <FLSC>, <OFI>,
<B-OFI>, <M-OFI>
If you use A/B size paper, press the right Any key to select <A/B Sizes> and perform the step above.
6 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ] or (Scroll Wheel) to select paper type, then press [OK].
12-44
You can select from the following paper types:
<Plain 1>, <Plain 2>, <Recycled Paper>,
<Color>, <Bond>, <Heavy 1>
If a Power Failure Occurs
If a Power Failure Occurs
If power is suddenly lost due to an outage or accidental unplugging, a built-in battery retains the user data settings and the Address Book settings. Any sent or received documents stored in memory are backed up for about 60 minutes. During a power cut, functions are limited as follows:
–
–
–
You cannot send, receive, copy, scan, or print documents.
You may not be able to make telephone calls using an external telephone, depending on the type of telephone you use.
You can receive telephone calls using an external telephone depending on the type of telephone you use.
To fully charge the built-in battery, it takes approximately 2 hours after when the main power switch is ON. If the built-in battery is not fully charged, the data may not be saved properly.
12-45
12-46
If You Cannot Solve a Problem
If You Cannot Solve a Problem
Customer Support (U.S.A.)
If you cannot solve the problem after having referred to the information in this chapter, contact Canon
Customer Care Center at 1-800-OK-CANON Monday through Friday between the hours of 8:00 A.M. to 8:00
P.M. ET. On-line support is also available 24 hours a day at the website http://www.canontechsupport.com.
Customer Support (Canada)
Canon Canada Inc., off ers a full range of customer technical support options*:
– For step-by-step troubleshooting, e-mail technical support, the latest driver or document downloads, and
– answers to frequently asked questions, visit http://www.canon.ca/
Free live technical support 9 A.M. to 8 P.M. EST Monday through Friday (excluding holidays) for products still
–
– under warranty 1-800-652-2666
For the location of the authorized service facility nearest you, visit http://www.canon.ca/ or 1-800-652-2666
If the problem cannot be corrected by using one of the above technical support options, repair options are available at the time of your call to the live technical support number above or via the website at http:// www.canon.ca/
* Support program specifics are subject to change without notice.
If You Cannot Solve a Problem
●
Please have the followng nformaton ready when you contact Canon:
–
–
Product name Color imageCLASS MF9280Cdn/Color imageCLASS MF9220Cdn
Serial number (on the label located on the top inside part of the front cover)
–
–
–
Place of purchase
Nature of problem
Steps you have taken to solve the problem and the results
If the machine makes strange noises, emits smoke or odd odor, turn off the main power switch immediately, disconnect the power cord, and contact Canon Customer Care Center. Do not attempt to disassemble or repair the machine yourself.
Attempting to repair the machine yourself may void the limited warranty.
12-47
12-48
If You Cannot Solve a Problem
Machine Settings
This chapter explains how to change and check the machine settings.
Machine Settings .......................................................13-2
Printing USER’S DATA LIST ............................................. 13-2
Accessing the Setting Menu ......................................... 13-3
Setting Menu .............................................................13-5
Paper Settings .................................................................... 13-5
Volume Settings ................................................................ 13-6
Common Settings ............................................................. 13-6
Communications Settings ............................................. 13-8
Address Book Settings ..................................................13-10
Printer Settings ................................................................13-13
Timer Settings ..................................................................13-18
Adjustment/Cleaning ....................................................13-19
Report Settings ................................................................13-20
System Management Settings ...................................13-21
Chapter
13
13-2
Machine Settings
Machine Settings
You can adjust the machine settings from the Setting Menu to customize the way the machine works. To see the list of current settings, print out USER’S DATA LIST.
Printing USER’S DATA LIST
1 Press (Main Menu).
2 Press the right Any key to select
<Additional Func>.
4 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ], or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Print List>, then press [OK].
3 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ], or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Report Settings>, then press [OK].
5 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ], or (Scroll Wheel) to select <User’s Data List>, then press [OK].
6 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ], or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Yes>, then press [OK].
Machine Settings
7 Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
If you do not want to print the list, use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ], or (Scroll Wheel) to select <No>, then press
[OK].
Accessing the Setting Menu
1 Press (Main Menu).
2 Press the right Any key to select
<Additional Func>.
3 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ], or (Scroll Wheel) to select the menu you want to access, then press [OK].
<Paper Settings>
<Volume Settings>
<Common Settings>
<Communications Settings>
<Address Book Settings>
<Printer Settings>
<Timer Settings>
<Adjustment/Cleaning>
<Report Settings>
<System Management Set.>
13-3
13-4
Machine Settings
4 Use [ ▼ ], [ ▲ ], or (Scroll Wheel) to select a submenu, then press [OK].
For details on the submenu, see “Setting Menu,” on p. 13-5.
5 To register the settings or go to a submenu item, press [OK].
6 Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
Setting Menu
Setting Menu
The default settings are indicated in bold text.
–
–
–
Depending on the country of purchase, some settings may not be available.
The menus described in this section are based on the model Color imageCLASS MF9280Cdn.
Depending on the model of your machine, some settings may not be available.
Paper Settings
Item
Stack Bypass Paper (Std.)
Paper Size
Paper Type
Settings
–
–
Off
On
–
–
Inch Size : LTR , LGL, STMT, EXEC, FLSC, OFI,
B-OFI, M-OFI, G-LTR, G-LGL, Custom Size,
COM10, Monarch, DL, ISO-C5, ISO-B5
A/B Size : A4, A5, B5
Plain 1, Plain 2 , Recycled Paper, Color, Bond,
Heavy 1, Heavy 2, Transparencies, Labels,
Envelope
Drawer 1
Paper Size
Paper Type
–
–
Inch Size : LTR , LGL, EXEC, FLSC, OFI, B-OFI,
M-OFI
A/B Size : A4, A5, B5
Plain 1, Plain 2 , Recycled Paper, Color, Bond,
Heavy 1
Drawer 2*
Paper Size
Paper Type
Custom Size
–
–
Inch Size : LTR , LGL, EXEC, FLSC, OFI, B-OFI,
M-OFI
A/B Size : A4, A5, B5
Plain 1, Plain 2 , Recycled Paper, Color, Bond,
Heavy 1
–
–
Size 1
Size 2
* Only when the Cassette Feeding Unit-AC1 (Optional) is attached.
Applicable Page
13-5
13-6
Setting Menu
Volume Settings
Item
Monitor Volume Settings
Audible Tones
Incoming Ring
Entry Tone
Error Tone
TX Done Tone
Receive Done Tone
Print Done Tone
Scan Done Tone
Common Settings
Item
Initial Function Settings
Select Initial Function
Set System Monitor to Def.
Status Monitor Device
Register Custom Key
Key 1
Key 2
–
–
Settings
Volume Key Settings Priority
Screen Settings Priority
–
–
Off
On (1 to 3)( 1 )
–
–
Off
On (1 to 3)( 1 )
–
–
–
–
–
–
Off
On (1 to 3)( 1 )
Off
On (1 to 3)( 1 )
Off
On (1 to 3)( 1 )
–
–
Off
On (1 to 3)( 1 )
–
–
Off
On (1 to 3)( 1 )
Applicable Page e-Manual
“Introduction of the
Machine”
Settings
Main Menu , Copy, Send/Fax, Scan to Store,
Direct Print*
–
–
–
–
Off
On
Off
On
Copy , Send/Fax, Fax, E-mail, I-Fax, File Server,
Send Log, Address Book, Search LDAP Server,
Favorites, One-touch, Scan to Store, Store on
Memory, Remote Scan, Direct Print*
Copy, Send/Fax , Fax, E-mail, I-Fax, File Server,
Send Log, Address Book, Search LDAP Server,
Favorites, One-touch, Scan to Store, Store on
Memory, Remote Scan, Direct Print*
Applicable Page e-Manual
“Introduction of the
Machine”
Item
Brightness Adjustment
Reverse Color Display
Auto Clear Settings
Inch Entry
Auto Drawer Selection
Copy
Stack Bypass
Drawer 1
Drawer 2
Printer
Stack Bypass
Drawer 1
Drawer 2
Receive
Stack Bypass
Drawer 1
Drawer 2
Other
Stack Bypass
Drawer 1
Drawer 2
Sleep Mode Energy Use
–
–
Off
On
–
–
Off
On
–
–
Off
On
–
–
Off
On
–
–
Off
On
–
–
Off
On
–
–
Off
On
–
–
Off
On
–
–
Off
On
–
–
Off
On
–
–
Off
On
–
–
Off
On
–
–
Low
High
Settings
Darker - Brighter ( 5 )
–
–
Off
On
–
–
Selected Function
Initial Function
–
–
Off
On
Setting Menu
Applicable Page e-Manual
“Introduction of the
Machine”
13-7
13-8
Setting Menu
Item
Paper Feed Method Switch
Stack Bypass
Drawer 1
Drawer 2
Language Switch
Error when Feeder is Dirty
Initialize Common Settings
* Only for the Color imageCLASS MF9280Cdn.
Communications Settings
Item
Common Settings
TX Settings
Register Unit Name
Data Compression Ratio
Retry Times
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Speed Priority
Print Side Priority
Speed Priority
Print Side Priority
Speed Priority
Print Side Priority
Off
On
–
–
Off
On
–
–
No
Yes
Max. 24 characters
–
–
–
High Ratio
Normal
Low Ratio
0 to 5 Times ( 3 )
Settings
Settings
Change Send Func. Mode
TX Terminal ID
Printing Position
Telephone # Mark
Color Send Gamma Value
Sharpness
–
–
Register
Initialize
On
–
–
Inside
Outside
–
–
FAX
TEL
Gamma 1.0, Gamma 1.4, Gamma 1.8
, Gamma
2.2
Low - High ( 0 )
Applicable Page e-Manual
“Introduction of the
Machine”
Applicable Page
e-Manual
“Scan”
“E-mail” e-Manual
“Fax”
“Scan”
“E-mail” e-Manual
“Fax”
“Scan”
“E-mail”
e-Manual
“Scan”
“E-mail”
Item
PDF (Compact) Img. Quality
Text/Photo, Photo Mode
Text Mode
Default Screen for Send
Initialize TX Settings
RX Settings
2-Sided Print
Receive Reduction
RX Reduction
Reduce %
Reduce Direction
Received Page Footer
Toner Out Continuous Print
YCbCr Receive Gamma Val.
Fax Settings
User Settings
Register Unit Telephone #
Tel. Line Type Selection
Manual
Offhook Alarm
TX Settings
ECM TX
Settings
–
–
–
Data Size Priority
Normal
Image Quality Priority
–
–
–
Data Size Priority
Normal
Image Quality Priority
–
–
–
Favorites
One-touch
Default Screen
–
–
No
Yes
–
–
Off
On
–
–
Off
On
–
–
Auto
Fixed Reduction
97%, 95%, 90%, 75%
–
–
Vertical and Horizontal
Vertical Only
–
–
Off
On
–
–
Off
On
Gamma 1.0, Gamma 1.4, Gamma 1.8
, Gamma
2.2
Setting Menu
Applicable Page e-Manual
“Scan”
“E-mail”
e-Manual
“E-mail”
Max. 20 characters
–
–
Pulse
Tone
–
–
Off
On
* Not functional for this machine.
–
–
Off
On
13-9
13-10
Setting Menu
Item
Set Pause Time
Auto-redial
Redial Times
Redial Interval
TX Error Redial
Check Tone Before Sending
RX Settings
ECM RX
Reception Mode Selection
Incoming Ring
Remote RX
Manual/Auto Switch
RX Restriction
1 to 15 Seconds ( 2 )
Settings
–
–
Off
On
1 to 10 Times ( 2 )
2 to 99 Minutes ( 2 )
–
–
–
Off
All Pages
Error and 1st Page
–
–
Off
On
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Off
On
Auto RX
Fax/Tel Auto Switch
Manual RX
Answer Mode
DRPD. Select Fax
–
–
–
–
–
–
Off
On 1 to 99 Times ( 2 )
Off
On 00 to 99 ( 25 )
Off
On 1 to 99 Seconds ( 15 )
–
–
Off
On
Address Book Settings
Item
Register Address*
Fax
Register Name
Destination Registration
ECM TX
Sending Speed
Long Distance
Settings
Max. 16 characters
Max. 40 characters
–
–
Off
On
33600bps , 14400bps, 9600bps, 4800bps
Domestic , Long Distance (1), Long Distance
(2), Long Distance (3)
Applicable Page e-Manual
“Fax”
Applicable Page
Item
Register Name
Destination Registration
I-Fax
Register Name
Destination Registration
File
Register Name
Destination Registration
Host Name
Folder Path
User Name
Password
Group
Register Name
Destination Registration
Search LDAP Server
Display Name
Display Destination
ECM TX
Sending Speed
Long Distance
Settings
Max. 16 characters
Max. 120 characters
Max. 16 characters
Max. 120 characters
Max. 16 characters
FTP , Windows (SMB), Windows (SMB): Browse
FTP: Max. 47 characters
Windows (SMB): Max. 120 characters
Max. 120 characters
Max. 24 characters
FTP: Max. 24 characters
Windows (SMB): Max. 14 characters
Max. 16 characters
Max. 299 destinations
Max. 16 characters
When a fax number is selected from the search results:
Max. 40 characters
When an e-mail address is selected from the search results:
Max. 120 characters
–
–
Off
On
33600bps , 14400bps, 9600bps, 4800bps
Domestic , Long Distance (1), Long Distance
(2), Long Distance (3)
Setting Menu
Applicable Page
13-11
13-12
Setting Menu
Item
Register One-touch
Fax
Register Name
Register One-touch Name
Destination Registration
ECM TX
Sending Speed
Long Distance
Register Name
Register One-touch Name
Destination Registration
I-Fax
Register Name
Register One-touch Name
Destination Registration
File
Register Name
Register One-touch Name
Destination Registration
Host Name
Folder Path
User Name
Password
Group
Register Name
Register One-touch Name
Destination Registration
Settings
Max. 16 characters
Max. 12 characters
Max. 40 characters
–
–
Off
On
33600bps , 14400bps, 9600bps, 4800bps
Domestic , Long Distance (1), Long Distance
(2), Long Distance (3)
Max. 16 characters
Max. 12 characters
Max. 120 characters
Max. 16 characters
Max. 12 characters
Max. 120 characters
Max. 16 characters
Max. 12 characters
FTP , Windows (SMB), Windows (SMB): Browse
FTP: Max. 47 characters
Windows (SMB): Max. 120 characters
Max. 120 characters
Max. 24 characters
FTP: Max. 24 characters
Windows (SMB): Max. 14 characters
Max. 16 characters
Max. 12 characters
Max. 299 destinations
(Max. 199 destinations for the Color imageCLASS MF9220Cdn)
Applicable Page
Item
Search LDAP Server
Display Name
Display Destination
ECM TX
Sending Speed
Long Distance
* Only for the Color imageCLASS MF9280Cdn.
Printer Settings
Item
Number of Copies
Settings
Max. 16 characters
When a fax number is selected from the search results:
Max. 40 characters
When an e-mail address is selected from the search results:
Max. 120 characters
–
–
Off
On
33600bps , 14400bps, 9600bps, 4800bps
Domestic , Long Distance (1), Long Distance
(2), Long Distance (3)
1 to 999 Copies ( 1 )
Settings
2-Sided
Paper Feed
Default Paper Size
–
–
2-Sided
1-Sided
Default Paper Type
LTR , LGL, STMT, EXEC, FLSC, OFI, B-OFI, M-OFI,
G-LTR, G-LGL, COM10, Monarch, DL, ISO-C5,
ISO-B5, A4, A5, B5
Plain 1, Plain 2 , Recycled Paper, Color, Bond,
Heavy 1, Heavy 2, Transparencies, Labels,
Envelope
- Off
- On
Paper Size Override
Print Quality
Gradation Level
Toner Density
Cyan (C)
Magenta (M)
Yellow (Y)
Black (Bk)
–
–
High Gradation 1
High Gradation 2
Lighter - Darker ( 0 )
Lighter - Darker ( 0 )
Lighter - Darker ( 0 )
Lighter - Darker ( 0 )
Setting Menu
Applicable Page
Applicable Page e-Manual
“Print”
e-Manual
“Print”
13-13
13-14
Setting Menu
Save Toner*
Item
Line Control
Layout
Binding Location
Unit of Measure
Margin
Auto Continue
Collate
Timeout
Personality*
Mode Priority*
Auto Select*
PS
PCL
Color Mode
Gradation Settings
Gradation
Graphics
Image
Compressed Image Output
–
–
–
–
Settings
Off
On
Resolution Priority
Gradation Priority
–
–
Long Edge
Short Edge
–
–
Millimeter
Inch
-1.97 to +1.97 inch ( 0.00
)
(-50.0 to +50.0 mm (0.0))
–
–
Off
On
–
–
–
–
Off
On
Off
Timeout (5 to 300 seconds) ( 15 )
–
–
–
Auto
PS
PCL
–
–
–
Off
PS
PCL
–
–
Off
On
–
–
–
–
–
Off
On
Auto Detect
Color
Black and White
–
–
–
Off
Smooth 1
Smooth 2
–
–
Off
On
–
–
Off
On
–
–
Output
Display Error
Applicable Page e-Manual
“Print”
Item
Initialize Printer Settings
PCL Settings*
Paper Save
Orientation
Font Number
Point Size
Pitch
Form Lines
Symbol Set
Custom Paper Size Setting
Unit of Measure
X dimension
Y dimension
Append CR to LF
Enlarge A4 Print Width
Halftones
Text
Graphics
Image
Settings
–
–
No
Yes
–
–
Off
On
–
–
Portrait
Landscape
0 to 104 ( 0 )
4.00 to 999.75 point ( 12 )
0.44 to 99.99 cpi ( 10 )
5 to 128 Lines ( 60 )
ARABIC8, DESKTOP, GREEK8, HEBREW7,
HEBREW8, ISO4, ISO6, ISO11, ISO15, ISO17,
ISO21, ISO60, ISO69, ISOCYR, ISOGRK, ISOHEB,
ISOL1, ISOL2, ISOL5, ISOL6, LEGAL, MATH8,
MCTEXT, MSPUBL, PC775, PC8*, PC850, PC851,
PC852, PC862, PC864, PC866, PC8DN, PC8GRK,
PC8TK, PC1004, PIFONT, PSMATH, PSTEXT,
ROMAN8, VNINTL, VNMATH, VNUS, WIN30,
WINARB, WINBALT, WINCYR, WINGRK, WINL1,
WINL2, WINL5
–
–
Off
On
–
–
Millimeter
Inch
3.00 to 8.50 inch ( 8.50
)
(76.2 to 216.0 mm (216.0))
5.00 to 14.00 inch ( 14.00
)
(127.0 to 356.0 mm (356.0))
–
–
Yes
No
–
–
Off
On
–
–
Off
On
–
–
Resolution
Gradation
–
–
Resolution
Gradation
–
–
Resolution
Gradation
Setting Menu
Applicable Page e-Manual
“Print”
13-15
13-16
Setting Menu
Item
RGB Source Profile
Text
Graphics
Image
Output Profile
Text
Graphics
Image
Matching Method
Text
Graphics
Image
Gray Compensation
Text
Graphics
Image
CMS (Matching) Selection
–
–
–
–
–
–
Perceptual
Saturation
Colorimetric
Perceptual
Saturation
Colorimetric
–
–
–
Perceptual
Saturation
Colorimetric
–
–
Off
On
–
–
Off
On
–
–
–
–
Off
On
Printer
Host
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
– sRGB
Gamma 1.5
Gamma 1.8
Gamma 2.4
sRGB
Gamma 1.5
Gamma 1.8
Gamma 2.4
–
–
–
– sRGB
Gamma 1.5
Gamma 1.8
Gamma 2.4
–
–
–
–
Normal
Photo
Normal
Photo
–
–
Normal
Photo
Settings Applicable Page e-Manual
“Print”
Item
CMS (Matching) / Gamma
Text
Graphics
Image
Gamma Correction
Text
Graphics
Image
Advanced Smoothing
Advanced Smoothing
Graphics
Text
PS Settings*
Job Timeout
Wait Timeout
Print PS Errors
RGB Source Profile
CMYK Simulation Profile
Use Grayscale Profile
Output Profile
Matching Method
Settings
–
–
Gamma
CMS
–
–
Gamma
CMS
–
–
Gamma
CMS
1.0, 1.4
, 1.8, 2.2
1.0, 1.4
, 1.8, 2.2
1.0, 1.4
, 1.8, 2.2
–
–
–
Off
Smooth 1
Smooth 2
–
–
Off
On
–
–
Off
On
0 to 3600 seconds ( 0 )
0 to 3600 seconds ( 300 )
–
–
Off
On
–
–
–
– sRGB
Gamma 1.5
Gamma 1.8
Gamma 2.4
–
–
US Web Ctd(Canon)
Euro Standard
–
–
Off
On
–
–
–
–
Normal
Photo
TR Normal
TR Photo
–
–
–
Perceptual
Saturation
Colorimetric
Setting Menu
Applicable Page e-Manual
“Print”
13-17
Setting Menu
Item
RGB Pure Black Process
CMYK Pure Blk Process
Pure Black Text
–
–
Off
On
–
–
Off
On
–
–
Off
On
Halftones
Error Diffusion
Text
Graphics
Image
–
–
Off
On
–
–
Resolution
Gradation
–
–
Resolution
Gradation
–
–
Resolution
Gradation
Advanced Smoothing
Advanced Smoothing
Graphics
Text
Toner Vol. Adjustment
* Only for the Color imageCLASS MF9280Cdn.
Timer Settings
–
–
–
Off
Smooth 1
Smooth 2
–
–
Off
On
–
–
Off
On
–
–
Normal
Gradation
Item
Date & Time Settings
Current Time Settings
Time Zone Settings
Settings
Settings
MM/DD/YYYY
GMT-12:00 to GMT+12:00 ( GMT-5:00 )
13-18
Daylight Saving Time Set.
Auto Sleep Time*
Auto Clear Time
–
–
–
–
Off
On
Off
On (3 to 240 minutes) ( 15 )
0=Off, 1 to 9 minutes (
* We recommend that you use this option in the default setting.
2 )
Applicable Page e-Manual
“Print”
Applicable Page
e-Manual
“Introduction of the
Machine”
Adjustment/Cleaning
Item
Auto Gradation Correction
Full Correction
Quick Correction
Copy Image Correction
Feeder Dirty Auto Correct.
First Calibration
ACS Function Adjustment
Feeder
Platen Glass
Color Black Char. Process
Feeder
Platen Glass
Image Special Processing
Paper Length Confirmation
Special Mode P
Fixing Unit Cleaning
Feeder Cleaning
Settings
Test Print 1
Start
Test Print 1
–
–
Off
On
–
–
Off
On
Color Priority - B&W Priority ( 0 )
Color Priority - B&W Priority ( 0 )
Color Priority - B&W Priority ( 0 )
Color Priority - B&W Priority ( 0 )
–
–
–
Off
Level 1
Level 2
–
–
Off
On
–
–
Off
On
Start Cleaning
Start
Setting Menu
Applicable Page e-Manual
“Maintenance”
13-19
13-20
Setting Menu
Report Settings
Item Settings
Settings
TX Report
Display Send Original
–
–
–
Off
On
Only When Error Occurs
–
–
Off
On
Activity Report
Auto Print
Send/Receive Separate
Daily Activity Rep. Time
RX Report
Fax Activity Report
Auto Print
Send/Receive Separate
Daily Activity Rep. Time
Print List
Address Book List
Address Book*
One-touch
User’s Data List
* Only for the Color imageCLASS MF9280Cdn.
–
–
No
Yes
–
–
No
Yes
–
–
No
Yes
–
–
–
–
–
–
Off
On
Off
On
Off
On
–
–
–
–
–
–
Off
On
Off
On
Off
On
–
–
–
Off
On
Only When Error Occurs
Applicable Page e-Manual
“Introduction of the
Machine”
System Management Settings
Item
System Manager Info. Settings
System Mgmt. Dept. ID
System Mgmt. Password
System Manager Name
Device Info. Settings
Device Name
Location Information
Dept. ID Management
Max. 32 characters
Max. 32 characters
–
–
Off
On
Settings
Max. 7 digits ( 7654321 )
Max. 7 digits ( 7654321 )
Max. 32 characters
Register Dept. ID/Pass.
Register
Dept. ID
Password
Limit On/Off & Page Limit
Total Print Limit
Total Color Print Limit
Total Black Print Limit
Color Copy Limit
Color Scan Limit
Color Print Limit
Black Copy Limit
Black Scan Limit
Black Print Limit
Max. 7 characters
Max. 7 characters
–
–
Off
On (0 to 999999)( 0 )
–
–
Off
On (0 to 999999)( 0 )
–
–
Off
On (0 to 999999)( 0 )
–
–
Off
On (0 to 999999)( 0 )
–
–
Off
On (0 to 999999)( 0 )
–
–
Off
On (0 to 999999)( 0 )
–
–
Off
On (0 to 999999)( 0 )
–
–
Off
On (0 to 999999)( 0 )
–
–
Off
On (0 to 999999)( 0 )
Setting Menu
Applicable Page e-Manual
“Security”
e-Manual
“Security”
13-21
13-22
Setting Menu
Page Totals
Item
Print List
All Clear
Allow Unknown ID Printing
Allow Unknown ID R. Scan
Allow Black Copy Jobs
User ID Management
Network Settings
TCP/IP Settings
IPv4 Settings
IP Address Settings
Manual Settings
IP Address
Subnet Mask
Gateway Address
Obtain Automatically
PING Command
IP Address Range Settings
Register
Single Address
Multiple Destinations
DNS Settings
DNS Server Settings
Primary DNS Server
Secondary DNS Server
DNS Host/Domain Name
Settings
Total Prints, Total Color Print, Total Black
Prints, Color Copy, Color Scan, Color Print,
Black Copy, Black Scan, Black Print
All, Total Print Only, Color Only, Black Only
–
–
No
Yes
–
–
–
–
–
–
Off
On
Off
On
Off
On
–
–
Off
On
–
–
Off
On
IP Address ( 0.0.0.0
)
IP Address ( 0.0.0.0
)
IP Address ( 0.0.0.0
)
–
–
–
DHCP
BOOTP
RARP
IP Address ( 0.0.0.0
)
–
–
Off
On
IP Address ( 0.0.0.0
)
Max. 10 IPv4 Addresses
IP Address ( 0.0.0.0
)
IP Address ( 0.0.0.0
)
Applicable Page e-Manual
“Security” e-Manual
“Network Settings”
Item
Host Name
Domain Name
DNS Dynamic Update Set.
IPv6 Settings
Use IPv6
Stateless Address Settings
Manual Address Settings
Manual Address
Prefix Length
Default Router Address
Use DHCPv6
PING Command
IPv6 address
Host Name
IP Address Range Settings
Register
Single Address
Multiple Destinations
Prefix Address
DNS Settings
DNS Server Settings
Primary DNS Server
Secondary DNS Server
DNS Host/Domain Name
Use Same Host/
Domain as IPv4
Host Name
Settings
Max. 47 characters ( Canon****** (“******” represents the last six digits of a MAC address))
Max. 47 characters
–
–
Off
On
–
–
Off
On
–
–
Off
On
–
–
Off
On
IP Address
0 to 128 ( 64 )
IP Address
–
–
Off
On
IP Address
Max. 47 characters
–
–
Off
On
IP Address
Max. 10 IPv6 Addresses
IP Address
IP Address
IP Address
–
–
Off
On
Max. 47 characters ( Canon****** (“******” represents the last six digits of a MAC address))
Setting Menu
Applicable Page e-Manual
“Network Settings”
13-23
13-24
Setting Menu
Item
Domain Name
DNS Dynamic Update Set.
Manual Address Regist.
Register Stateful Address
WINS Configuration
WINS Server Address
LPD Print Settings
RAW Print Settings
Use Bidirectional
Max. 47 characters
Settings
–
–
Off
On
–
–
–
–
Off
On
Off
On
–
–
–
–
Off
On
Off
On
–
–
–
–
Off
On
Off
On
IP Address ( 0.0.0.0
)
WSD Print Settings
Use WSD Print
Use WSD Browsing
Use Multicast Discovery
SNTP Settings
Polling Interval
NTP Server Address
NTP Server Check
Use PASV Mode for FTP
FTP Extension
–
–
Off
On
–
–
Off
On
–
–
–
–
Off
On
Off
On
1 to 48 hours ( 24 )
Max. 47 characters
Start
–
–
Off
On
–
–
Off
On
Certificate Settings
Key and Certificate List
Certificate Details
Erase
Displays Version, Serial No., Signature
Algorithm, Issue Destination, Validity
Start, Validity End, Issuer, Public Key, Cert
Thumbprint
–
–
No
Yes
Applicable Page e-Manual
“Network Settings”
Item
Display Use Location
CA Certificate List
Certificate Details
Erase
Register Key and Cert.
Register
Key Name
Password
Erase
CA Cert. Registration
Register
Erase
Use HTTP
Port Number Settings
LPD
RAW
HTTP
SMTP Receive
POP3 Receive
FTP Sending
SMTP Send
SNMP
WSD
Settings
Displays what the key pair is being used for
Displays Version, Serial No., Signature
Algorithm, Issue Destination, Validity
Start, Validity End, Issuer, Public Key, Cert
Thumbprint
–
–
No
Yes
Setting Menu
Applicable Page
Max. 24 characters
Max. 24 characters
–
–
No
Yes
–
–
No
Yes
–
–
No
Yes
–
–
Off
On
1 to 65535 ( 515 )
1 to 65535 ( 9100 )
1 to 65535 ( 80 )
1 to 65535 ( 25 )
1 to 65535 ( 110 )
1 to 65535 ( 21 )
1 to 65535 ( 25 )
1 to 65535 ( 161 )
1 to 65535 ( 3702 ) e-Manual
“Network Settings”
13-25
13-26
Setting Menu
Item
Proxy Settings
Receiving MAC Address
Confirm Dept. ID Password
SMB Settings
Server Name
Workgroup Name
Comment
Use LM Announce
SNMP Settings
Community Name 1
Community Name 2
Writable SNMP1
Writable SNMP2
Printer Mgt. Info from Host
Dedicated Port Settings
Startup Time Settings
Ethernet Driver Settings
Auto Detect
Communication Mode
Ethernet Type
Settings
Not functional for this machine.
–
–
–
–
Off
On
Off
On
–
–
Off
On
Max. 15 characters
Max. 15 characters
Max. 48 characters
–
–
Off
On
–
–
Off
On
Max. 15 characters ( public )
Max. 15 characters
–
–
–
–
Off
On
Off
On
–
–
–
–
Off
On
On
Off
0 to 300 seconds ( 0 )
–
–
On
Off
–
–
–
–
Half Duplex
Full Duplex
10 Base-T
100 Base-TX
Applicable Page e-Manual
“Network Settings”
Item
E-mail/I-Fax
SMTP Receive
POP
SMTP Server
E-mail Address
POP Server
POP Address
POP Password
POP Interval
Authentication/
Encryption
POP Auth. Before Send
SMTP Authentication
User Name
Password
IEEE802.1X Settings
Login Name
Use TLS
Key and Certificate
Set as Default Key
Certificate Details
Display Use Location
–
–
Off
On
–
–
Off
On
Max. 47 characters
Max. 64 characters
Max. 47 characters
Max. 32 characters
Max. 32 characters
0 to 99 minutes ( 0 )
Settings
–
–
Off
On
–
–
Off
On
Max. 64 characters
Max. 32 characters
–
–
Off
On
Max. 24 characters
–
–
Off
On
–
–
No
Yes
Displays Version, Serial No., Signature
Algorithm, Issue Destination, Validity
Start, Validity End, Issuer, Public Key, Cert
Thumbprint
Displays what the key pair is being used for
Setting Menu
Applicable Page e-Manual
“Network Settings”
13-27
13-28
Setting Menu
Use TTLS
Item
TTLS Set. (TTLS Internal
Protocol)
Use PEAP
LoginName as UserName
User Name
Password
Communication Settings
E-mail/I-Fax Settings
Send Data Size Limit
Divide TX Data Oversize
Default Subject
Fax Settings
Send Start Speed
Receive Start Speed
Memory Lock Settings
Memory Lock Password
Report Print
Memory Lock Time Settings
Select Country/Region
–
–
–
–
Off
On
MSCHAPv2
PAP
–
–
–
–
Off
On
Off
On
Max. 24 characters
Max. 24 characters
Settings Applicable Page e-Manual
“Network Settings”
0 to 99 MB ( 3 )
–
–
Off
On
Max. 40 characters ( Attached Image )
33600bps , 14400bps, 9600bps, 7200bps,
4800bps, 2400bps
–
–
33600bps , 14400bps, 9600bps, 7200bps,
4800bps, 2400bps
Off
On
Max. 7 digits
–
–
–
–
Off
On
Do Not Specify
Specify
Brazil, Canada, United States, Mexico, Others e-Manual
“Fax”
“E-mail”
Starter Guide “Set Up the
Machine”
Item
Forwarding Settings
Register
Fowarding Cond. Name
Forwarding Conditions Settings
Forwarding Condition
Forwarding Destination
File Format
Divide Pages
Settings
Max. 50 characters
–
–
Fax
I-Fax disregard , Do Not Exist*, equals, differs from, begins with, ends with, contains, does not contain
* Only when <Fax> is selected in <Forwarding
Conditions Settings>.
Select from the list of registered addresses
When <Fax> is selected in <Forwarding
–
Conditions Settings>:
– TIFF
–
–
–
–
When <I-Fax> is selected in <Forwarding
Conditions Settings>:
TIFF(Black)/PDF(Color)
TIFF(Black)/JPEG(Color)
PDF(Black)/JPEG(Color)
–
–
Off
On
Forward w/o Condition
Forwarding Without Conditions
Forwarding Destination
File Format
Divide Pages
–
–
Fax
I-Fax
Select from the list of registered addresses
–
–
When <Fax> is selected in <Forwarding
Without Conditions>:
TIFF
When <I-Fax> is selected in <Forwarding
–
–
Without Conditions>:
– TIFF(Black)/PDF(Color)
TIFF(Black)/JPEG(Color)
– PDF(Black)/JPEG(Color)
–
–
Off
On
Setting Menu
Applicable Page
13-29
Setting Menu
Item
Erase
Print List
Details/Edit
Store/Print When Fwding.
Print Image
Store Image to Memory
Remote UI
Restrict the Send Function
Address Book Password
Restrict New Addresses
Allow Fax Driver TX
Restrict Sending From Log
Confirm Entered Fax No.
Restrict Seq. Broadcast
13-30
Auto Online/Offline
Auto Online
Auto Offline
Register LDAP Server
Register
Server Name
Server Address
Loc. to Start Search
Port Number
Search Dest. Limit
Search Timeout
Settings
–
–
No
Yes
–
–
No
Yes
Same as <Register>
–
–
–
Off
On
Only When Error Occurs
–
–
Do Not Store
Only When Error Occurs
–
–
Off
On
Max. 7 digits
–
–
Off
On
–
–
–
–
Off
On
Off
On
–
–
–
–
–
Off
On
Off
Broadcast Confirmation
Prohibit Broadcast
–
–
Off
On
–
–
Off
On
Max. 24 characters
Max. 47 characters
Max. 120 characters
1 to 65535 ( 389 )
1 to 1000 ( 100 )
30 to 300 seconds ( 60 )
Applicable Page
e-Manual
“Security” e-Manual
“Network Settings”
Item
Login Information
Do Not Use
Server LDAP Version and
Char. Code
–
–
–
–
–
–
Ver. 3 (UTF-8)
Ver. 2 (UTF-8)
Ver. 2 (SJIS)
Ver. 2 (EUC)
Ver. 2 (JIS)
Ver. 2 (ISO8859)
Settings
Use
User Name
Password
Display Auth. Screen
Server LDAP Version and
Char. Code
Reg/Edit LDAP Search Attributes
Not Registered 1
Display Name
Attribute Name
Not Registered 2
Display Name
Attribute Name
Max. 120 characters
Max. 24 characters
–
–
Off
On
–
–
–
–
–
–
Ver. 3 (UTF-8)
Ver. 2 (UTF-8)
Ver. 2 (SJIS)
Ver. 2 (EUC)
Ver. 2 (JIS)
Ver. 2 (ISO8859)
Use (Sec. Auth.): Ver 3 (UTF-8)
User Name
Password
Domain Name
Display Auth. Screen
Details/Edit
Erase
Print List
Max. 120 characters
Max. 24 characters
Max. 120 characters
–
–
Off
On
Same as <Register>
–
–
No
Yes
–
–
No
Yes
Max. 11 characters
Max. 64 characters
Max. 11 characters
Max. 64 characters
Setting Menu
Applicable Page e-Manual
“Network Settings”
13-31
13-32
Setting Menu
Job Log Display
Item
Memory Media Store Log
USB Device
Dept. ID/User Name Display
Settings
–
–
–
–
Off
On
Do Not Retain
Retain
–
–
Off
On
–
–
Off
On
UFRII LT, PCL5c, PCL6, FAX, PS3
Applicable Page e-Manual
“Security”
PDL Selection (PnP) e-Manual
“Introduction of the
Machine”
Memory Media Settings
Store on Memory Media
Direct Print*
Update Firmware
Start Setup Guide
* Only for the Color imageCLASS MF9280Cdn.
–
–
–
–
–
–
Off
On e-Manual
“Security”
Off
On
This function is used only when it is necessary to update the firmware.
No
Yes e-Manual
“Introduction of the
Machine”
Appendix
Specifications .............................................................14-2
General ................................................................................. 14-2
Copier .................................................................................... 14-3
Printer ................................................................................... 14-3
Facsimile .............................................................................. 14-4
Telephone ............................................................................ 14-4
Send ....................................................................................... 14-5
Cassette Feeding Unit-AC1 (Optional) ..................... 14-6
Index ...........................................................................14-7
Chapter
14
14-1
14-2
Specifications
Specifications
General
Type
Power Source
Power Consumption
Weight
Dimensions
Installation Space
Environmental Conditions
Display Languages
Acceptable Documents
Acceptable Paper Stock
Printable Area
Scanning Area
Personal Desktop
120 V-127 V, 60 Hz (Power requirements differ depending on the country in which you purchased the product.)
Max: Less than 1300 W, 1350 W (with optional Cassette Feeding Unit-AC1)
Approx. 96 lb (44 kg)
(including toner cartridges)
21 1/2" (W) × 20 3/4" (D) × 24 7/8" (H) (546 mm (W) × 527 mm (D) × 632 mm (H))
21 1/2" (W) × 21 3/8" (D) × 36 7/8" (H) (546 mm (W) × 543 mm (D) × 936 mm (H))
(with optional Cassette Feeding Unit-AC1)
21 1/2" (W) × 44 7/8" (D) × 31 1/4" (H) (546 mm (W) × 1140 mm (D) × 792 mm (H))
(with drawer pulled out and with back cover and feeder open)
21 1/2" (W) × 44 7/8" (D) × 43 1/8" (H) (546 mm (W) × 1140 mm (D) × 1095 mm (H))
(with optional Cassette Feeding Unit-AC1 attached, drawer pulled out, and back cover and feeder open)
Temperature: 50°F–86°F (10°C–30°C)
Humidity: 20%–80% RH (no condensation)
ENGLISH/FRENCH/SPANISH/PORTUGUESE
See “Originals Requirements,” on p. 2-2.
See “Paper Requirements,” on p. 2-7.
See “Printable Area,” on p. 2-9.
See “Scanning Area,” on p. 2-3.
Copier
Scanning Resolution
Printing Resolution
Magnification
Copy Speed
No. of Copies
Warm-Up Time
First Print Time
Printer
Printing Method
Paper Handling
Paper Delivery
Print Speed
Printing Resolution
Number of Tones
Toner Cartridge
Specifications
600 dpi × 600 dpi
600 dpi × 600 dpi
1:1 ± 1.0%, 1:2.00, 1:1.29, 1:0.78, 1:0.64, 1:0.50
Zoom 0.50–2.00, 1% increments
Direct: Color: 22 cpm (LTR), Black: 22 cpm (LTR)
Max. 99 copies less than 60 sec*. (from when main power switch is turned on until standby display appears, when temperature is 68°F (20°C) and humidity is 65%)
* Warm-up time may differ depending on the condition and environment of the machine.
Platen glass: Less than 12.5 sec. (LTR)
Feeder: Less than 18.5 sec. (LTR)
Indirect electrostatic method (On-demand fixing)
–
–
Paper drawer: 250 sheets (20 lb (75 g/m
250 sheets (20 lb (75 g/m 2 ))
2 )) x 1
Stack Bypass tray: 100 sheets (20 lb (75 g/m 2 ))
Direct: Color: 22 cpm (LTR), Black: 22 cpm (LTR)
600 dpi x 600 dpi (2400 dpi enhanced x 600 dpi)
256
See “Toner Cartridges,” on p. 1-15.
14-3
14-4
Specifications
Facsimile
Applicable Line
Compatibility
Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN)* 1
G3
Data Compression Schemes
Modem Speed
MH, MR, MMR, JBIG
33.6 Kbps
Automatic fallback
Transmission Speed Approx. 3 seconds/page* 2 at 33.6 Kbps, ECM-JBIG, transmitting from the memory
Transmission/Reception Memory More than 1000 pages* 2
(total pages of transmission/reception)
Fax Resolution <200 × 100 dpi>: 203 pels/in. × 98 lines/in. (8 pels/mm × 3.85 lines/mm)
<200 × 200 dpi>: 203 pels/in. × 196 lines/in. (8 pels/mm × 7.7 lines/mm)
<200 × 400 dpi>: 203 pels/in. × 391 lines/in. (8 pels/mm × 15.4 lines/mm)
<400 × 400 dpi>: 406 pels/in. × 391 lines/in. (16 pels/mm × 15.4 lines/mm)
Dialing – Color imageCLASS MF9280Cdn:
Speed dialing
Address Book dialing (100 destinations)
One-touch speed dialing (200 destinations)
Group dialing (299 destinations)
Receiving
Report
– Color imageCLASS MF9220Cdn:
Speed dialing
One-touch speed dialing (200 destinations)
Group dialing (199 destinations)
–
–
–
–
–
Regular dialing (with numeric keys)
Automatic redialing
Manual redialing (Recalling from the log.)
Sequential broadcast
Color imageCLASS MF9280Cdn: 332 destinations
Color imageCLASS MF9220Cdn: 232 destinations
TTI (Transmit Terminal Identification)
–
–
Automatic reception
Remote reception by telephone (Default ID: 25)
–
–
–
ACTIVITY REPORT (after every 40 transactions)
TX (Transmission)/RX (Reception) REPORT
FAX ACTIVITY REPORT (after every 40 transactions)
* 1 The Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) currently supports 28.8 Kbps modem speed or lower, depending on telephone line conditions.
* 2 Based on ITU-T Standard Chart No. 1, JBIG standard mode.
Telephone
Connection External telephone/answering machine (CNG detecting signal)/data modem
Specifications
Send
Send to file server
Communication Protocol
Data Format
Resolution
System Environment
FTP (TCP/IP), SMB (TCP/IP)
TIFF (B&W), PDF (B&W), JPEG (Color), PDF (Color) (Compact)
TIFF, PDF (B&W): 100 × 100 dpi, 150 × 150 dpi, 200 × 100 dpi, 200 × 200 dpi,
200 × 400 dpi, 300 × 300 dpi, 400 × 400 dpi, 600 × 600 dpi
JPEG, PDF (color): 100 × 100 dpi, 150 × 150 dpi, 200 × 200 dpi, 300 × 300 dpi,
600 × 600 dpi
PDF (color) (compact): 300 × 300 dpi
Windows XP Professional/Home Edition, Windows 2000 Server/Professional (SP1 or later), Windows Vista, Windows 7, Windows Server 2003, Windows Server 2008,
Solaris Version 2.6 or later, Mac OS X, Red Hat Linux 7.2
Interface
Color Mode
Original Type
E-mail and I-Fax Features
Communication Protocol
Data Format
Resolution
100BASE-TX, 10BASE-T
Color, B&W (black and white)
Text, Text/Photo, Photo
SMTP, POP3, I-FAX (Simple mode)
TIFF (B&W), PDF (B&W), JPEG (Color), PDF (Compact) (Color)
I-FAX: 200 ×100 dpi, 200 × 200 dpi
TIFF, PDF (B&W): 100 × 100 dpi, 150 × 150 dpi, 200 × 100 dpi, 200 × 200 dpi,
200 × 400 dpi, 300 × 300 dpi, 400 × 400 dpi, 600 × 600 dpi
JPEG, PDF (color): 100 × 100 dpi, 150 × 150 dpi, 200 × 200 dpi, 300 × 300 dpi,
600 × 600 dpi
PDF (color) (compact): 300 × 300 dpi
System Environment
Original Size
Windows XP Professional/Home Edition, Windows 2000 Server/Professional (SP1 or later), Windows Vista, Windows 7, Windows Server 2003, Windows Server 2008,
Solaris Version 2.6 or later, Mac OS X, Red Hat Linux 7.2
E-mail: LTR, LGL, A4, A5, B5
I-Fax: LTR, LGL* 1 , A4, A5, B5
* 1 Sent as LTR
Mail Forwarding Server Software Sendmail 8.93 or later (UNIX)
Microsoft Exchange Server (Windows)
The following versions are supported:
–
–
Microsoft Exchange Server 5.5 + Service Pack 1 or later
Microsoft Exchange Server 2000
– Microsoft Exchange Server 2003
* Microsoft Exchange Server 2007 is not supported.
Lotus Domino R4.6 or later (Windows)
14-5
14-6
Specifications
Send
Mail Receiving Server Software Qpopper 2.53 or later (UNIX)
Microsoft Exchange Server (Windows)
The following versions are supported:
– Microsoft Exchange Server 5.5 + Service Pack 1 or later
–
–
Microsoft Exchange Server 2000
Microsoft Exchange Server 2003
* Microsoft Exchange Server 2007 is not supported.
Lotus Domino R4.6 or later (Windows)
Cassette Feeding Unit-AC1 (Optional)
Paper Feeding System
Acceptable Paper Stock
Power Source
Dimensions
Weight
500 sheets × 1 drawer (20 lb (75 g/m 2 ))
See “Paper Requirements,” on p. 2-7.
From the main unit
17 3/8" (W) × 21 3/8" (D) × 12" (H) (440 mm (W) × 543 mm (D) × 304 mm (H))
Approx. 28.7 lb (13 kg)
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
Index
Numerics
AlphabetGroup
A
Address Book
Registering e-mail addresses 3-10
Registering group addresses 3-24
Registering I-fax addresses 3-16
Address details
B
Base Color
Index
Basic sending method
Scanning documents to a file server 8-6
Scanning documents to a USB memory 8-8
C
Canceling
Change Paper Size
Checking
Fax transmission/reception log 5-150
Checking Current Settings 4-63
Checking the device information 1-18
Cleaning
14-7
14-8
Index
When the message does not disappear 12-19
Left side of control panel 1-10
Right side of control panel 1-10
Copier
Copy Jobs
Copy Logs
Custom Keys
D
Delivery feeder unit (Electrostatic transfer belt)
Density
Device Information
Display parts and functions 1-11
Select memory media screen 1-14
Send type selection screen 1-13
E
E-mail addresses
Registering in the Address Book 3-10
Erasing addresses from the Address Book 3-30
Original Frame Erase 4-44, 4-45
F
Facsimile
Favorites
Fax numbers
Registering in the Address Book 3-2
File server addresses
Forwarding
Checking/changing settings 5-138
Storing settings without conditions 5-132
G
General
Group addresses
Registering in the Address Book 3-24
I
I-fax addresses
Registering in the Address Book 3-16
If a Message Such as <Paper diff. from set size/
Changing the Paper Size Setting 12-42
If a Power failure occurs 12-45
Index
If the delivery feeder unit is not installed correctly
Image Quality
Inside of the machine
Introduction to Using Print Functions 7-4
J
L
M
Machine components
Machine functions
Maintenance
Replacing the Toner Cartridges 11-7
14-9
14-10
Index
N
O
One-Touch
Checking/editing address details 3-59
Registering e-mail addresses 3-40
Registering file server addresses 3-49
Registering group addresses 3-55
Optional cassette
Optional Cassette Feeding Unit-AC1 1-3
Overview
Overview of Print Functions 7-2
P
Paper Drawer 1
Paper Drawer 2
[Power] switch (Sub power supply) 1-6, 1-10
Printer
Printing Documents from Computer 7-6
Printing from Memory Media 7-15
Printing from Memory Media (Direct Print) 7-12
Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet 7-10
R
Receive mode
S
Send
Setting Menu
Setting paper size and type 2-22
For the stack bypass tray 2-22
Sharpness
Slide guides for stack bypass tray 1-3
Recalling irregular paper size 4-17
Registering irregular paper size 2-26
Stack bypass tray extension 1-3
Standard Mode
Standard send settings
Restoring to default setting 5-87
[Status Monitor/Cancel] key 1-7
Index
14-11
14-12
Index
Storing/editing Address Book 3-2
Checking/editing address details 3-27
Erasing addresses from the Address Book
Registering e-mail addresses in the Address
Registering fax numbers in the Address Book
Registering file server addresses in the
Registering group addresses in the Address
Registering I-fax addresses in the Address
Storing/editing One-Touch 3-32
Checking/editing address details 3-59
Registering e-mail addresses in One-Touch
Registering fax numbers in One-Touch 3-32
Registering file server addresses in One-
Registering group addresses in One-Touch
Registering I-fax addresses in One-Touch
T
Telephone
Setting the daylight saving time 1-24
Transporting the Machine 11-19
U
V
W
When the message does not disappear
CANON INC.
30-2, Shimomaruko 3-chome, Ohta-ku, Tokyo 146-8501, Japan
CANON MARKETING JAPAN INC.
16-6, Konan 2-chome, Minato-ku, Tokyo 108-8011, Japan
CANON U.S.A., INC.
One Canon Plaza, Lake Success, NY 11042, U.S.A.
CANON EUROPA N.V.
Bovenkerkerweg, 59-61, 1185 XB Amstelveen, The Netherlands
CANON CHINA CO. LTD.
15F Jinbao Building No.89, Jinbao Street, Dongcheng District, Beijing 100005, PRC
CANON SINGAPORE PTE LTD
1 HarbourFront Avenue, #04-01 Keppel Bay Tower, Singapore 098632
CANON AUSTRALIA PTY LTD
1 Thomas Holt Drive, North Ryde, Sydney NSW 2113, Australia
CANON GLOBAL WORLDWIDE SITES http://www.canon.com/
FT5-3332 (000) xxxxxxxxxx © CANON INC. 2010 PRINTED IN CHINA
advertisement
Key Features
- Color and B/W copying
- Faxing (including from a computer and I-fax)
- Printing from a computer or memory media
- Scanning to a networked computer, file server, or USB memory
- E-mail capability
- Network connectivity
- Security features
- Remote User Interface for easy management from a computer